You are on page 1of 4829

R

OWNER MANUAL
R

Contents
Quick start USING SEAT BELTS DURING PREGNANCY.... 69
QUICK START ................................................... 7
Airbags
Filling station information PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................ 70
FILLING STATION INFORMATION................... 38 SIDE AIRBAGS ............................................... 72
CURTAIN AIRBAGS ........................................ 72
Introduction DISABLING THE PASSENGER AIRBAG........... 73
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY.................................... 40 AIRBAG WARNING LAMP .............................. 75
LABEL LOCATIONS ......................................... 40 AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATION................... 75
HEALTH AND SAFETY..................................... 41
DATA RECORDING.......................................... 41 Child safety
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES ............................ 42 CHILD SEATS ................................................. 76
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING ............................ 78
Keys and remote controls ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS................................ 80
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ............................ 44 CHILD SAFETY LOCKS ................................... 82
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO
FREQUENCIES ................................................ 44 Steering wheel
USING THE KEY .............................................. 45 ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL .............. 83
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL...... 45 HORN ............................................................. 83
AUDIO CONTROL ........................................... 83
Locks VOICE CONTROL ............................................ 84
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING............................ 47 CRUISE CONTROL.......................................... 84

Engine immobiliser Lighting


PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ............................ 50 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................... 85
CODED KEYS .................................................. 50 LIGHTING CONTROL ...................................... 86
FRONT FOG LAMPS........................................ 87
Alarm REAR FOG LAMPS.......................................... 87
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ............................ 51 ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS....................... 88
ARMING THE ALARM ..................................... 51 HEADLAMP LEVELLING ................................. 88
SWITCHING OFF THE ALARM......................... 52 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS...................... 89
TILT SENSOR.................................................. 53 ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS). 89
PANIC ALARM ................................................ 53 DIRECTION INDICATORS ............................... 91
INTERIOR LAMPS .......................................... 92
Seats REMOVING A HEADLAMP .............................. 93
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION ............ 54 REMOVING A REAR LAMP ............................. 94
MANUAL SEATS ............................................. 55 CHANGING A BULB ........................................ 95
ELECTRIC SEATS............................................ 57 BULB SPECIFICATION CHART...................... 104
HEAD RESTRAINTS ........................................ 58
REAR SEATS................................................... 59 Wipers and washers
HEATED SEATS............................................... 65 WINDSCREEN WIPERS ................................ 105
RAIN SENSOR .............................................. 106
Seat belts WINDSCREEN WASHERS............................. 106
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................... 66 REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS...... 107
SEAT BELT REMINDER................................... 68 ADJUSTING THE WINDSCREEN WASHER JETS .
FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS ........................ 68 108
SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT................. 69 HEADLAMP WASHERS................................. 108

3
L

Contents
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES .................. 108 TRANSFER GEARBOX ................................... 148
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES.................. 109
Brakes
Windows and mirrors PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 152
ELECTRIC WINDOWS................................... 110 HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS..................... 154
EXTERIOR MIRRORS ................................... 111 ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) ............... 155
ELECTRIC EXTERIOR MIRRORS .................. 112
INTERIOR MIRROR ...................................... 114 Parking aid
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 159
Information displays USING THE PARKING AID............................. 159
TRIP COMPUTER ......................................... 115
PERSONALISED SETTINGS .......................... 116 Driving hints
INFORMATION MESSAGES .......................... 117 RUNNING-IN ................................................. 161
GENERAL DRIVING POINTS.......................... 161
Climate control REDUCED ENGINE PERFORMANCE .............. 163
AIR VENTS ................................................... 119 ECONOMICAL DRIVING ................................ 163
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL ...................... 121
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL................. 123 Cruise control
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS .... 126 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 164
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS ............ 126 USING CRUISE CONTROL............................. 164
AUXILIARY HEATER ..................................... 127
ELECTRIC SUNROOF .................................... 127 Stability control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 166
Convenience features USING STABILITY CONTROL ........................ 166
SUN VISORS ................................................ 129
SUN BLINDS................................................. 129 Traction control
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER............... 129 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 168
CLOCK .......................................................... 130
CIGAR LIGHTER ........................................... 132 Hill descent control (HDC)
ASHTRAY ..................................................... 132 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 169
AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS ..................... 133 USING HDC ................................................... 169
CUP HOLDERS ............................................. 134
CENTRE CONSOLE ....................................... 135 Terrain response
COOL BOX .................................................... 136 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 172
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS ........................ 137 USING TERRAIN RESPONSE ........................ 172
MEMORY FUNCTION .................................... 138
Air suspension
Starting the engine PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 179
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 139 ADJUSTING THE SUSPENSION .................... 180
STARTER SWITCH ....................................... 139 AIR SUSPENSION MESSAGES...................... 184
STEERING WHEEL LOCK.............................. 140
STARTING A PETROL ENGINE ..................... 140 Fuel and refuelling
STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE....................... 141 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS................................. 186
FUEL QUALITY .............................................. 186
Transmission RUNNING OUT OF FUEL................................ 188
MANUAL TRANSMISSION............................ 142 FUEL FILLER FLAP ........................................ 189
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...................... 142 REFUELLING ................................................. 190

4
R

Contents
FUEL CUT-OFF .............................................. 191 TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM.... 248
CATALYTIC CONVERTER .............................. 191 TYRE GLOSSARY ......................................... 253
FUEL CONSUMPTION ................................... 192
Fuses
Load carrying FUSE BOX LOCATIONS................................. 254
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 193 CHANGING A FUSE....................................... 255
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS......................... 193 FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART ...................... 257
REAR LOADSPACE HATCHES....................... 193
LUGGAGE COVERS ....................................... 194 Vehicle recovery
TOWING POINTS.......................................... 263
Towing LASHING POINTS......................................... 264
TOWING A TRAILER ..................................... 197 TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE .................... 265
GEAR CHANGING.......................................... 198 TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS.. 265
LEVELLING ................................................... 198
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS ...................... 199 Vehicle identification
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS ........... 200 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)... 267
DETACHABLE TOW BALL ............................. 200
TOW BAR DIMENSIONS ............................... 204 Technical specifications
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................... 268
Vehicle care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR ........................... 207 Type approvals
CLEANING THE INTERIOR ............................ 208 TYPE APPROVALS ....................................... 274
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE ............ 209
Audio introduction
Maintenance RADIO RECEPTION....................................... 283
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 210
OPENING AND CLOSING THE BONNET ........ 212 Audio unit overview
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW ........... 213 AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW............................... 284
UNDER BONNET COVERS............................. 219
ENGINE OIL CHECK ...................................... 219 Audio unit operation
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK ............................ 220 ON/OFF CONTROL ........................................ 286
BRAKE FLUID CHECK ................................... 222 VOLUME CONTROL...................................... 286
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK ................ 223 BASS/TREBLE CONTROL ............................. 289
WASHER FLUID CHECK ................................ 224 BALANCE/FADE CONTROL ........................... 292
STATION PRESET BUTTONS ........................ 292
Vehicle battery WAVEBAND BUTTON ................................... 293
BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS ................... 225 AUTOSTORE CONTROL................................ 293
BATTERY CARE ............................................ 225 RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS) ....................... 294
USING BOOSTER CABLES ............................ 226 TRAFFIC INFORMATION (TA) CONTROL ...... 295
CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY ............. 228 PTY PROGRAMME TYPES............................ 297
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY ............. 229
Compact disc player
Wheels and tyres LOADING COMPACT DISCS ......................... 299
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 230 EJECTING COMPACT DISCS ........................ 301
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL ......................... 231 EJECTING MULTIPLE COMPACT DISCS....... 301
TYRE CARE ................................................... 242 COMPACT DISC SELECTION ........................ 302
USING SNOW CHAINS.................................. 248 COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK ......................... 303

5
L

Contents
TRACK SELECTION....................................... 304
COMPACT DISC PAUSE................................ 304
FAST FORWARD/REVERSE .......................... 304
COMPACT DISC FUNCTION MENU............... 305
SHUFFLE/RANDOM ...................................... 305
REPEAT COMPACT DISC TRACKS ............... 306
COMPACT DISC TRACK SCANNING ............. 306
MP3 FILE PLAYBACK ................................... 307

Rear passenger controls


REAR SEAT CONTROLS ............................... 308
HEADPHONES .............................................. 309

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket


AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX IN) SOCKET........... 310

Voice recognition
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION.......................... 312
USING THE SYSTEM .................................... 312
AUDIO SYSTEM COMMANDS ...................... 314

6
R

Quick start
QUICK START
Quick start

Single point entry


Remote control This is a security feature that unlocks only the
Dependent upon specification and vehicle driver’s door. It can be disabled on individual
configuration, the operation of the remote remote controls by simultaneously pressing
control may differ from the following. and holding the lock and unlock buttons for
three seconds. The vehicle will lock and then
unlock in the currently selected mode to
confirm the change.
You can now unlock all doors with a single
press. Repeating the procedure will re-enable
Single point entry.

Automatic relock
If the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
control, it will automatically relock and arm the
alarm if a door or the tailgate is not opened
within one minute.
0604 Key blade
Press button (arrowed in illustration) to release
Press once to lock all doors and arm
the key blade.
the alarm.
Press twice within three seconds to deactivate Remote control battery
the interior space protection and tilt sensor. The remote control battery is rechargeable and
Press once to deactivate the alarm should never need replacement. The battery is
and unlock the driver’s door (Single recharged whenever the key is in the starter
point entry). switch and the engine running.
A second press will unlock all other doors.
Customer configurable button. Can
be programmed to remotely operate
one of the following functions:
• Headlamp on (default).
• Panic alarm.
• Air suspension.
See PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL
(page 45).

7
L

Quick start
Central locking Tailgate

1
1 2

2
LAN0605

Master lock and unlock switches


1. Press to unlock all doors and tailgate.
2. Press to lock all doors and tailgate.
Speed-related locking
If enabled, the doors and tailgate will LAN0606
automatically lock when the vehicle's speed
exceeds 8 km/h (5 mph). Opening the upper tailgate
This feature can be disabled or enabled in the With all the doors unlocked, press the release
Settings option accessed via the trip computer. switch 1 on the underside of the exterior handle
and pull to open.
Opening the lower tailgate
With the upper tailgate open, press the touch
pad 2 on the lower tailgate waist moulding.

Operating note
If the tailgate is locked/unlocked 10 times
within a short period, the latch will be
disabled for approximately one minute, to
protect the battery and lock mechanism.

8
R

Quick start
Bonnet Power operated seat adjustment
To adjust the seats the starter switch must be
in position I or II. On those vehicles equipped
with a memory driver’s seat, the seat has a 10
minute active period initiated when the driver’s
door is opened/closed or the starter key is
1 turned to the off position.

1 2

LAN0607

LAN0611

Opening
Pull the bonnet release lever 1 located on the 1. Seat foreward/backward, cushion height
left-hand side of the vehicle. and front tilt control switch.
Lift the bonnet safety catch lever 2, located on 2. Backrest adjustment switch.
the front edge of the hood beneath the centre 3. Lower backrest lumbar support
point of the words LAND ROVER, and raise the handwheel.
bonnet.
Closing
Lower the bonnet until the safety catch
engages. Using both hands, press the bonnet
down until the catches click.
Check that both catches 3 are engaged by
trying to lift the front edge of the bonnet.

9
L

Quick start
Driving position memory (when fitted) Lazy entry
Once you have adjusted the power operated When this feature is enabled, the vehicle stores
driver's seat and exterior mirrors for your ideal the seating and mirror positions for each
driving position, the vehicle can memorise remote control. Next time the vehicle is
these settings for future use. unlocked using a remote control, the position
of the seat and mirrors will adjust to the last
used position.
1 2 This feature can be disabled or enabled in the
Settings option accessed via the trip computer.
Manual seat adjustment

LAN0612

1. Press the memory store button 1 to


activate the memory function for five
seconds.
2. Press one of the preset buttons 2 within 4
five seconds to memorise the current
settings.
2
Memory Stored will be displayed on the 1
message centre accompanied by an
audible chime to confirm the settings have
been memorised. 3

Operating note
A seat position will only be memorised during
the five second active period.
LAN0613
Any existing settings will be over-written
when programming a memory position.
1. Forward/backward adjustment.
2. Height adjustment.
3. Backrest adjustment.
4. Lower backrest lumbar support.

10
R

Quick start
Windows/Door mirrors Door mirror adjustment
To adjust the mirrors, rotate the mirror
adjustment knob 1 left or right to select the
appropriate mirror. Move the knob in any
1 direction to adjust the position of the mirror
glass.
Power fold mirrors (when fitted)
Some vehicles are equipped with the facility
that allows the mirrors to be electrically folded
towards the door for better
clearance/protection.
2 With the mirror adjustment switch knob in the
central position, push the knob downwards to
fold/unfold the mirrors.
Reverse automatic mirror dip
LAN0614
With the feature enabled, when reverse gear is
selected the door mirrors will dip.
• To open a window, press and hold the
respective switch. The dip position of the door mirrors can be
personalised. See ELECTRIC EXTERIOR
• To close the window, pull and hold the MIRRORS (page 112).
switch.
This feature can be disabled or enabled in the
• Window movement can be stopped at any Settings option accessed via the trip computer.
time by releasing the switch. See TRIP COMPUTER (page 115).
The driver’s window has a one touch facility
that allows it to be fully opened or closed with
a single operation of the switch. Firmly press
the switch and release. Movement can be
stopped by briefly pressing the switch again.
Press the right-hand side of switch 2 to inhibit
the operation of the rear window switches.

Resonance with lowered windows


If a resonance/booming sound occurs when a
rear window is open, lowering an adjacent
front window about 25 mm (1 inch) will
eliminate the condition.

11
L

Quick start
Steering column adjustment Overhead console

1 2

LAN0616

Courtesy lamps
If automatic mode is enabled, the front and rear
courtesy lamps will operate in conjunction with
the vehicle being unlocked/locked or when a
door is opened.
The courtesy lamps can be manually switched
on/off by pressing and releasing the centre
lamp switch (arrowed in illustration).
LAN0615

Automatic mode
1. Move the lever located under the steering Automatic mode for the courtesy lamps can
wheel fully downward. be enabled/disabled by pressing and holding
2. Adjust the height and reach of the steering the centre lamp switch for more than three
wheel to the desired position. seconds.
A message will be displayed in the message
3. Move the lever fully up to lock the position centre advising you of the currently set
of the wheel. mode.

Interior lamps
The interior lamps can be switched on/off by
pressing the switch adjacent to the lamp.

12
R

Quick start
Sunroof Seat belts/Child restraints
To open the sunroof: The use of front and rear seat belts is
• Press and release the rear of the switch 1 mandatory in most countries. Using seat belts
to open the roof to the tilt position. saves lives. They should be worn by all
occupants whenever the vehicle is in use.
• Press and release the rear of the switch
again to open the roof fully. A warning light on the instrument
pack will illuminate to alert you that
To close the sunroof:
the driver's and/or front
• Press and release the front of the switch 2 passenger's seat belt is unbuckled. Dependent
to close the roof to the tilt position. upon specification this may be accompanied by
• Press and hold the front of the switch an intermittent chime.
again to close the roof fully.
Automatic Locking Reels (ALR)
If the sunroof is moving, it can be stopped by
The second and third row seat belts have ALR
pressing the switch again.
fitted for use with child seats or securing large
items.
Operating note
The sunroof can be operated with the starter • To engage: Extend belt to maximum length
key in position I or II and for 40 seconds after to enable locking mechanism.
position 0 has been selected, providing that • Allow seat belt to retract onto the child
neither front door has been opened. seat/item (a clicking sound will be heard as
With the starter key in position I or 0, the the belt retracts). Ensure there is no slack
switch will need to be pressed and held until by pressing the seat/item firmly into the
the roof reaches the desired position. vehicle seat.
• To disengage: Unbuckle belt and allow belt
Rear view mirror to fully retract.
Some rear view mirrors are fitted with a feature
that will automatically darken to counteract With ALR enabled, as the seat belt retracts, it
glare from the headlamps of a following will automatically lock preventing
vehicle. re-extension.
Ensure passengers do not fully extend the
This feature is temporarily switched off when
restraints and inadvertently engage this
reverse gear is selected.
feature during normal use.

13
L

Quick start
Child Seats Passenger airbag deactivation
It is important to remember that the child's
weight, rather than age, determines the type of
seat that is required. See CHILD SEATS
(page 76).

Recommended child seat


Land Rover strongly recommends the use of
ISOFIX child seats.
ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted in the
second-row outer seating positions.

PASS
AIRB
AG
OFF

LAN0617

If it becomes necessary to fit a child restraint


on the front passenger seat, the passenger
airbag must be deactivated.
To deactivate the airbag, open the front
passenger door and use the starter key to turn
the PASS.AIRBAG switch (located on the end
of the fascia) to the OFF position.
With the airbag deactivated, the status
indicator (arrowed in illustration) will
illuminate whenever the starter key is turned to
position II.

Operating note
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, ensure the PASS.AIRBAG
switch is turned to the ON position.

14
R

Quick start
Heating and ventilation
These are the primary functions of the heating
and ventilation system. Dependent upon
specification, the control panel may differ from
those shown.

1 1

LAN0618

3 4

LAN0619

Air conditioning Air conditioning is automatically switched on


Air conditioning is an integral part of the and controlled whenever the system is not
heating and ventilation system, providing operating in economy mode.
cooled and dehumidified air for occupant
comfort. The dry airflow is effective in
preventing misting of windows and is also
beneficial at low external temperatures.

15
L

Quick start
Air distribution control (Automatic system
External water deposits only)
The air conditioning system removes Press to select the desired distribution setting.
moisture from the air and deposits excess An LED will illuminate in the switch.
water beneath the vehicle. Puddles may form,
Windscreen and side window vents
but this is normal and no cause of concern.

AUTO mode (Automatic system only) Face level vents


Press AUTO to select automatic
operation of the system, both LEDs in Foot level vents
the switch will illuminate.
More than one setting can be
The system will adjust the heat output, blower selected to achieve the desired
speed, air intake and airflow distribution to distribution.
maintain the selected temperature(s) and
reduce misting without further adjustments. OFF (Automatic system only)
The air distribution and blower controls can be Press to switch the system off. An
operated to override the automatic settings. LED will illuminate in the switch to
This will extinguish the appropriate LED in the show this condition.
AUTO control. Press again to return the system to its previous
operating mode. The system will also be
Recommended mode reactivated by using the AUTO, blower speed,
Select AUTO as the normal operating mode. air distribution or defrost controls.
This will help prevent window misting and
Defrost mode (Automatic system only)
odours from the climate control system.
Press to remove frost or heavy
misting from the windscreen. The
Temperature selection (Automatic system
system will automatically adjust the
only)
blower output for maximum clearing, in
Rotate the controls 1 to adjust the temperature addition the rear window and windscreen
for the respective side of the passenger heaters will be activated.
compartment.
Press again to switch off defrost mode. The
Operating note rear screen and windscreen heaters will remain
On the automatic system, it is not possible to on.
achieve a temperature differential of more Air recirculation
than 4°C (7°F) between the left and right. Press once to activate air
recirculation. An LED will illuminate
Blower speed (Automatic system only) in the switch.
Rotate the blower control 2 to adjust airflow Press again to return to fresh air intake.
through the vents. As the control is adjusted,
LEDs will illuminate to indicate which of the
eight possible speeds is currently selected.

16
R

Quick start
Economy mode Rear environment (when fitted)
Press button to put the system into Press once to activate automatic
economy mode. An LED will mode in which the comfort level for
illuminate in the switch to show this the rear passengers is controlled
condition. from the front. The upper LED will be
In economy mode air conditioning is switched illuminated.
off. This reduces the load on the engine, Press a second time to pass control of the rear
thereby improving fuel consumption. environment to the rear passengers control
panel. The lower LED will be illuminated.
Heated windscreen/rear window
Press a third time to switch this feature off.
Press to operate. An LED in the
Neither LED will be illuminated.
switch will illuminate whilst
operating.
The heaters will automatically
switch off after a preset interval.
Seat heaters
Press the relevant button to operate
the required seat heater at high level.
Both LEDs will illuminate.
Press a second time to heat the seat at a lower
level. One LED will extinguish.
Press a third time to switch off.
Temperature selection (Manual system only)
Rotate the control 3 to adjust the air
temperature entering the passenger
compartment.
Blower speed (Manual system only)
Rotate the blower control 4 to adjust airflow
through the vents. As the control is adjusted,
LEDs will illuminate to indicate which of the
eight possible speeds is currently selected.
Air distribution control (Manual system only)
Rotate the control 5 to achieve the desired air
distribution setting.
Windscreen and side window vents
Face level vents
Foot level vents

17
L

Quick start
Facia - Left-hand drive vehicles

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 2 3
ABC DEF
6CD-465
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

12
22 21 20 19
13

18 14

17 15

16
LAN0636

18
R

Quick start
1. Direction indicators/headlamps/trip
computer switch
2. Cruise control switches
3. Instrument pack/warning indicators and
message centre
4. Audio/telephone switches
5. Wiper/washer switch
6. Audio system
7. Dynamic stability control (DSC) switch
8. Touch screen
9. Hazard warning switch
10. Master locking switches
11. Passenger airbag status indicator
12. Heater/air conditioning controls
13. Gear selector
14. Terrain response control switch
15. Transfer gearbox switch
16. Hill Descent Control switch
17. Air suspension control
18. Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
19. Starter switch
20. Steering column adjustment
21. Bonnet release lever
22. Exterior lamps master switch

19
L

Quick start
Facia - Right-hand drive vehicles

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 2 3
ABC DEF
6CD-465
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

15
14 13 12
16

21 17

20 18

19
LAN0635

20
R

Quick start
1. Audio system
2. Dynamic stability control (DSC) switch
3. Touch screen
4. Hazard warning switch
5. Master locking switches
6. Passenger airbag status indicator
7. Direction indicators/headlamps/trip
computer switch
8. Cruise control switches
9. Instrument pack/warning indicators and
message centre
10. Audio/telephone switches
11. Wiper/washer switch
12. Exterior lamps master switch
13. Starter switch
14. Steering column adjustment
15. Heater/air conditioning controls
16. Gear selector
17. Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
18. Transfer gearbox switch
19. Hill Descent Control switch
20. Air suspension control
21. Terrain response control switch

21
L

Quick start
Instrument pack

1 2 3 4

EXT 23 C

8 7 6 5
9
E80508

1. Tachometer 6. Trip recorder reset switch


2. Temperature gauge 7. Gear selector position display
3. Fuel gauge 8. Main message centre.
4. Speedometer 9. Warning indicators panel.
5. Total distance (odometer) and trip
recorder

22
R

Quick start
Tachometer Fuel gauge
Indicates engine speed in revolutions per
CAUTION
minute (x 1 000). In normal driving conditions
the engine is most fuel efficient between 2 000 Never allow vehicles to run out of fuel as
and 3 000 rev/min. the resultant misfire may destroy the
catalytic converter.
Temperature gauge
When the starter switch is turned to position II,
At normal operating temperature, the pointer is the pointer quickly rises to show the level of
positioned midway between the red and blue fuel in the tank.
segments of the gauge (the precise position
will vary according to climatic conditions).

E80510

E80509 When the remaining fuel reaches a minimum of


12 litres (3 gallons), the amber low fuel
If the pointer moves above the mid point, the warning indicator( arrowed) illuminates.
engine coolant is becoming too hot. Should the
pointer move into the red segment and the red The remaining fuel should give a range of
warning indicator (arrowed) illuminates, 80 km (50 miles).
severe engine damage could occur (under The small arrow alongside the fuel pump
these circumstances the air conditioning may symbol indicates the side of the vehicle on
switch off and engine performance may reduce which the fuel filler is located.
to minimise engine load).
Total distance (odometer) and trip recorder
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits, and Indicates the total distance travelled, and also
allow the engine to idle until the warning shows the most recent individual journey
indicator extinguishes and the pointer moves distance.
back to its normal position. If the problem
persists, seek qualified assistance Trip recorder reset switch
immediately. With the starter switch in position II, press to
reset the trip recorder back to zero.
Selected gear display
The currently selected gear is displayed.

23
L

Quick start
Warning indicators (attention) Warning indicators (information)
If any of the following illuminates whilst driving The following will illuminate during normal
a fault has been detected. Refer to Owner’s driving to indicate that a particular system or
Handbook for further information. feature is operating.
Battery charge indicator. Seat belt reminder.
See page 161. See page 68.
Low oil pressure. Door open.
See page 161. See page 47.
Electric parking brake. Low screen washer level.
See page 155. See page 224.
Brake systems. Diesel glow plugs active.
See page 152. See page 141.
Anti-lock Braking System. Lo gear range selected.
See page 154. See page 148.
Airbag system. Hill Descent Control (HDC) active.
See page 75. See page 169.
Engine management system. Cruise control active.
See page 163. See page 164.
Engine. Direction indicator.
See page 163. See page 91.
Suspension system. Trailer direction indicator.
See page 179. See page 197.
Transmission. Headlamp high beam on.
See page 142. See page 86.
Transmission temperature. Sidelamps on.
See page 142. See page 86.
Hill Descent Control (HDC). Rear fog lamps on.
See page 169. See page 87.
Low engine coolant level. Front fog lamps on.
See page 220. See page 87.
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC). Overspeed warning.
See page 166. See page 161.
Adaptive front lighting system.
See page 89.
Tyre Pressure Monitoring system.
See page 248.

24
R

Quick start
Steering column levers Direction indicators/Headlamp high beam

5 3
2
1
0
4
A
LAN0640

Move the lever up or down to


B activate the direction indicators.
LAN0637

Windscreen wiper Moving the lever up or down against spring


pressure and then releasing will flash the
1. Intermittent wipe/rain sensor
indicators 3 times. Useful for lane changing.
2. Normal speed operation
Push the lever away from you to
3. High speed operation select headlamp high beam. A
4. Single wipe - press and release to operate. warning indicator will illuminate on
the instrument panel.
Rotate collar 5 to adjust speed of intermittent
Trip computer
wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Press the button on the end of the
Short delay/Most sensitive to rain.
lever to cycle through the trip
computer functions displayed on the
Long delay/Least sensitive to rain.
message centre.

Windscreen washer
Push the button on the end of the
lever to operate the windscreen
washer.
Rear wiper and washer
Pull the lever to position A for intermittent
operation of the rear wiper. Pull and hold the
lever in position B to operate the rear washer
and wiper.

25
L

Quick start
Exterior lamps master switch Electric Parking Brake (EPB)

3 4
1 2

AUTO

LAN0643

A
B Applying
With the vehicle stationary, pull up the parking
brake lever and then release it. The red warning
LAN0642
indicator in the instrument panel will
illuminate.
1. Exterior lamps off
On manual tranmission vehicles, the parking
2. Sidelamps
brake will automatically apply when the starter
3. Headlamps key is removed.
4. Autolamps
Releasing
In AUTO mode and the starter switch in The starter switch must be in position I or II.
position II, a sensor monitors the exterior light Apply the foot brake and press down on the
levels and will automatically switch the side parking brake lever.
lamps and dipped headlamps on and off as
required. On automatic transmission vehicles, if the
vehicle is stationary with the parking brake
A. Front fog lamps (if fitted) applied and either D (Drive) or R (Reverse)
B. Rear fog lamps selected, pressing the accelerator will
If front fog lamps are not fitted, the rear fog automatically release the parkbrake.
lamps will come on at position A.

Operating note
Fog lamps can not be operated if the lamps
master switch is in AUTO.

26
R

Quick start
Automatic transmission CommandShift ™
CommandShift gear selection can be used as
Gearshift interlock
an alternative to automatic gear selection and
The starter switch must be in position II, the is particularly effective when rapid acceleration
foot brake applied and the selector release or engine braking are required.
button pressed before the gear selector can be
moved from P (Park) to R (Reverse).
The gear selector must be in the P position
before the starter key can be removed.
Sport mode P

M +
R
N
S M
S D
-

P LAN0645

R
+
M
N 1. Select Sport mode. The transmission will
D
-
S
automatically select the gear most
appropriate to the vehicle’s road speed and
accelerator position.
LAN0644
2. Moving the selector lever forward (+) or
In Sport mode, automatic gear changing is backward (-) and then releasing will
maintained but the gearshift changes are manually select a higher or lower gear
modified to improve performance. (when available). The message
To select Sport mode, move the gear selector TRANSMISSION COMMANDSHIFT
from the D position towards the left hand side SELECTED will appear in the message
of the vehicle. centre.
The word SPORT will appear on the instrument 3. Subsequent gear selections will display the
pack display and the LED in the gear selector selected gear on the instrument pack
surround will illuminate. display.
4. To deselect CommandShift mode, move
When Sport is selected, the transmission will the selector lever back to the D position.
stay in lower gears for longer with downshifts
occurring more readily.
Fuel consumption will be adversely affected.
If Terrain Response is fitted, Sport mode is
only available when the General program is
selected.

27
L

Quick start
Transfer gearbox Hill Descent Control (HDC)

LAN0649

HDC operates in conjunction with the anti-lock


LAN0646
braking system to provide greater control in
HIGH range should be used for all off-road situations particularly when
normal road driving and also for descending severe gradients.
off-road driving across dry level Press the switch (arrowed in
terrain. illustration) to select HDC. HDC can
LOW range should be used in be selected at speeds below
situations where low speed 80 km/h (50 mph) but will not be fully active
manoeuvring is necessary, or in until the vehicle speed reduces below 50 km/h
extreme off-road conditions. (30 mph), confirmed by a continuously
illuminated HDC indicator in the instrument
Range changing pack. Press the switch again to deselect HDC.
The recommended method for range changing
is with the vehicle stationary. With the engine
running, and the main gearbox in N (Neutral),
move the transfer gearbox lever to the required
position and then release. The indicators on the
switch and instrument pack display will flash
during range changing. When range changing
is complete a chime will sound and a message
will be displayed on the message centre.

28
R

Quick start
Air suspension Terrain response system

1 2

3
4
5
6
LAN0651

7 The Terrain Response system, if fitted, is


LAN0650
always active and can not be switched off.
When the vehicle is started the system will
Vehicle height can be manually adjusted via the
normally start in the General program.
raise/lower lever 1. Height changes may only
be made when the engine is running and the Manual selection of a special program, by
driver and passenger doors are closed. rotating the knob, will provide benefits in how
the vehicle can be driven over different
Indicators 2 or 7 will illuminate to show the
surfaces or terrains by automatically adjusting
direction of movement. They extinguish when
the vehicle’s drive and suspension systems.
the height change movement is completed.
It is recommended that a special program be
Off-road height 3, provides improved ground
engaged whenever driving conditions could
clearance and approach, departure and
become difficult, and cancelled once the
break-over angles.
conditions for use are no longer present.
On-road height 4, is the normal height for the
vehicle. General
Access height 5, lowers the vehicle to provide Suitable for surfaces that match
easier entry, exit and loading of the vehicle.
E80903
typical road surfaces.
This position may be selected up to 40 seconds Grass-Gravel-Snow
after the starter switch is turned off. Suitable for surfaces which are firm
Crawl (locked at Access height) 6, allows the but have a slippery surface, e.g.
vehicle to be driven at low speeds at access grass, snow, loose gravel, pebbles
height, to give increased roof clearance. or icy conditions.

Vehicle height will be automatically adjusted Mud-Ruts


according to road speed in order to maintain Suitable for soft, muddy, uneven or
driveability and handling. deeply rutted ground. It is
If Terrain Response is fitted, some of it’s recommended that LOW range is
programs will automatically adjust the selected on the Transfer gearbox.
suspension height.

29
L

Quick start
Sand Cruise control
Suitable for soft, predominantly dry, Cruise control enables the driver to maintain a
yielding sandy ground, e.g. sand constant road speed without using the
dunes and deserts. If the sand is accelerator pedal.
damp or wet, the Mud-Ruts
program may be more beneficial.
Rock Crawl 1
Only selectable when the transfer
E80907
2
gearbox is in LOW range. Suitable
for crossing wet or dry, solid
unyielding ground requiring high 3
levels of wheel displacement, e.g. 4
clusters of boulders or rocky river
beds.
LAN0652

Wading
1. SET (+): to set a road speed or increase the
When driving through water less than
speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) steps when cruise
600 mm (24 inches) deep, select the
control is operating.
program suitable for the surface beneath the
water. 2. SET (-): to set a road speed or decrease the
speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) steps when cruise
control is operating.
3. RESUME: resumes a SET speed retained in
memory.
4. CANCEL: cancel cruise control but retains
the set speed in memory.

Cruise control will automatically disengage


when the brake/clutch pedal is used or when
the vehicle speed falls below 30 km/h
(18 mph).

30
R

Quick start
Audio systems Sound settings

General operation

Bass

1
LAN0657

Press the knob 1 to switch on/off and rotate to


adjust volume.
LAN0659
Press the appropriate mode button to select
FM, AM, CD or AUX. Press the button repeatedly to scroll
Press the or buttons to skip CD tracks through the sound settings options. These
or to search for a radio station. Press the options vary depending on specification of
or buttons to search through a CD track or audio system, but will include: Bass, Treble,
to manually tune to a radio station. Balance, Fader and Reset Tone Settings.
Dependent upon audio system specification,
Steering wheel controls other options may be available.
With the desired sound setting displayed,
rotate knob to adjust. Confirm new setting
by pressing the button.
1
2
3
4

LAN0658

1. Press to switch between Radio, CD or


AUX.
2. Press to increase volume.
3. Press to decrease volume.
4. Press and release to scroll through preset
radio stations or CD tracks. Press and hold
for two seconds to search up or down for
the next or previous radio station/CD track.

31
L

Quick start
Radio operation CD operation

Compatible disc types


The use of discs with paper labels or dual
format discs (CD/DVD) should be avoided as
FM 14 :54 they could become jammed.
2 98.2 Autostore
1 2 3 4 5 6

LAN0662

1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

Press either the FM or AM button to select the 4


GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
required waveband. Repeated presses of either 7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ
Tr 1 5
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 : 43
0
button will scroll through the FM and AM
waveband memory options.
Storing radio stations
To automatically store radio stations, press
and hold either the FM or AM button. Autostore LAN0664
will be shown on the information display and
the stations will be stored under the preset Standard audio
numbers in the selected waveband. The standard audio unit features a single-slot
To recall a preset station, press and release one CD player.
of the numbered preset buttons. See STATION Insert a disc, label side up, into the player. The
PRESET BUTTONS (page 292). disc will load and start to play.
To end CD playback, briefly press one of the
other mode buttons (FM, AM or AUX).
To eject the disc, press the button. The
display will show the message Remove Disc
when it is safe to do so.
Premium audio
The premium audio unit features an integral
6-disc autochanger.

32
R

Quick start
Loading CDs
To insert a single disc, press the CD button,
then one of the number buttons 1-6. When
prompted by the information display, insert the
disc, label side up. The autochanger will load
the CD in the selected position.
To fully load the autochanger, press and hold
the CD button. The information display will
show Loading All. When prompted, insert a
disc, label side up. This process is repeated
until all six CD positions are occupied.
Playing CDs
When in CD mode, press the appropriate CD
number 1-6 to start playing the selected disc.
Playback commences and progresses
sequentially through all of the loaded discs.
Playback can be paused by briefly pressing one
of the other mode buttons (FM, AM or AUX).
Playback will resume when the CD button is
pressed again.
Ejecting CDs
To eject a single disc, select the required disc
by pressing one of the number buttons 1-6 and
then press the button.
To eject all loaded discs, press and hold the
button, the discs will be ejected one at a
time. Remove disc(s) only when the display
shows the message Remove Disc.

33
L

Quick start
Navigation
The screen allows touch-control of the
navigation system. Only a light touch is Navigation Menu

required to operate the function, excess


pressure on the screen could result in damage. TMC
Destination Stored
On initial activation, ensure that both the Entry Locations RDS-TMC

correct country and area have been selected.


Setting a destination Navigation Route
Setup Options
To set a destination and start using the
navigation system, use the following LAN0668
procedure:
Touch the Destination Entry icon.

Destination Entry
1 2
A 3 4
1/8 mi

Address Point of Select from


Change Map

Memory Previous
AUSTIN PLACE, ABINGDON Change Postcode Point Dest

1 2 3 4 5

LAN0669

LAN0665
Touch the Address icon, then enter the Town,
Address and House Number (if known) using
Press the Navigation button on the
the on-screen keypad.
display surround, and when
prompted, touch Agree to access Touch OK to enter.
the initial Home menu.
Touch the Home icon on the screen
to access the navigation menu.

34
R

Quick start

81 AUSTIN PLACE, ABINGDON, ABI

Route
Preference
A 34
1/8 mi

Destination Way Point

LAN0670

Once found, the screen displays the


destination. To change the route settings,
touch Route Preference, or touch Destination
to start the route calculation.

Route preferences
When set, route preferences are remembered
and used for calculating all new routes. If you
encounter problems with the type of routes
being selected or the guidance being given,
please check the route preferences.

Once calculated, the screen highlights the


route. Touch 3-Routes to select an alternate
route, or touch Start to start navigation. Drive
away, following the voice guidance.

Touch the audible repeat icon to


hear again the last voice
instruction.

When your destination is reached, voice and


visual confirmation is given.
Cancelling guidance
Touch the Home icon, select Route
options, Cancel guidance and
touch Confirm.

35
L

Quick start
Telephone – Bluetooth system Pairing a handset to the vehicle’s system
Mobile phones with Bluetooth capability can Prepare the mobile phone for pairing to the
communicate with the vehicle’s inbuilt system. See the telephone manufacturer’s
telephone feature. instructions for further details, or follow the
table below for generic commands.
Mobile phone compatibility When the handset has been successfully paired
There are a number of mobile phones that to the system, Bluetooth will appear on the
have been tested for full functionality with the Phone menu screen.
Land Rover system, however not all phones
Note: If more than one paired Bluetooth phone
are compatible and some may only be
is in range, the system will automatically select
partially compatible. For the latest list of
the last phone used in Bluetooth mode.
compatible phones and software versions,
please refer to
www.ownerinfo.landrover.com.
Alternatively consult your Dealer.

Nokia Motorola Ericsson


1. Select menu Select menu Select menu
2. Select settings Select settings Select connectivity
3. Select Bluetooth OR Select Select Connection Select Bluetooth
Connectivity then
Bluetooth
4. Select On Select Bluetooth link Select My Devices
5. Select Search for Audio Select Hands-free With New Device highlighted,
devices select Add. Press OK to
confirm
6. After search select Land Select Look for devices After search select Land Rover
Rover
7. Enter pass code 2121. After search select Land Select Connect
Press OK to confirm Rover
8. No connection? Select Permission to bond? Enter pass code 2121 after
Bluetooth (Menu) then Select Yes and enter pass prompt
Paired devices Jaguar code 2121

36
R

Quick start
Making a call Receiving a call

1 1
2 2

LAN0673 LAN0673

1. With a paired or docked handset, press the To answer an incoming call, press the
button on the audio system, or operate button on the audio unit, or operate the answer
the answer call switch 1 on the steering call switch 1 on the steering wheel controls.
wheel controls. To end, or reject an incoming call, press the C
2. Enter the required telephone number using button on the audio system, or operate the end
the numeric keypad. call switch 2 on the steering wheel.
3. Press the button, or operate the
answer call switch 1 on the steering wheel
to send.

37
L

Filling station information


FILLING STATION INFORMATION Refuelling
Filling station information

Fuel filler flap


Fuel filler flap location
A small arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates which side the fuel filler
flap is located.
Fuel filler flap opening

LAN0680

The filler cap is secured to the vehicle by a


strap. For your convenience a holder is
provided on the flap to store the cap whilst
refuelling.
Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck,
pushing aside the spring-loaded cover.
LAN0675 When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle
and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise
Press and release the centre of the left edge of until you hear it click three times. Return the
the fuel filler flap (where arrowed) to open. fuel filler flap to its closed position.

Operating note Fuel specification


The fuel flap has a spring loaded release, do The correct fuel specification for your vehicle is
not force it open. shown on the inside of the fuel filler flap. See
FUEL QUALITY (page 186).

Land Rover petrol engines are not fitted with


equipment necessary for the use of fuels
containing more than 10 per cent ethanol.
Do not use E85 fuels (85 per cent ethanol
content). If E85 fuels are used serious engine
and fuel system damage will occur.

Incorrect fuelling

CAUTION
If the fuel tank is accidentally filled with
the wrong type of fuel, it is essential that
the engine is not started and you seek qualified
assistance.

38
R

Filling station information


Tyre pressures Engine oil specification
Air pressure naturally increases in warm tyres;
if it is necessary to check the tyres when they Variant Specification
are warm (after the vehicle has been driven for Diesel vehicles SAE 5W-30 meeting
a while), you should expect the pressures to specification ACEA:B1 or
have increased by up to 30 - 40 kPa (0.3- 0.4 B3
bar) (4 - 6 lbf/in²). In this circumstance, Do not Petrol vehicles WSS-M2C913-B ¹
let air out of the tyres in order to match the
recommended cold tyre pressures. See TYRE
¹ If you are unable to find an oil that meets the
CARE (page 242).
specification defined by WSS-M2C913-B, you
Tyre pressures label must use an SAE 5W-30 oil meeting
specification ACEA:A3 or specification API SL
or SM. See ENGINE OIL CHECK (page 219).
DISCOVERY

XXX/XXRXX
MAX. XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX Engine coolant specification
XXX/XXRXX (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
XXX/XXRXX
Top-up to the upper level indicator mark
L7MTA

XXX/XXRXX XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX


(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)

TXXX/XXRXX
MAX. XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
located above the COLD FILL RANGE text, on
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
the side of the expansion tank. Use only a 50%
RTC500XXX

XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX


(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) mix of water and Castrol SF antifreeze. See
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK (page 220).

A B

E80376

A Left-hand drive vehicle


B Right-hand drive vehicle
The correct tyre pressures are shown on a label
attached to the driver’s door.
Temporary spare wheel
The tyre pressure in the temporary spare
wheel/tyre should be maintained at 420 kPa
(4.2 bar/60 lbf/in²) for all loading conditions.

39
L

Introduction
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY LABEL LOCATIONS
Introduction

Warning labels attached to your


Warnings
vehicle bearing this symbol mean: DO
WARNING NOT touch or adjust components until
Safety warnings are included in this you have read the relevant instructions
handbook. These indicate either a in the handbook.
procedure which must be followed precisely, Labels showing this symbol indicate
or information that should be considered with that the ignition system utilises very
great care in order to avoid the possibility of high voltages. DO NOT touch any
personal injury. ignition components while the starter
switch is turned on.
Cautions
Warning labels
CAUTION Labels are attached to your vehicle at several
Cautions are included in this handbook. positions. These are applied to draw your
These indicate either a procedure which attention to important subjects, e.g. tyre
must be followed precisely, or information that pressures, tow bar use, airbags, roll-over risk,
should be considered with great care in order engine compartment hazards, etc.
to avoid the possibility of damage to your
vehicle.

DISCOVERY
Symbols XXX/XXRXX
MAX. XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
XXX/XXRXX (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
This recycling symbol identifies XXX/XXRXX
XXX/XXRXX XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX L7MTA

those items that must be disposed MAX.


(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
TXXX/XXRXX
of safely in order to prevent (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
RTC500XXX

XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX


unnecessary damage to the environment. (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)

This symbol identifies those


features that can be adjusted,
disabled or enabled by a Land Rover
A B
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

E80376

A Left-hand drive vehicle


B Right-hand drive vehicle
It is important that you are familiar with these
subjects to ensure that your vehicle and its
features are used safely. Using the index at the
back of this handbook, refer to the relevant
topic for more information.

40
R

Introduction
HEALTH AND SAFETY DATA RECORDING
WARNINGS Service data recording
Your vehicle has a higher ground Service data recorders in your vehicle are
clearance and hence, a higher centre of capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
gravity than ordinary passenger cars, to information about your vehicle. This potentially
enable the vehicle to perform in a wide variety includes information about the performance or
of off-road applications. An advantage of the status of various systems and modules in the
higher ground clearance is a better view of the vehicle such as engine, throttle, steering or
road allowing you to anticipate problems. brakes.
The vehicle is not designed for In order to properly diagnose and service your
cornering at the same speed as vehicle, Land Rover and service and repair
conventional passenger cars any more than a facilities may access vehicle diagnostic
low-slung sports car is designed to perform information through a direct connection to
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at your vehicle.
all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt
manoeuvres. As with other vehicles of this
Event data recording
type, failure to operate the vehicle correctly Event data recorders are capable of collecting
may result in loss of control or vehicle and storing data during a crash or near-crash
roll-over. event. The recorded information may assist in
the investigation of such an event. The
modules may record information about both
the vehicle and the occupants, potentially
including information such as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts were buckled.
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or the brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was travelling.
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
To access this information special equipment
must be connected directly to the recording
modules. Land Rover do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or third parties acting
with lawful authority.

41
L

Introduction
Other parties may seek to access the Land Rover parts are the only parts built to
information independently of Land Rover. original equipment specifications and
approved by Land Rover designers; this means
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES that every single part and accessory has been
rigorously tested by the same engineering
WARNINGS team that designed and built the vehicle and
The fitting of non-approved parts and can therefore be guaranteed for twelve months
accessories, or the carrying out of with unlimited mileage.
non-approved alterations or conversions, may A full list and description of all accessories is
be dangerous and could affect the safety of the available from your Land Rover Dealer/
vehicle and occupants and also invalidate the Authorised Repairer.
terms and conditions of the vehicle warranty.
Land Rover will not accept any liability Electrical equipment
for death, personal injury or damage to WARNING
property which may occur as a direct result of
It is extremely hazardous to fit or
fitment on non-approved accessories or the
replace parts or accessories, the
carrying out of non-approved conversions to
installation of which requires the dismantling
Land Rover vehicles.
of, or addition to, either the electrical or fuel
Land Rover strongly advise against systems.
making any modifications to the
suspension or steering system. This could Always consult a Land Rover Dealer/
seriously affect the handling and stability of Authorised Repairer before fitting any
the vehicle leading to loss of control or accessory.
roll-over. Fitting inferior quality parts or accessories,
The vehicle has been designed, built and tested may be dangerous and could invalidate the
to cope with a variety of off-road driving vehicle warranty.
conditions, some of which can place the It is recommended that you always consult a
severest possible demands on control systems Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
and components. As such, fitting replacement advice regarding the approval, suitability,
parts and accessories that have been installation and use of any parts or accessories
developed and tested to the same stringent before fitting.
standards as the original components will
safeguard the continued reliability, safety and
performance of your vehicle.
To augment the vehicle's already impressive
performance, a comprehensive range of Land
Rover-approved spare parts and accessories is
available, enabling the vehicle to fulfil a wide
variety of roles, and enhancing and protecting
the vehicle in the many tasks to which it can be
applied.

42
R

Introduction
Airbag SRS Travelling abroad
In certain countries, it is illegal to fit parts
WARNING
which have not been made to the vehicle
The components that make up the manufacturers' specification.
airbag SRS are sensitive to electrical or
physical interference, either of which could Owners should ensure that any parts or
easily damage the system and cause accessories fitted to the vehicle while travelling
inadvertent operation or a malfunction of the abroad will also conform to the legal
airbag module. requirements of their own country when they
return home.
To prevent any airbag SRS malfunction, always
consult a Land Rover Dealer/
Authorised Repairer before fitting any of the
following:
• Electronic equipment such as a mobile
phone, two-way radio or in-car
entertainment system.
• Accessories attached to the front of the
vehicle.
• Any modification to the front of the vehicle.
• Any modification involving the removal or
repair of any wiring or component in the
vicinity of any of the SRS components,
including the steering wheel, steering
column, instrument or facia panels.
• Any modification to the facia panels or
steering wheel.
After-sales service
The After Sales Parts service is of paramount
importance, both in the UK and across the
world. In the UK there are over 100 authorised
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer, all
computer linked for rapid ordering of parts and
accessories.
In addition, with franchised representation in
over 100 countries worldwide, Land Rover are
able to support your vehicle wherever you go.

43
L

Keys and remote controls


PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Remote control battery
Keys and remote controls

CAUTION
The remote control contains delicate
electronic circuits and must be protected
from impact, water damage, high
temperatures and humidity, direct sunlight
and the effects of solvents, waxes and abrasive
cleaners.
The battery is rechargeable. If the battery needs
recharging the following will occur:
E81023
• KEY BATTERY LOW will be displayed in the
You have been supplied with two remote main message centre.
controls, with integral keys, to operate all the • A gradual deterioration in range and
vehicle’s locks. performance will be noticed.
The operation of all buttons on all remote To recharge the battery, insert the key in the
controls, will be inhibited while a key is in the ignition and start the engine.
starter switch.
Note: Interference from other radio equipment, GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO
operating on a similar frequency may affect the FREQUENCIES
remote control. If this happens, operate the Note: The radio frequency used by your remote
remote control as close as possible to the control may be used by other devices. For
vehicle or use the key. example, amateur radios, medical equipment,
Note: If the remote control fails to work even wireless head phones or other remote control
when close to the vehicle, it may not be devices. This may cause the frequency to be
synchronised with the system. Start and run jammed and prevent your remote control from
the engine for six minutes to synchronise. If operating correctly.
the remote control still fails to operate, unlock Environmental conditions can affect the
the vehicle manually. See USING THE KEY operation of remote controls, and the operating
(page 45). range may vary considerably depending on the
vehicle's location.

44
R

Keys and remote controls


USING THE KEY PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE
Emergency locking and unlocking
CONTROL
The Land Rover button on the remote control
Under a removable cap on the left front door
can be programmed to operate one of the
outer handle, there is an emergency-use door
following functions:
lock.
• Panic alarm.
• Headlamp courtesy delay.
• Air suspension control.
The currently programmed feature will be
activated when the reprogramming sequence
is started.
The button is disabled when the key is in the
ignition switch.
Panic alarm

2
E80563 3

Press and hold the Land Rover button and


press the hazard warning switch. A chime will
confirm the feature is programmed.
E80586
The alarm will sound and the hazard warning
lamps will flash when the button is pressed.
1. Insert the key fully into the slot under the Press the lock or unlock buttons or insert the
cap and turn clockwise to release the key in the ignition switch, to switch off the
forward edge of the cap. alarm.
2. Remove the cap and withdraw the key.
3. Insert the key into the emergency lock, and
turn counterclockwise to unlock.
4. If the alarm is armed, it will sound when
the door is unlocked. Insert the key in the
starter switch to stop the alarm.
To emergency lock the vehicle, reverse the
above instructions.

45
L

Keys and remote controls


Headlamp courtesy delay To lower the suspension, press and hold the
Land Rover button and the unlock button.
If any button is released during the raising or
lowering, all movement will stop, until the
buttons are pressed again.
Initially the height will change slowly, but will
increase after three seconds.
While the height is changing, a symbol on the
E80564
raise/lower switch will be lit, according to the
Press and hold the Land Rover button and flash direction of movement. See ADJUSTING THE
the headlamps. A chime will confirm SUSPENSION (page 180).
successful programming. If the suspension is not set to On-road height,
A short press of the Land Rover button will turn all movement will stop when On-road height is
on the headlamps for the length of time reached. Release the buttons and press again,
specified in Settings. See TRIP COMPUTER to continue. See ADJUSTING THE
(page 115). SUSPENSION (page 180).
A second press of the button after three Single-point entry
seconds, will deactivate the lamps. This feature enables the driver's door to be
unlocked, while leaving the other doors in a
Air suspension control
locked state.
Single-point entry can be disabled on individual
remote control keys, by pressing and holding
the lock and unlock buttons for three seconds.
All doors will now unlock with a single press.
Repeating the procedure will re-enable single
point entry.
E80565 Each time single-point entry is enabled or
disabled, the vehicle will lock then unlock into
Press and hold the Land Rover button and
the selected mode.
press the suspension raise/lower switch. A
chime will confirm the feature is programmed.
Programming of this function must be done
within one minute of switching off the engine.
Before attempting to raise or lower the
suspension, turn on the hazard warning lamps
and close all the doors.
To raise the suspension, press and hold the
Land Rover button and the lock button.

46
R

Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
Locks

To operate, the remote control must be within


range of the vehicle when a button is pressed.
Note: If the remote control fails to work even 1
when close to the vehicle, it may not be
synchronised with the system. Start and run
the engine for six minutes to synchronise. If 2
the remote still fails to respond, unlock the
vehicle manually. See USING THE KEY 3
(page 45).
Note: If a key is in the starter switch, the 4
vehicle will not respond to remote control
E80759
commands.
Note: If any door or the tailgate is unlocked 10 The four buttons on the remote control are
times within a short period, the latch is used as follows:
disabled for approximately one minute. 1. Key release button
Superlocking 2. Lock button
• Press to superlock all doors and to
WARNING
activate the perimetric alarm, the interior
For safety, never use superlocking if space protection and the tilt sensor.
passengers are to remain inside the
• Press twice within three seconds to lock
vehicle - in an emergency they would not be
all doors and activate the perimetric
able to escape, or be released by emergency
alarm, but not activate interior space
services. Also, any movement from within the
protection or tilt sensor.
vehicle would activate the interior space
protection alarm. • The direction indicator lamps will flash
three times.
Superlocking is activated by one press of the
3. Unlock button
lock button on the remote control.
• Press once to disarm the alarm and
When the vehicle is superlocked, the doors can
unlock the driver’s door. Press again to
only be opened (from inside or outside of the
unlock the remaining doors.
vehicle) with the correct key or remote control.
The interior door handles are immobilised. • In either case, the interior lamps
illuminate and the direction indicators
Locking with the remote control flash once.
Remove the key from the starter switch and 4. Land Rover button. See PROGRAMMING
shut all doors, the bonnet and the tailgate. THE REMOTE CONTROL (page 45).

47
L

Locks
Partial locking Automatic re-lock
If an aperture (door, bonnet or tailgate) is not If the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
fully closed when the remote control lock control and a door, the tailgate or the bonnet is
button is pressed, the horn will sound briefly to not opened within one minute, the vehicle will
signal that an aperture is still open. The alarm re-lock and the alarm will re-arm.
will remain disarmed, but all of the closed
apertures will lock. Automatic unlocking
If the vehicle is involved in a collision which
As soon as the open aperture is closed, the
causes a restraints device to deploy, all door
system will automatically arm, signalled by
locks will automatically be unlocked, the
three flashes of the hazard warning lamps, with
hazard warning lamps will flash and the interior
interior space protection activating 30 seconds
lamps will illuminate.
later.
Note: The vehicle will not superlock if an Interior door handles and door locking
aperture (other than the bonnet) is open. levers
Master lock and unlock switches

1 2

E80762

E80760 From inside the vehicle, each door can be


individually locked by depressing the
1. Press the unlock switch to unlock all the appropriate lever (arrowed).
doors.
To open and unlock a front door, pull the door
If the vehicle is superlocked, the switch is handle.
inhibited.
To open a rear door, first return the locking
2. Press the lock switch to lock all the doors. lever to its unlocked position, then pull the
Speed-related locking door handle.
This feature locks all the doors automatically When the master lock or unlock switch is used,
when the vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h or speed related locking is activated, all door
(5 mph). locking levers will activate automatically.
Speed related locking can be disabled. See
TRIP COMPUTER (page 115).
Note: Pressing the master lock or unlock
switch will override the speed locking function
for the journey.

48
R

Locks
Opening the tailgate

E80763

Upper tailgate
Unlock the vehicle and press the touch pad on
the underside of the exterior handle. Pull to
open.
Lower tailgate
With the upper tailgate open, press the touch
pad on the lower tailgate waist moulding.
Door open warning indicator
Illuminates when the tailgate or one
of the vehicle's doors is open. On
vehicles with a message centre, the
message DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN will be
displayed when the driver’s door is open or not
fully closed.

49
L

Engine immobiliser
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Engine immobiliser

Your vehicle is fitted with a sophisticated


electronic engine immobilisation system.
Engine immobilisation occurs automatically
five seconds after the key is removed from the
starter switch.
Note: The engine will be re-mobilised
automatically whenever the key is inserted into
the starter switch. When this happens, the
anti-theft alarm indicator will illuminate for one
second.

CODED KEYS
Note: A replacement remote control can only
be obtained from your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. The Dealer will
require proof of ownership.
Notify your Dealer immediately if a remote
control is lost or stolen.

50
R

Alarm
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ARMING THE ALARM
Alarm

Perimetric alarm
This feature is activated automatically
whenever the vehicle is locked using the
remote control and protects the doors, bonnet
and tailgate.
If any of these apertures are opened, or if an
unknown key is inserted into the starter switch,
the alarm will be triggered.
When the perimetric alarm is activated, the
direction indicators will flash three times, and
the anti-theft alarm indicator will flash.
Partial arming
If an aperture (door, bonnet or tailgate) is not
E81206 fully closed when the remote control lock
button is pressed, the horn will sound briefly to
Your vehicle is fitted with a sophisticated signal that an aperture is still open. The alarm
electronic anti-theft alarm system. There are will remain disarmed, but all of the closed
also a number of additional security features, apertures will lock.
some of which are selectable options and some
are standard features of the vehicle. As soon as the open aperture is fully closed,
the system will automatically arm, signalled by
In order to ensure maximum security and three flashes of the hazard warning lamps, with
operating convenience, you are strongly interior space protection activating 30 seconds
advised to gain a full understanding of the later.
features and alternatives available, by
thoroughly reading this section of the Note: The vehicle will not superlock if an
handbook. aperture (other than the bonnet) is open.

Vehicle security
The security system fitted to your vehicle is
Thatcham category one approved and meets
European regulation 97 and directive 95/56/EC.
Battery-backed sounder
In some markets a separate, battery-backed
sounder is fitted. This device will sound if the
alarm is activated, or if the vehicle battery or
the sounder are disconnected.

51
L

Alarm
Interior space protection Anti-theft alarm indicator
Interior space protection is activated whenever
the vehicle is superlocked.

E80560

The indicator provides information about the


status of the alarm and immobiliser systems,
as follows:

Alarm status Indicator


Armed with space Triple flash for 10
E80559
protection seconds, then single
Four roof-mounted sensors monitor the flash
interior space and activate the alarm if Armed without space Double flash for 10
movement of air is detected in the passenger protection seconds, then single
compartment. flash
Note: Interior space protection cannot be Disarmed, engine Single flash
activated if an aperture (other than the bonnet) immobilised
is open.
Disarmed, engine A one second flash
Disabling interior space protection mobilised
To disable interior space protection, press the
lock button on the remote control twice within SWITCHING OFF THE ALARM
three seconds. If the alarm is triggered, the alarm will sound
and the hazard warning lamps will flash for 30
seconds, before resetting to the same
protection status that existed prior to the alarm
being triggered.
To silence the alarm, press the lock or unlock
button on the remote control or insert the key
into the starter switch. Pressing the lock button
will keep the alarm armed.

52
R

Alarm
If the alarm has been activated since it was last
armed, the hazard warning lights will flash
rapidly for eight seconds when the alarm is
disarmed.

TILT SENSOR
Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor which
activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted fore
and aft, or side to side, after it has been
superlocked.
The alarm will sound if theft is attempted by
hoisting onto another vehicle or if a side is
lifted to attempt wheel removal.
If you wish to have the doors locked but the tilt
sensor disabled (e.g. when aboard a ferry or
having the vehicle transported on a recovery
truck) press the lock button twice within three
seconds.

PANIC ALARM
The Land Rover button on the remote control
can be programmed to operate the panic alarm.
See PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL
(page 45).
The alarm will sound and the hazard warning
lamps will flash when the button is pressed.
Press the lock or unlock buttons or insert the
key in the ignition switch, to switch off the
alarm.

53
L

Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION 2. Adjust the position of the seat. A minimum
Seats

distance B of at least 254 mm (10 inches)


WARNINGS between the centre of the breastbone and
Do not adjust the driver's seat while the the steering wheel is recommended.
vehicle is in motion, this may cause • The driver should hold the steering
loss of control and personal injury. wheel with their arms slightly bent.
Optimum benefit is obtained from the • The legs should also be slightly bent so
seat belt with the backrest angle set to that the pedals can fully be pressed to
no more than 30 degrees from the upright the floor.
(vertical). Failure to maintain the correct 3. Position the seat belt across the centre of
backrest angle will reduce the effectiveness of your shoulder. Fit the lap strap tightly
the seat belt and increase the risk of serious across your hips and not across your
injury or death in a crash. stomach.
Make sure that your driving position is
A comfortable and enables you to maintain full
control of the vehicle.
B

E80441

The seat, head restraint, seat belt and airbags


all contribute to the protection of the user.
Correct use of these components will give you
more protection therefore observe the
following points:
1. Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible and the
backrest reclined not more than 30
degrees A.

54
R

Seats
MANUAL SEATS Backrest adjustment
Forward/backward adjustment WARNING
Travelling in a vehicle with the backrest
incorrectly adjusted will reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a crash. See
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
(page 54).

E80435

Lift the bar at the front of the seat and slide the
seat to the desired position.
The seat should then be moved slightly
forwards and backwards, to ensure that the bar
has latched into position.
E80436

Adjust by turning the rotary wheel.

55
L

Seats
Height adjustment Folding armrest

E80437

Pumping the lever upwards raises the seat;


downwards lowers the seat. E80439

Lumbar support adjustment The height of the armrest can be adjusted by


turning the knob clockwise to raise or
counterclockwise to lower. The armrest can be
stowed vertically alongside the backrest.

E80438

Turn the knob clockwise to increase lumbar


support or counterclockwise to reduce the
support.

56
R

Seats
ELECTRIC SEATS
2

1
3

1
2

4 3

E80424

1. Forward/backward adjustment 3. Seat cushion height adjustment


2. Backrest adjustment 4. Seat cushion edge adjustment

In addition, the seats have a 15 minute (10


WARNING minutes for a driver's seat with seat memory)
Do not adjust any part of a seat while active period initiated when:
the vehicle is in motion. Vehicle • the vehicle is unlocked, or
movement may cause the seat to suddenly
• the starter key is turned to position 0.
shift, potentially causing injury.
The seat adjustment controls are situated on
the outboard side of the seat cushion. The
position of the seat can be adjusted when the
starter key is in position I or II.

57
L

Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS Rear head restraints
WARNINGS Adjustment
Head restraints are designed to support
the back of the head (not the neck), and
to restrain rearward movement in the event of
a collision. The restraint must be correctly
positioned to be effective.
Do not drive or carry passengers with
the head restraints removed from
occupied seats.
Do not adjust the head restraints while
the vehicle is in motion.
Failure to have the head restraints
installed and properly positioned will
E81310
increase the potential for serious injuries.
1. Press the collar button.
Front head restraints
2. Raise or lower the head restraint until the
Note: The front head restraints are an integral
top of the head restraint is level with the
part of the seat, and are not designed to be
top of the head.
removed or adjusted.
Removal
To remove the head restraint, press the collar
button whilst lifting the restraint clear of the
seat.
To replace the head restraint, engage the guide
posts into the collars and press the restraint
downwards until a click is heard.

58
R

Seats
REAR SEATS 4. Lower the backrest until it locks into place.
Note: Only Land Rover-approved seat covers
WARNING
and accessories should be used on these seats.
Do not adjust any part of a seat while
the vehicle is in motion. Vehicle Raising the seats
movement may cause the seat to suddenly
shift, potentially causing injury. 1

Second-row seats - 5-seat vehicle


Note: Some 5-seat models are fitted with the
same type of seat as the 7-seat model.
2
Folding the seats
One or both parts of the seat can be folded.
Move the front seats forward and remove any
items from the seats and the rear footwell.

1
2

2 E80412

1. Pull the strap vertically on the back of the


seat to unlock the seat. Continue to pull to
raise the backrest(s) until they click into
3 position.
2. Push the seat cushion(s) firmly back into
position.
3. If the lever has not returned to its locked
position, red flags will be visible around
the lever.
4. Pull the headrest up into the correct
position.
4
4
E80411

1. Fully lower the head restraints.


2. Pull the strap on the required cushion(s),
to raise the cushion to the vertical position.
3. Pull the seat backrest release lever(s)
forward.

59
L

Seats
Second row seats - 7-seat vehicle
1
WARNING
Do not adjust any part of a seat while
the vehicle is in motion. Vehicle
movement may cause the unlatched seat to
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury.
The seats can be used in a variety of
configurations:
• As a standard row of three seats. 2
• A backrest can be folded forwards to form
a table.
• One or all seats can be folded flat.
• An outer seat can be folded forwards for
access to the third row of seats. E80413

If the front seats are in their rearmost position,


1. Pull the backrest release lever forwards.
move them forward prior to folding down the
seats. 2. Lower the backrest forwards into the
table-fold position.
Table fold position
Note: Only Land Rover-approved seat covers
WARNINGS and accessories should be used on these seats.
The latching mechanism should be To return the seat-back to its upright position,
checked and physically tested to ensure push the release lever forwards and pull the
that both the cushion and backrest are secure backrest up until it clicks into place.
before driving. If it has not returned to its locked position, red
Remove any items from the seats and rear flags will be visible around the lever.
footwell. Fully lower the head restraint on the Pull the head restraint up to its correct
seat(s) to be folded. position.

60
R

Seats
Extending the loadspace Raising the seat

CAUTION
1
Do not attempt to raise the seats from
the loadspace position while the
loadspace cover unit is stowed behind it as
2
damage to the unit or seats will result.
4
3

3 4
2

E80414

1. Pull the backrest release lever forwards.


2. Lower the backrest forwards into the
1
table-fold position.
3. Pull the strap at the front of the seat
4. Press down on the seat. E80415

Note: The centre seat must always be folded 1. To raise the seat, pull the strap at the front
first. of the cushion.
2. Grasp the top and bottom of the backrest,
lift the seat and return it to the table-fold
position.
3. Push the release lever forward.
4. Pull the backrest up and push until the
latching mechanism clicks into place.
If the lever has not returned to its locked
position, red flags will be visible around the
lever.
Note: If a combination of backrests, including
the centre backrest, is to be erected, the centre
E81904 backrest should be erected last.

Remove the luggage cover and stow it between


the folded seat rows.

61
L

Seats
Access position Note: A second-row seat cannot be moved
from the loadspace position, to the access
WARNING position. Return the seat to the table-fold
The outer seat(s) must not be left in the position before attempting to move it to the
access position while the vehicle is access position.
being driven. Motion of the vehicle could
cause the seat to drop back into its table-fold Raising the seat
position. WARNINGS
To enter the third-row seats, first ensure that When lowering the seats from the
the head restraint on the second-row seat is access position, ensure that nothing is
fully lowered. trapped by the returning seat.
The latching mechanism should be
1 checked and physically tested to ensure
that the cushion and backrest are secure
before driving.
2 Pull the seat down into the table-fold position.
The access lever will click into place. Check
around the lever, a red flag will be visible
behind the lever if the backrest is not correctly
located.

E80416

1. Pull the backrest release lever forwards.


2. Lower the backrest forwards into the
table-fold position.
3. Pull the access lever on the side of the
seat.
4. Tilt the seat forwards.
Once access to the third-row seat has been
gained, return the second-row seat to its fully
upright position.

62
R

Seats
Third-row seats Folding the seat
Third row seats can be folded flat.
1
WARNINGS 2
Ensure that nothing has been left under
the seat or in the footwell when folding
down the seat as this could cause damage.
Beware of potential finger traps when 3
operating the seats.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to raise the seats from
the loadspace position while the
loadspace cover is in its floor level stowage 4
position as this may damage either the cover
or the seats.

E80417

1. Press the head restraint release button.


2. Fold the head restraint fully downwards.
3. Pull up the release strap at the rear corner
of the cushion; this lifts under spring
pressure.
4. Fold the cushion fully forwards until it
latches into position.
5. Pull up the backrest release lever.
6. Fold the backrest fully forwards until it
latches into position in the loadspace floor.

63
L

Seats
Raising the seat 5. Raise the head restraint until it latches into
position.
WARNINGS
Note: When not in use, the head restraints
The head restraint must always be should be folded to improve rear vision.
raised when using the third-row seat.
Do not use the seat until it is fully
raised.

1 2

E80418

1. Pull lever to release backrest.


2. Raise the backrest into its upright position,
ensuring that it is fully latched into place.
3. Release catch and raise cushion.
4. Push the cushion into place, ensuring that
the cushion is latched to the backrest.

64
R

Seats
HEATED SEATS
Front seat heaters

E80400

Rear seat heaters

E80401

With the starter switch turned on, the seat


cushion and backrest can be heated at two
different settings.
• Press once to operate at the high setting
(both indicators illuminate). As cabin
temperature rises, the heaters will switch
to the low setting and one light will
extinguish
• Press twice to operate at the low setting
(one indicator illuminates).
• Press a third time to turn off the heaters
(both indicators will extinguish).
The seat heaters are thermostatically
controlled and will maintain a factory-set
temperature.
Note: The seat heaters consume considerable
power from the battery. It is recommended that
they are only operated while the engine is
running.

65
L

Seat belts
GENERAL INFORMATION
Seat belts

WARNINGS
WARNINGS Ensure that all seat belts are worn
correctly - an improperly worn seat belt
Seat belts are life saving equipment. In
increases the risk of death or serious injury in
a collision, occupants not wearing a
the event of a collision.
seat belt can be thrown around inside or
possibly thrown out of the vehicle. This is Each belt assembly must only be used
likely to result in more serious injuries than by one occupant; it is dangerous to put
would have been the case had a seat belt been a belt around a child being carried on the
properly worn. It may even result in loss of life. occupant’s lap.
Make sure all occupants are securely It is essential to replace the entire
strapped in at all times - even for the assembly after it has been worn in a
shortest journeys. severe impact, even if damage to the assembly
is not obvious.
The airbag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) is designed to add to the No modifications or additions should
overall effectiveness of the seat belts. It does be made by the user, which will either
not replace them. Seat belts must always be prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from
worn. operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat
belt assembly from being adjusted to remove
Seat Belts are designed to bear upon
slack.
the bony structure of the body and
should be worn low across the pelvis, or pelvis Should the seat belt not retract and
chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing remain at its static length, consult your
the lap section of the belt across the Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
abdominal area must be avoided. Care should be taken to avoid
Do not wear seat belts over hard, sharp contamination of the webbing with
or fragile items in clothing, such as polishes, oils and chemicals and particularly
pens, keys, spectacles, etc. battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried
out using mild soap and water. The belt should
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly
be replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
as possible, consistent with comfort, to
contaminated or damaged.
provide the protection for which they have
been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce Where possible, use the seat belts to
the protection afforded to the wearer. secure large items of luggage that are
to be carried on the seats. In the event of an
Do not allow front seat occupants to
accident, unsecured items become flying
travel with the seat backs reclined
missiles, capable of causing serious injury.
steeply rearwards. Optimum benefit is
obtained from the seat belt with the seat back Never wear just the lap strap of a
angle set to no more than 30 degrees from the lap/shoulder diagonal seat belt and
upright. never sit on the lap strap using just the
shoulder strap. These actions are extremely
Belts should not be worn with the
dangerous and increase your risk of serious
straps twisted.
injury.

66
R

Seat belts
Seat belts Seat belt pre-tensioners
Lap/shoulder inertia reel seat belts are
WARNINGS
provided for both front seat occupants and all
rear seat positions. The seat belt pre-tensioners will only be
activated once and then must be
The inertia reel operating mechanism of the
replaced by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
seat belts, allows the wearers to move their
Repairer. Failure to replace the pre-tensioners
upper bodies to reach various controls.
will reduce the efficiency of the vehicle's front
The seat belts include a buckle sensor, to restraint systems.
detect when the buckle is latched.
After any impact, always have the seat
Caring for seat belts belts and pre-tensioners checked and,
Regularly inspect the belt webbing for signs of if necessary, replaced by a Land Rover Dealer/
fraying, cuts and wear; also pay particular Authorised Repairer.
attention to the condition of the fixing points In the interests of safety, it is
and adjusters. recommended that removal or
Do not bleach or dye the webbing and avoid replacement of the front seats and seat belts
contaminating the webbing with polish, oil or should only be carried out by a Land Rover
chemicals. See FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
(page 68). The seat belt pre-tensioners activate in
conjunction with the airbag SRS and provide
Testing inertia reel belts
additional protection in the event of a severe
• With the seat belt fastened, give the frontal impact on the vehicle. The
webbing near the buckle a quick upward pre-tensioners automatically retract the seat
pull. The buckle must remain securely belts fitted to the front seats. This reduces any
locked. slack in both the lap and diagonal portions of
• With the seat belt unfastened, reel out the the belts, thereby reducing forward movement
webbing to the limit of its travel. Check that of the belt wearer in the event of a severe
unreeling is free from snatches and snags frontal collision.
and then allow the belt to fully retract. The airbag SRS warning indicator on the
• Partially unreel the webbing, then hold the instrument pack, will alert you to any
tongue plate and give it a quick forward malfunction of the seat belt pre-tensioners.
pull. The mechanism must lock
If the pre-tensioners have been activated, the
automatically and prevent any further
seat belts will still function as restraints and
unreeling.
must be worn in the event that the vehicle
If a seat belt should fail any of these tests, seek remains in a driveable condition.
qualified assistance.
Note: The seat belt pre-tensioners will be
Note: If the vehicle is parked on ground that is activated in major side and frontal impacts and
not level, the seat belt mechanism may lock. in rollovers.
This is not a fault; gently ease the belt from the
upper anchorage to release.

67
L

Seat belts
SEAT BELT REMINDER FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS
Beltminder commences when the
starter switch is turned to position II
and the driver's belt is unbuckled.
Dependent on market, the warning indicator in
the instrument pack illuminates, the message
FASTEN SEAT BELTS appears in the message
centre and an audible chime sounds.
The visual and audible warnings applicable to
the Beltminder feature are market dependent to
meet individual market requirements. The
E80379
warning signals given may also change
depending on whether the vehicle is stationary Insert the metal tongue plate into the buckle
or when the vehicle speed exceeds a nearest the wearer. A click indicates that the
pre-determined threshold. belt is securely locked.
In certain markets, the Beltminder feature also The buckles on third row seats are
applies to the front passenger seat and will be spring-loaded allowing them to be stowed
activated if the seat is occupied and the within the seat. This is to prevent damage when
occupant's seat belt is unbuckled. the seats are folded flat. To fasten the belt, pull
Note: Objects placed on the passenger seat the buckle up from the seat before inserting the
may activate the seat belt warning system. tongue plate.
Although not advisable, it is Adjust the seat belt to eliminate any slack in the
possible to disable the Beltminder webbing.
function. Please see a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer to disable or
Releasing the belt
reinstate the function. Press the red button on the seat belt buckle.

68
R

Seat belts
SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT USING SEAT BELTS DURING
PREGNANCY
WARNING
Maladjustment of the seat belt could WARNINGS
reduce its effectiveness in a crash. Pregnant women must wear a correctly
Always ensure that the anchorage is correctly positioned seat belt; it is safer for
located and properly locked in one of the mother and unborn child.
height positions before driving and do not Never place anything between you and
adjust the height once the vehicle is in motion. the seat belt in an attempt to cushion
the impact in the event of an accident. It can be
dangerous and reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt in preventing injury.

E80375

Press down (solid arrow) to release the catch,


then lift or push down to adjust the height of
the anchorage. E80374

Ensure the anchorage has clicked into one of During pregnancy, Women should wear the
the locked positions before driving. belt across the hips below the baby, with the
Where possible passengers should adjust their diagonal belt passing across the shoulder,
position on the seat to enable the seat belt between the breasts and to one side of the baby
webbing to cross the shoulder without - if in doubt, consult a doctor.
pressing on the neck.

69
L

Airbags
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Airbags

5 4 3 2 1

E82231

The airbag Supplementary Restraint System


WARNINGS
(SRS) incorporates front airbags 1 and 2, seat
The airbag is a supplementary restraint mounted side airbags 3 and curtain airbags 4
system that provides additional for the front seat occupants driver and curtain
protection in a severe impact only - it does not airbags 5 for occupants in the rear seat
replace the need to wear a seat belt. To reduce outboard positions (see illustration for airbag
the risk of injury or death in the event of a locations). These are indicated by the word
crash, all occupants in all seating positions AIRBAG on the trim.
should wear their seat belt.
Provided the occupants are correctly seated,
An inflating airbag can cause facial with the seat belts properly worn; in the event
abrasions and other injuries. Minimise of a severe frontal impact, the airbags will
the risk of injury by ensuring that the front seat provide additional protection to the chest and
occupants are seated correctly, with the seat face of the front seat occupants.
as far back as is practical.
In the event of a severe side collision, airbags
Ensure that a gap is maintained provide additional protection to the side of the
between the side of the vehicle and the head and body facing the impact for front seat
head and torso, to enable unobstructed occupants and to the side of the head facing
inflation of the curtain and seat mounted side the impact for outer rear seat occupants.
airbags. Do not lean out of the window.
Note: Inflation and deflation of the front and
seat mounted side airbags takes place very
quickly and will not protect against the effects
of secondary impacts that may occur. Head
airbags deflate at a slower rate and therefore do
offer some additional protection in the event of
a secondary impact.

70
R

Airbags
How the airbag SRS works Obstruction of airbags
Operation of the airbag SRS is dependent on WARNINGS
the rate at which the vehicle's passenger
compartment changes speed as a result of a Do not allow passengers to obstruct the
collision. The circumstances affecting different operation of the airbags by placing feet,
collisions (vehicle speed, angle of impact, type knees or any other part of the body, or any
and size of object hit, for example), vary other objects in contact with, or in close
considerably and will affect the rate of proximity to, an airbag module.
deceleration accordingly. Do not attach or position items on, or
close to the roof lining, A, B and C post
In the event of a collision, the airbag control
finishers, front seat backrests or to an airbag
unit monitors the rate of deceleration induced
cover, which could interfere with the inflation
by the collision, to determine whether the
of the airbag or be propelled inside the vehicle
airbags should be deployed.
causing injury to the occupants.
When deployed, inflation of the airbags is
virtually instantaneous and occurs with
C B A
considerable force, accompanied by a loud
noise. The inflated bag, together with the seat
belt restraint system, limit the movement of an
occupant, thereby reducing the risk of injury to
the head and upper torso.
The airbag SRS is not designed to operate as a
result of:
• Rear collisions.
• Minor front impacts. E80487

• Minor side impacts.


Do not use non-approved seat
• Heavy braking. covers/accessory seat covers over a front seat;
• Driving over bumps or potholes. in particular, seat covers that have not been
It follows, therefore, that significant superficial designed for use with side airbags. If in doubt,
damage can occur without the airbags consult your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
deploying or, conversely, that a relatively small Repairer.
amount of structural damage may cause the Note: Unauthorised modification of the vehicle
airbags to be deployed. or parts may invalidate the vehicle’s warranty.

71
L

Airbags
Deployment effects SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS WARNING
Following inflation, some airbag SRS Ensure that a gap is maintained
components are hot - do not touch until between the side of the vehicle and the
they have cooled. torso, to enable unobstructed inflation of the
Even with airbag SRS equipment fitted, seat-mounted side airbags
seat belts must always be worn. Side airbags are designed to protect the thorax
An airbag will only provide additional region of the torso and will only deploy in the
protection in certain types of frontal event of a severe side impact. They will not
collisions. No protection is afforded against inflate as a result of frontal or rear impacts
the effects of rear impacts, or minor frontal only.
impacts. In the event of a severe side collision, the
Inflation and deflation take place airbags on the impacted side of the vehicle
instantaneously and will not provide deploy from the side of the seat-back, rapidly
protection against the effects of secondary inflating to form a cushion between the front
impacts that can occur during multiple vehicle seat occupants and the side of the vehicle. The
collisions. airbags on the non-impacted side of the vehicle
Activation of an airbag creates dust, will not be deployed.
causing possible breathing difficulties
for asthma sufferers or other people with CURTAIN AIRBAGS
respiratory problems. If an airbag is activated,
any occupant who suffers from breathing WARNING
difficulties should either leave the vehicle as For the curtain airbags to deploy
quickly as possible, or obtain fresh air by fully correctly, the roof lining and A post trim
opening the windows and doors. must be undamaged and fitted correctly. Any
damage or suspect fitting should be referred
When an airbag inflates, a fine powder is
to a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer
released. The powder may cause irritation to
for examination.
the skin and should be thoroughly flushed from
the eyes and any cuts or abrasions of the skin. Curtain airbags are designed to protect the
After inflation, the front and seat mounted side head in the event of a severe side impact or
airbags deflate immediately (curtain airbags rollover event. They will not inflate as a result
deflate slowly). This provides a gradual of frontal or rear impacts alone.
cushioning effect for the occupants and also In the event of a severe side collision, the
ensures that the driver's forward vision is not airbag pushes out from behind the roof lining
obscured. and pillar finisher as it inflates.
Disability modifications
Occupants with disabilities that may require the
vehicle to be modified must contact a Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer before any
modifications are made.

72
R

Airbags
DISABLING THE PASSENGER AIRBAG Passenger airbag status indicator
WARNINGS
Always check the status indicator with
the starter key in position ll.

2U5A-14B372-BA

E80936 6CD-465

2U5A-14B372-BA
When the airbag disabling switch is turned to
the OFF position, the passenger airbag status
E80935 indicator (arrowed) will illuminate whenever
the starter key is turned to position ll.
Prior to fitting a child restraint on the front
passenger seat, open the passenger door and When switching the passenger airbag on or off,
using the starter key, turn the airbag disabling check that the status indicator shows the
switch to the OFF position. correct condition.

73
L

Airbags
Airbag switched OFF Airbag switched ON

WARNINGS WARNINGS
To avoid the risk of injury, never use a To ensure that the adult restraint
child restraint in the front of the vehicle system performs as intended, make
unless the passenger airbag has been sure that the passenger airbag is switched ON.
switched OFF.

E82246

E82245
When an adult is seated in the front passenger
In order to fit a child restraint to the front seat of your vehicle, ensure that the passenger
passenger seat, use the starter key to turn the airbag disabling switch is turned to the ON
passenger airbag disabling switch to the OFF position.
position. This will ensure that the airbag will perform as
Check that when the starter key is turned to intended in the event of a crash.
position II, the status indicator on the facia is Check that when the starter key is turned to
illuminated confirming that the passenger position II, the operational status lamp on the
airbag is not operational. facia is not illuminated, confirming that the
If the airbag SRS warning indicator in the passenger airbag is operational.
instrument pack illuminates continuously,
remove the child restraint from the front seat
and consult your Land Rover Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.

74
R

Airbags
AIRBAG WARNING LAMP AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATION
A red warning indicator in the
WARNING
instrument pack will alert you to any
malfunction of the airbag SRS. On For your safety a Land Rover Dealer/
vehicles with a message centre, this will be Authorised Repairer must carry out any
accompanied by the message AIRBAG FAULT. of the following tasks.
Seek qualified assistance urgently if any of the Removal, replacement, repair, or modification,
following symptoms occurs: of any wiring or component in the vicinity of
• The warning indicator fails to illuminate the SRS components, including the steering
when the starter switch is turned to wheel, steering column, door trim, roof lining,
position ll. instrument pack and instrument panel.
• The warning indicator fails to extinguish Installation of electronic equipment such as a
within approximately four seconds after mobile phone, two-way radio or in-car
the starter switch is turned to position Il. entertainment system.
• The warning indicator illuminates after the Modification to the front or side of the vehicle,
engine is started, or while the vehicle is including the bumper and chassis.
being driven. Attachment of accessories to the front or side
of the vehicle.
In addition, always contact your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer if:
• An airbag inflates.
• A Pre-tensioner activates.
• The front or side of the vehicle is damaged,
even if the airbag has not inflated.
• Any part of an airbag module cover shows
signs of cracking or damage.
• Any trim containing airbags - front seat
back, headlining or pillar trims - becomes
damaged.

75
L

Child safety
CHILD SEATS Only fit a child seat that has been approved for
Child safety

use in your vehicle, and ensure that the


WARNINGS manufacturer's fitting instructions are followed
Do not use a child restraint on a seat exactly.
with an operational airbag in front of it. Note: Crash statistics show that children are
There is a risk of death or serious injury when safer when properly restrained in the rear
the airbag deploys. The best place for a child, seating positions than they are in the front.
is properly restrained in the rear seats.
If a child must travel in the front passenger
Original text according to EEC R94.01. seat, Land Rover recommends the following:
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward 1. Position the seat fully rearward.
facing child restraint on a seat protected by an
2. Adjust the lumbar to its minimum.
airbag in front of it.
3. Adjust the cushion to its highest position.
Do not use a forward facing child seat,
until a child is above the minimum 4. Set cushion rake to its lowest position.
weight of 9 kg (20 lb.) and able to sit up 5. Set seat belt upper anchorage to its lowest
unaided. Up to the age of two, a child's spine position.
and neck are not sufficiently developed to 6. For markets other than Australia, disable
avoid injury in a frontal impact. the airbag. See DISABLING THE
Do not allow a baby or infant to be held PASSENGER AIRBAG (page 73).
or carried on the lap. The force of a
crash can increase effective body weight by as
much as 30 times, making it impossible to
hold on to the child. Children typically require
the use of a booster seat appropriate to their
age and size, thereby enabling the seat belts to E80608

be properly fitted, reducing the risk of injury in


a crash. Children could be endangered in a This symbol, affixed to the passenger side B
crash, if their child restraints are not properly post of your vehicle, warns against the use of a
secured in the vehicle. rear-facing child seat in the front passenger
seat when a passenger airbag is operational.
Do not use a child seat that hooks over
the seat back. This type of seat cannot Child restraints for larger children
be satisfactorily secured and is unlikely to be In a situation where a child is too large to fit
safe for your child. into a child safety seat, but is too small to safely
The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are fit the three point seat belt properly, a booster
designed for adults and larger children. For seat is recommended for maximum safety.
their safety, it is very important that all infants Follow the manufacturer’s fitting instructions
and children under 12 are restrained in a exactly, then adjust the seat belt to suit.
suitable child safety seat appropriate to their
age and size. See CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
(page 78).

76
R

Child safety
Seat belt automatic locking mechanism Child restraint checklist
The second and third row seat belts have a Complete the check list every time a child
special locking mechanism which aids the travels in the vehicle:
retention of child seats. • Carefully follow the instructions provided
The procedure to install a child seat is as by the manufacturer of the restraint
follows: system.
1. Place the child seat in the vehicle, attach • Always use the appropriate child restraints
the seat belt and secure the buckle in and adjust harnesses for every child, every
accordance with the manufacturer’s fitting trip.
instructions. • Always attach the top tether when
2. Pull on the shoulder section of the belt to installing the ISOFIX seat.
reel out all of the remaining webbing to the • Always give the ISOFIX seat a final pull to
limit of its travel. This will engage the ensure that the lower anchors are secure.
automatic locking feature, which then acts • Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing
as a ratchet, allowing the webbing only to and do not place any objects between the
retract. child and the restraint system.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract onto the child • Regularly check the fit of a child seat and
seat (a clicking sound will confirm that the replace seats or harnesses that show signs
ratchet has engaged), while firmly pushing of wear.
the child seat into the vehicle seat. • Ensure that you have removed all slack
4. Ensure that there is no slack in the seat belt from the adult seat belt.
by pulling upwards on the shoulder belt • Set children a good example - always wear
immediately above the child restraint. The your seat belt.
seat belt should now be locked and the
child seat held firmly in position.
When the child seat is removed and all of the
seat belt webbing is allowed to retract, the seat
belt locking mechanism reverts to normal
operation.
Note: Where possible, use the seat belt
automatic locking mechanism to secure large
items of luggage that are to be carried on the
seats. In the event of an accident, insecure
items become missiles capable of causing
serious injury.

77
L

Child safety
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
The following table shows the suitability of
CAUTION each passenger seat position for carrying
Information given in the table was children up to 12 years of age or 1.5 m (5 feet)
correct at the time of going to press. tall and the installation of suitable child
However, availability of child restraints may restraint systems.
change. Please refer to your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for the latest
recommendation.
Seating position Mass group (with approximate age) As shown on child restraint
0 = Up to 10 kg 0+ = Up to 13 kg I = 9 to 18 kg (20 II and III =15 to 36
(22 lb) (0-10 (29 lb) (0-18 to 40 lb) (9 kg (33 to 80 lb)
months) months) months - 5 years) (4-12 years)
Front passenger U U U U
Rear seats - 5-seat L L L L
vehicle
Second row seats - U U U U
7-seat vehicles
Third row seats X X UF UF

• U = Suitable for universal category restraints approved for this mass group.
• UF = Suitable for forward-facing universal category restraints approved for this mass group.
• X = Not suitable for children in this mass group.
• L = Suitable for particular child restraints as listed in the Child seat usage table.
Recommended child seats

Child size/age Recommended seat


Groups 0 and O+ Britax Cosy-Tot or
Römer Baby Safe.
Group II and III Britax Evolva 23 Ultra.

In many countries, legislation governs how and


where children should be carried when
travelling in a vehicle.
It is the responsibility of the driver to comply
with all regulations in force in the country
where the vehicle is being used.

78
R

Child safety
ISOFIX child seat positions
Note:
ISOFIX anchorages are provided for second row outer seating positions. ISOFIX child restraints
should be securely attached following the manufacturers instructions at these locations only.

Mass group as shown on child Size Classes Fixtures Vehicle ISOFIX


restraint. positions
Carrycot F/ G ISO L1/L2 X
0 = Up to 10 kg (22 lb) E ISO R1 IL
0+ = Up to 13 kg (29 lb) C/ D/ E ISO R1/R2/R3 IL
I = 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb) C/ D ISO R2/R3 IL
A/ B1/ B ISO F2/ F2X/ F3 IUF
II = 15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb) - - -
III = 22 to 36 kg (48 to 79 lb) - - -

• IUF = suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for
use in the mass group.
• IL = suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) in the table below. These
ISOFIX CRS are those of the "specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
• X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or
this size class.
Recommended ISOFIX child seats

ISOFIX position Recommended seat


IL Britax Cosy-Tot ISOFIX or
Römer Baby Safe ISOFIX.

79
L

Child safety
ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS
A
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to fit an ISOFIX child
seat to the centre seating position - the
anchor bars are not designed to hold an
ISOFIX child seat in this position. If the child
seat is not correctly anchored, there is a
significant risk of injury to the child in the
event of a collision or emergency braking.
Always follow the child seat or restraint
system manufacturer's instructions
when fitting tether straps.
Note: ISOFIX child restraints are only fitted to
B
the second row seats.

E80614

A. 5-seat vehicles
B. 7-seat vehicles
Both second row outer seating positions, are
equipped to accept ISOFIX restraints.

80
R

Child safety
Once the ISOFIX child seat is installed, test the
security of the installation, before seating a
child. Attempt to twist the child seat from side
to side and to pull it away from the vehicle seat,
then check that the anchors are still securely in
place.
Tether strap anchorages (Australia only)
WARNING
E80615
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
To install your child seat with an ISOFIX by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
restraint system: circumstances are they to be used for adult
1. Raise or remove the head restraint. seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
2. Lift the velcro strap, exposing the ISOFIX
When fitting a child seat or restraint
locking mechanism.
system, always pass the tether strap
3. Slide the child seat into the locking over the top of the seat back and beneath the
mechanism. underside of the head restraint.
Child seat upper tether anchorage
(5-seat vehicles)

FRONT OF
VEHICLE

E80616

Upper tether anchorages are provided at each


seating position equipped to accept ISOFIX
child restraints (shown in the illustrations).
Note: Always ensure that if an upper tether is E81521
provided, it is secured and tightened properly,
as this provides maximum protection for a
child.

81
L

Child safety
Child seat upper tether anchorage CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
(7-seat vehicles)
WARNING
To avoid injury or death, never leave
children unsupervised in the vehicle.

FRONT OF
VEHICLE

E80631

E81522
Child safety locks are fitted to the rear doors.
Provision is made in the second row seats for
Insert the starter key into the keyhole and turn
the fitting of up to three child seats of the type
outwards to activate the child safety lock.
that requires tether strap anchorage points.
With the child safety locks engaged, the rear
Your vehicle is equipped with anchorage points
doors cannot be opened from inside the
on the back of the second row seat frames.
vehicle.
These should be used to attach straps from
child seats or restraint systems. Turn the key inwards to disengage the child
safety lock.

82
R

Steering wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL HORN
Steering wheel

WARNINGS
Do not adjust the steering wheel
position while the vehicle is moving.
This is extremely dangerous!
Ensure that the lever is fully up.
Inadvertent movement of the wheel
may occur if the lever is not locked. E80445

To operate, press either of the horn switches.

AUDIO CONTROL

2
3
4
5
E80450

1. Mode select.
2. Volume up.
E80511 3. Volume down.
The steering wheel position can be adjusted in 4. Channel up.
two directions. 5. Channel down.
Move the lever, located under the steering
wheel, fully downwards (see inset).
Adjust the steering wheel up or down, in or out.
Move the lever fully up to lock.

83
L

Steering wheel
VOICE CONTROL CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control is operated via the switches on
Activating the voice control system
the steering wheel and enables the driver to
maintain a constant road speed without using
the accelerator pedal. See USING CRUISE
CONTROL (page 164).

1
2

3
E80446
4
To activate voice control:
• Briefly pull the control paddle (your Audio
will mute at this point). An audible alert will E80444

be heard, and LISTENING will be displayed 1. Set + : Set or increase the speed
on the main message centre to indicate
that the system is now waiting for a voice 2. Set - : Set or decrease the speed
command. 3. Resume: Resume set speed
Note: It is only necessary to use the steering 4. Cancel: Cancels without erasing
wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of memorised speed
each voice session.

84
R

Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION Daytime running lamps
Lighting

There are three types of headlamp systems: In certain markets, the side lamps, licence plate
• Halogen high/low beam main lamp with a lamps and headlamp low beams will illuminate
fill-in high beam halogen lamp alongside. with the engine running and the lamps master
switch turned off. The instrument pack
• Bi-xenon high/low beam main lamps with
illumination remains off.
fill-in high beam halogen lamp alongside.
• An Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS). Unless they are required or
See ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM prohibited by law, daytime running
(AFS) (page 89). lamps can be disabled or enabled by
a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Halogen headlamps
Stop lamps
Halogen bulbs are very similar to the standard
light bulbs fitted to side or tail lights. Added The stop lamps will illuminate while the brake
traces of halogen inside the bulb make it 10 to pedal is pressed.
20% more efficient than a standard light bulb The stop lamps also illuminate when Hill
of similar voltage and wattage. Halogen bulbs Descent Control is braking the vehicle or
have an operating life of two to three times during Electric parking brake dynamic
longer than a standard bulb. operation. See ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
(EPB) (page 155).
Bi-Xenon headlamps
Some vehicles are fitted with Xenon low/high Reversing lamps
beam headlamp units. Xenon lamps provide Selection of reverse gear will operate the
significantly improved visibility, especially reversing lamps.
during adverse weather and driving conditions.
Bi-Xenon units use a Xenon bulb for both high
beam and low beam, whilst a halogen bulb is
used for high beam fill-in. A shutter, operated
by a solenoid, changes the direction of the
Xenon light beam, to give either low or high
beam.
The operational life of a Bi-Xenon light is
significantly longer than that of a conventional
or halogen bulb.

85
L

Lighting
LIGHTING CONTROL High beam headlamps
Lamps master switch

E81026

With the lamps master switch in position 3 and


2 3 starter switch in position II, push the column
1
4 stalk away from the steering wheel to select
high beam.
The blue warning indicator in the
AUTO
instrument pack will illuminate
when high beam is selected.
To cancel high beam, pull the stalk towards the
steering wheel.
E81025 To flash the headlamps on high beam, pull the
1. Off stalk towards the steering wheel and release it.
2. Side lamps Headlamp courtesy delay
3. Low beam headlamps The headlamps can be kept on for a short time
4. Automatic control lamps after the vehicle is parked. Turn the starter
switch off with the lamps master switch in
Side lamps positions 2, or 3.
The side lamps and licence plate lamps, Remove the key from the starter switch and
illuminate when the lamps master switch is turn the lamps master switch to position 1. The
turned to positions 2 or 3, regardless of the headlamps will remain illuminated for up to
position of the starter switch. 240 seconds. This time delay is configurable.
A green warning indicator in the See TRIP COMPUTER (page 115).
instrument pack will illuminate The courtesy delay may be cancelled at any
when side lamps are on. time by turning the starter switch to position I
or II or the lamps master switch to positions 1
Low beam headlamps
or 2.
The low beam headlamps, illuminate when the
lamps master switch is turned to position 3, Note: If Automatic Control Lamps are switched
and the starter switch is in position II. on, the headlamp courtesy delay will operate
automatically.

86
R

Lighting
Automatic control lamps REAR FOG LAMPS
With the lamps master switch in position 4 and
starter switch in position II, the side lamps, low
beam headlamps and licence plate lamps will
illuminate automatically when the ambient light AUTO
falls below a pre-defined level.
All of the lamps will go out when the ambient
light rises above that level.

FRONT FOG LAMPS


E81029
1 2 3

With the side lamps or low beam headlamps


AUTO switched on, pull the switch to position 3 to
switch on the rear fog lamps.
If front fog lamps are not fitted, the rear fog
lamps illuminate with the switch in position 2.
An amber warning indicator will
illuminate in the instrument pack
E81028
1 2 when the rear fog lamps are
switched on.
With the side lamps or low beam headlamps To switch off the fog lamps, return the switch
switched on, pull the switch to position 2 to to position 1.
switch on the front fog lamps.
Note: Fog lamps should only be used when
A green warning indicator will visibility is severely restricted.
illuminate in the instrument pack
when the front fog lamps are
switched on.
To switch off the fog lamps, return the switch
to position 1.
Note: Fog lamps should only be used when
visibility is severely restricted.

87
L

Lighting
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS HEADLAMP LEVELLING
Vehicles with coil suspension have manual
Headlamp beam adjustment - Halogen
headlamp levelling to compensate for uneven
It will be necessary to attach blanking decals to loading of the vehicle. If, for instance, the rear
the headlamp lenses to alter the beam pattern. is heavily laden, the resulting tilt of the vehicle
Seek qualified assistance for further may bring the low headlamps beam up to a
information. level unacceptable to other road users.
Headlamp beam adjustment - Xenon
Position of the lever illustrated will vary
depending on the side of vehicle. It may be on
either side of the headlamp bulb aperture.
AUTO
When travelling in countries which drive on the
opposite side of the road, use the lever within
each headlamp unit to alter the beam pattern.

E81502

With the headlamps turned on, rotate the


thumbnail up or down to adjust the vertical aim
of the beams.

Switch position Setting


0 Driver only or driver and
E81158 front seat passenger.
You will need to gain access to the inside of the 0.5 All seats occupied in a
headlamp unit. See REMOVING A HEADLAMP 5-seat vehicle or all seats in
(page 93).Move the lever down for when front and third rows for a
driving in left-hand drive countries and up for 7-seat vehicle.
right-hand drive countries. 1 All seats occupied in a
7-seat vehicle.
1.5 All seats occupied in a
vehicle loaded to its Gross
Vehicle Weight.
2 Driver only in a vehicle
loaded to its Gross Vehicle
Weight.

88
R

Lighting
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM
(AFS)
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) is a new
lighting system, designed to give the driver
improved visibility. It has two main
components: A swivelling headlamp unit and a
static bending lamp, with a beam set to 45
degrees from the centre line of the vehicle.
2
E80817 3 The headlamp units can swivel left or right to
improve light spread on bends in the road and
Press the switch to operate the hazard warning
they operate throughout the vehicle speed
lamps. All of the direction indicator lamps will
range. They also react to braking or
flash together.
acceleration in the vertical plane, to maximise
Use only in an emergency to warn other road headlamp performance. Additional lighting is
users when the stationary vehicle is causing an supplied by the static bending lamps at speeds
obstruction, or is in a hazardous situation. between 30 km/h (18 mph) and 70 km/h (44
Remember to switch off before moving away. mph). If the higher speed is exceeded, the
static bending lamps will only reactivate when
speed reduces to 60 km/h (37 mph). These
headlamps broaden the beam of the headlamps
when cornering.
The system takes inputs from the vehicle's
road speed and steering angle, to determine
the amount of horizontal swivel. The amount of
swivel is highest at low manoeuvring speeds
and movement reduces as speed increases.
Static bending lights operate when the system
detects a steering wheel rotation of 70 degrees
or more.
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to
the central position and the unit's swivelling
capability is disabled.
An amber warning indicator will
illuminate in the instrument pack if a
fault is detected with the AFS. Seek
qualified assistance.

89
L

Lighting
The AFS advantage Cornering lamps
These lamps broaden the beam of the
1 headlamps when cornering during normal
night driving.
Additional lighting comes from the static
bending lamps which have a beam set to 45
degrees outward from the centre line of the
vehicle.
The system switches on the lamp, if it has
received an input from the vehicle's direction
indicator. As the system is ignition-based, the
lamps will not stay on even if the vehicle is
parked with the direction indicator lever in the
operating position.
Only the lamp on the same side as the
operating direction indicator comes on.
2
Operating the direction indicators will also
activate the relevant lamp.
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to
the central position and the unit's swivelling
capability is disabled unless the direction
indicators are operating.

E80820

1. Shows the light spread of a vehicle not


fitted with AFS.
2. Shows the light spread of a vehicle fitted
with AFS.

90
R

Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS
1

2
E80816

With the starter switch in position II, move the


lever up or down to operate the direction
indicators.
A green left or right warning
indicator in the instrument pack will
flash when the direction indicator
lamps are operating.
E80821 When the lever is held momentarily up or down
against spring pressure and then released, the
1. Shows the light spread of a vehicle not
indicators will flash three times to indicate a
fitted with cornering lamps.
lane change.
2. Shows the light spread of a vehicle fitted
Note: The indicators will continue to flash if the
with cornering lamps.
lever is held against spring pressure.
This feature can be enabled or
disabled by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
If the warning indicator fails to flash or flashes
rapidly, this may indicate a bulb failure in one
of the direction indicator lamps.

91
L

Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS Rear interior lamps
Front interior lamps

E81080

E81079 The rear interior lamps are grouped together in


the roof above the second row of seats. This
The interior lamps can be switched on fitment may include the rear air conditioning
individually by pressing the switch adjacent to controls.
the lamp required.
It is possible to de-activate the courtesy lamps Vanity mirror lamps
automatic mode by pressing the centre switch. The vanity mirror lamps are turned on when the
The message INTERIOR LIGHTS OFF will flash corresponding vanity mirror cover is opened
in the message centre. and turned off when it is closed.
To switch the lamps off without disabling Note: Map lamps, glovebox lamps and vanity
automatic mode briefly press the centre mirror lamps will extinguish automatically after
switch. 15 minutes to prevent battery drain provided
that the starter switch is in position 0.
To enable automatic mode press the front
centre switch for more than three seconds. The Low-level night-time illumination
message INTERIOR LIGHTS AUTOMATIC will With the main lighting switch turned to
flash in the message centre. sidelamps or headlamps, LEDs in the front
Map lamp operation interior lamps provides very low level
illumination. The level of illumination can be
Press the required map lamp switch (outer
adjusted using the instrument pack
lamps) to turn on and off.
illumination dimmer switch.
Glovebox lamp Low level lighting provides very limited
Illuminates automatically (with headlamps on) illumination for the interior of the vehicle,
whenever the glovebox is opened and whilst the vehicle is being driven, without
extinguishes when the glovebox is closed. affecting the driver’s night vision.

92
R

Lighting
REMOVING A HEADLAMP Removal of headlamp unit
Removing the grille

E80618

1. Remove the grille by pressing down on the


four upper clips, and up on the bottom
two, securing the grille to the vehicle body. E80619

2. Lift the grille clear of the vehicle and place 1. Carefully lever up the two locking bars.
it where it will not sustain any damage.
2. Disconnect the wiring plug from the back
of the unit and remove the unit from the
vehicle.
3. Place face down on a flat surface covered
in a soft material to prevent damage to the
unit's lenses.

93
L

Lighting
Refitting the headlamp unit REMOVING A REAR LAMP

E80591

Note: If accessory lamp guards are fitted, refer


to the separate accessory user instructions for
removal.
The rear lamp unit contains five lamps and it is
necessary to completely remove the unit from
the vehicle in order to change any of the bulbs.
Removal of rear lamp unit
E80628
1. With the tailgate open, remove two screws
from the edge of the unit nearer the rear
1. Reconnect the wiring plug. door aperture.
2. Offer up the unit into position. 2. Pull the unit away from the vehicle.
3. Push down on the two locking slides. 3. Disconnect the wiring multi-plug and
remove the unit from the vehicle. Place
Refitting the grille face down on a flat surface covered in a
1. Refit the grille, aligning the upper and soft material to prevent damage.
lower clips with their respective slots, and
press into place.
2. Ensure the clips have sprung into place
securing the grille

94
R

Lighting
CHANGING A BULB
CAUTION
Before replacing a bulb, always turn off
the starter switch and appropriate
lighting switch to prevent any possibility of a
short circuit. Only replace bulbs with the same
type and specification. See BULB
1 SPECIFICATION CHART (page 104).
Check the operation of all exterior lamps before
2
you drive the vehicle.
3 Halogen bulbs
Halogen bulbs are used for high beam, low
4 beam and front fog lamps. Take care not to
5 touch this type of bulb with your fingers;
always use a cloth to handle them. If
necessary, clean the bulb with methylated
E80592
spirits to remove fingerprints.
Each bulb is now accessible by twisting off its
Xenon lamp units
electrical connection cap. See BULB
SPECIFICATION CHART (page 104). WARNINGS
1. Stop/tail lamp Bi-Xenon lamp units operate at very
2. Direction indicator high temperature. If they have recently
3. Tail lamp been in use allow sufficient time for them to
cool down before touching them.
4. Reversing lamp
Xenon lamp units contain Mercury
5. Rear fog lamp which is hazardous.
Note: Tail lamp 3 uses the same twin-filament The Xenon system generates up to
bulb as stop/tail lamp 1. 28,000 volts. Contact with this voltage
Refitting the rear lamp unit could lead to a fatality. Ensure that the
headlamps and starter switch are turned off
1. Reconnect the electrical multi-plug. before working on the system.
2. Locate the unit’s two studs in the sockets Replacement or maintenance of Xenon
at the outer side of the mounting face. lamps should only be carried out by
3. Insert and tighten the two screws on the qualified personnel.
side of the unit nearer the door aperture. Seek advice about the proper
4. Check that all of the bulbs work. disposal of Xenon lamp units from a
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer or your local authority.

95
L

Lighting
Headlamp unit To change a high or low beam bulb
(Halogen only)
WARNING
Do not attempt to change any bulb with High beam
the lighting switched on. If the lighting
has just been switched off, give the bulbs time
to cool down. Handling them in a hot condition
may cause personal injury.
The headlamp unit contains five lamps and it is
necessary to completely remove the unit from
the vehicle in order to change any of the bulbs.
See REMOVING A HEADLAMP (page 93).
Bulb access

1 2

E80622

Low beam

4 3
E80620

The five bulbs within the headlamp unit,


accessible under domed caps are:
1. Direction indicator.
2. Low beam/Xenon.
3. High beam. E80623

4. Side lamp and static bending lamp. 1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.
2. Pull off the electrical connector.
3. Release the spring clip holding the bulb in
place and lift out the bulb.

96
R

Lighting
4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above To change a static bending bulb
procedure in reverse order. When
replacing the cap, align the arrowheads on
the cap and the body of the unit.
Note: After the replacement of any high or low
beam bulb, the alignment of the headlamps
should be checked, seek qualified assistance.
To change a Xenon bulb

E80625

1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.


2. Twist the bulb holder to unlock, then pull
out the bulb complete with electrical
connector.
3. To release the bulb, squeeze the two
catches, then pull to remove the electrical
E80624
connector.
1. Twist and lift off the domed cap. 4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above
2. Twist the connector cap anticlockwise to procedure in reverse order. When
unlock it. Pull clear of the bulb. replacing the cap, align the arrowheads on
the cap and the body of the unit.
3. Release the spring clip holding the bulb in
place and lift out the bulb.
4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above
procedure in reverse order. When
replacing the cap, ensure that the lugs are
in contact with the bulb base.
Note: After the replacement of any high or low
beam bulb, the alignment of the headlamps
should be checked, seek qualified assistance.

97
L

Lighting
To change a front side lamp bulb To change a front indicator lamp bulb

E80626

1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.


2. Pull out the bulb complete with electrical
connector.
3. Pull the bulb out of the electrical E80621

connector.
To access the direction indicator, the headlamp
4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above unit locking slide must be completely removed
procedure in reverse order. When from the unit.
replacing the cap, align the arrowheads on
the cap and the body of the unit.

E80627

1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.

98
R

Lighting
2. Pull out the bulb complete with electrical Replacing the bulb
connector.
3. Pull the bulb out of the electrical
connector.
4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above
procedure in reverse order. When
replacing the cap, align the arrowheads on
the cap and the body of the unit.
To change a front fog lamp bulb
Removing the fog lamp

E80595

1. Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise to


unlock, then pull out the bulb, complete
with electrical connector.
2. To release the bulb, depress the two
catches (solid arrows in inset), then pull to
remove the bulb from the holder.
3. Replace bulb. See BULB SPECIFICATION
CHART (page 104).
E80594
• Before fitting the replacement bulb, note
the flat and the tab on the otherwise
1. Using the finger slot at the top of the fog circular shape of the bulb mounting
lamp surround, pull to remove. flange. The tab acts as a key to enable
2. Remove the three securing screws to correct positioning of the bulb in the
release the lamp unit. Ease the unit out of bulb holder.
the front bumper. • Do not touch the bulb glass with your
fingers. If necessary, clean the bulb with
methylated spirits.
4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above
procedure in reverse order to reassemble.

99
L

Lighting
Note: After the replacement of a fog lamp bulb, To change a number plate lamp bulb
the alignment of the lamp should be checked,
seek qualified assistance.
Refitting the fog lamp

E81086
E80596
1. With the upper tailgate open, use a suitable
1. Align fog lamp to front bumper and secure tool to lever the lens from the tailgate (see
with screws. inset).
2. Align the spring clip above the finger slot 2. Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise to
with the upper receiver shape in the unlock, then pull out the bulb, complete
bumper and push into place. with electrical connector.
3. Push the lower part of fog lamp surround 3. Pull the bulb to remove it from the
into place, applying some upward connector.
pressure. 4. Insert a new bulb and refit the
Note: The fog lamp surround is uniquely components. See BULB SPECIFICATION
shaped and will only fit in one position. CHART (page 104).

100
R

Lighting
To change a side repeater lamp bulb To change a stepwell lamp bulb

E80597

1. With the relevant door open, insert a small


E81087 flat-bladed screwdriver under the forward
edge of the lens, to carefully lever the lamp
1. Push the lens firmly towards the front of
unit out.
the vehicle and withdraw the lamp unit
from the wing. 2. Pull the bulb out of the electrical
connector.
2. Twist to release the bulb holder from the
lens unit, then pull the bulb from its socket. 3. Insert a new bulb and refit the
components. See BULB SPECIFICATION
3. Insert a new bulb and refit the
CHART (page 104).
components. See BULB SPECIFICATION
CHART (page 104).

101
L

Lighting
To change a courtesy lamp bulb To change a tailgate lamp bulb

E80597

1. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver


E81088 under the lens and carefully prise the lens
from the lamp unit.
1. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into
the indent on the side of the lens and 2. Pull the bulb out of the electrical
carefully prise the lens from the lamp unit. connector.
2. Pull the bulb out of the electrical 3. Insert a new bulb and refit the
connector. components. See BULB SPECIFICATION
CHART (page 104).
3. Insert a new bulb and refit the
components. See BULB SPECIFICATION
CHART (page 104).

102
R

Lighting
To change a map lamp bulb To change a vanity mirror lamp bulb

E81090

1. With the vanity mirror cover open, use a


E81089 small flat-bladed screwdriver to carefully
lever the relevant lens from the
1. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into mirror/lamp unit.
the indent on the side of the lens and
carefully prise the lens from the lamp unit. 2. Pull the bulb out of the electrical
connector.
2. Pull the bulb out of the electrical
connector. 3. Insert a new bulb and refit the
components. See BULB SPECIFICATION
3. Insert a new bulb and refit the CHART (page 104).
components. See BULB SPECIFICATION
CHART (page 104).

103
L

Lighting
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Note: All bulbs must be rated at 12 volts.

Bulb Watts
Headlamps, low and high beam 55 (H7)
(Halogen)
Headlamps, low and high beam 55 (D2S)
(Xenon)
Cornering lamps (Halogen) 35 (H8)
Front side lamps W5W
Front direction indicators S8
Rear direction indicators P21
Front fog lamps (Halogen) 55 (H11)
Side marker lamps W5W
Reverse lamps P21
Rear fog guard lamps P21
Stop/tail lamps P21/5
Number plate lamps W5W
Door/puddle lamps W5W
Interior lamps W5W
Luggage/footwell lamps W5W
Luggage/tailgate lamps W5W
Glovebox lamp W5W
Vanity mirror lamp 1.2

Note: In certain territories it is a legal


requirement to carry spare bulbs, in case of
bulb failure. A replacement bulb kit is available
as an approved accessory from your Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

104
R

Wipers and washers


WINDSCREEN WIPERS Single wipe
Wipers and washers

The wipers and washers will only operate when Pull the lever down to position 4 and release
the starter switch is turned to position I or II. immediately.
Note: With the lever held down, the wipers will
CAUTIONS
operate at fast speed until the lever is released.
Do not operate the windscreen wipers on
a dry screen. The drag on the wiper Intermittent variable delay
mechanism may cause damage.
In freezing or very hot conditions ensure
that the wipers have not stuck to the
windscreen before operating. The drag on the
wiper mechanism may cause damage.
Remove any snow, ice or frost, from the
windscreen, around the wiper arms and
blades, and the screen scuttle before operating
the wipers. Snow and ice can cause damage to
the wiper mechanism if left uncleared.
E80469
Note: If the wiper blades do become stuck, or
jammed, an electronic cut out may temporarily With the lever in position 1, rotate the collar
halt the operation of the wipers. If this clockwise to decrease the interval between
happens, switch off the wipers and the ignition. wipes. Rotate the collar counterclockwise to
Clear any obstructions, and free the wiper increase the interval between wipes.
blades before attempting to switch on the Speed dependent mode
ignition
When speed dependent mode is configured,
3 the operation of all wiper modes will be
affected by vehicle speed.
2 If the vehicle’s speed drops below 8 km/h
(5 mph) with the wipers operating, the wiper
1 frequency automatically reduces. The wipers
will switch to the next lowest speed. When the
0 vehicle’s speed increases to over 8 km/h
(5 mph), the original wiper speed setting is
4 restored automatically.
E80468 This feature can be enabled or
disabled by a Land Rover
1. Rain sensor or intermittent variable delay Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
2. Normal speed wipe
3. Fast speed wipe

105
L

Wipers and washers


Speed dependent intermittent mode WINDSCREEN WASHERS
The frequency of intermittent variable delay is
WARNING
adjusted automatically according to road speed
on vehicles not equipped with a rain sensor. If the vehicle operates in temperatures
below 41°F (5°C), use washer fluid with
The intermittent period can be adjusted for
antifreeze protection. In cold weather, failure
each of the speed dependent modes by rotating
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection
the delay switch either clockwise or
could result in impaired vision and increase
counterclockwise.
the risk of an accident.
This feature can be enabled or
disabled by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

RAIN SENSOR
Rain sensor variable delay
CAUTION
E80471
Before entering an automatic car wash,
ensure that the wipers are switched off, Push the button to operate the windscreen
they could operate during the car wash washer. The front wipers will operate if the
programme and be damaged. button is pressed for more than half a second.
When the button is released, the wipers will
complete the current stroke and then complete
two further strokes before parking
automatically.
If the button is pressed for less than half a
second, only the washer will operate.
Note: National or local regulations may restrict
the use of Volatile Organic Compounds
(VOCs), which are commonly used as
antifreeze agents in washer fluid. A washer
E80469
fluid with limited VOC content should be used
With the wiper switch in position 1, wiper only if it provides adequate freeze resistance
operation is adjusted automatically according for all climates in which the vehicle will be
to information supplied by the rain sensor. operated.

Rotate the collar clockwise to increase (a wipe


will occur immediately) or counterclockwise to
decrease the sensitivity of the rain sensor, and
therefore the frequency of wiper operation.

106
R

Wipers and washers


REAR WINDOW WIPER AND Tailgate open disable
WASHERS If the tailgate is opened while the rear wiper is
operating, the wiper will:
• Stop immediately.
• Not start to move if it is already stationary.
If the tailgate is subsequently closed, the wiper
will resume operation after three seconds.
If the tailgate is open and the vehicle's speed is
above 3 km/h (2 mph), the wiper will operate as
if the tailgate were closed.
1
E80472 2

Wiper - intermittent operation


Pull the lever to position 1. The intermittent
delay period will vary according to the delay
switch setting.
Wiper - continuous operation
The rear wiper can be configured to operate
continuously.
This setting can be configured by a
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
Washer
Pull the lever to position 2 and hold it. The
wiper and washer will operate. When the lever
is released, the washer will stop and the wiper
will complete a further two wipe cycles and
then return to intermittent operation.
Reverse gear input
If reverse gear is selected while the front
wipers are operating, the rear wiper will
operate automatically.

107
L

Wipers and washers


ADJUSTING THE WINDSCREEN HEADLAMP WASHERS
WASHER JETS If the headlamps are on, operating the screen
washer will also power wash the headlamps.
Front
Note: If the fluid level sensor detects a low
level, the headlamp power wash is inhibited.

CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES


CAUTION
Only use cleaning products which have
been approved for use on automotive
glass and rubber. Inappropriate products can
have unpredictable effects.

E80473

The windscreen washer jets are set during


manufacture and should not need adjusting.
However, if adjustment is ever necessary,
insert a needle into the jet orifice and lever E80573
gently to position each jet, so that the spray is
directed towards the centre of the front screen. The wiping edge of the blades should be
checked and cleaned periodically. Check the
Rear blade rubber for cracks, splits and roughness.
If any damage, wear or roughness is detected
the blade should be replaced immediately to
prevent damage to the glass.
Clean the blade edge by wiping with a soft cloth
or sponge, using warm soapy water.

E80474

Should any jet become obstructed, insert a


needle or thin strand of wire into the orifice to
clear the blockage.

108
R

Wipers and washers


CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES Rear
Only fit replacement wiper blades that are
identical to the original specification.
Front

E80476

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the rear


window.
E80475 2. Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release
the blade assembly
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the screen
and pivot the blade assembly away from 3. Slide the blade assembly off the end of the
the arm. wiper arm.

2. Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release 4. Carefully replace the arm to its stowed
the blade assembly position.

3. Slide the blade assembly off the end of the To replace, position the blade assembly onto
wiper arm. the inside of the wiper arm and push firmly into
position until the blade clips into place.
4. Carefully replace the arm to its stowed
position.
To replace, position the wiper arm into the
aperture in the middle of the blade assembly
and push firmly into position until the blade
clips into place.

109
L

Windows and mirrors


ELECTRIC WINDOWS The windows can be operated when the starter
Windows and mirrors

switch is at position I or II and for up to 40


WARNINGS seconds after the starter switch is turned to
Closing a window on fingers, hands or position 0 (provided a front door is not
any vulnerable part of the body, can opened).
result in serious injury. Press and hold the front of the respective
Ensure that all adult passengers are switch to lower a window. Lift and hold the
familiar with the controls and the front of the switch to close a window. The
potential dangers of electric windows. window will stop moving as soon as the switch
For their safety, when leaving children is released.
unattended in the vehicle always One touch operation (front windows
remove the key from the starter switch.
only)
Ensure that children are kept clear The front windows have a one touch facility
whilst raising or lowering windows. that allows them to be fully opened or closed
Isolate the rear window switches when with a single operation of the switch. Firmly
carrying children. press or lift (and then release) the front of the
Do not allow passengers to extend any switch, to open or close the window. Window
part of their bodies through a window movement can be stopped at any time by
aperture while the vehicle is moving - injury operating the switch again.
from flying debris, branches of trees or other
Resetting one touch operation
obstructions could occur.
If the power is disconnected when the window
Operating the windows is open, one touch operation will be disabled
until the window position is recalibrated. To
5 4 2 recalibrate the window position, close the
window and keep the switch pressed for one
second.
Anti-trap mechanism (front windows
only)
If the anti-trap sensor detects an obstruction
E80395 3 1
during window closing, the window will stop
1. Right-hand front window and then open slightly. This will prevent a
window trapping vulnerable parts of the body
2. Left-hand front window
or other obstructions.
3. Right-hand rear window
The anti-trap feature can be overridden by
4. Left-hand rear window attempting to close the window at intervals of
5. Rear window isolation switch less than 10 seconds. On the fourth attempt the
window will move up a short distance with
increased force to try and move the
obstruction.

110
R

Windows and mirrors


If this fails to move the obstruction, anti-trap EXTERIOR MIRRORS
will be disabled until reset.
Proximity mirror (Japan only)
Resetting anti-trap
To reset anti-trap, close the window and keep
the switch pressed for one second.
Rear window isolation switch

E80397

Press the right-hand side of the switch to


isolate the window switches on the rear doors.
E80440
Press the left-hand side to restore independent
control. The proximity mirror has a split lens, providing
views along the left side and immediately
Rear window operation
ahead of the vehicle. Correct adjustment of the
mirror will reduce blind spots.
Adjust the mirror by rotating the head to the left
or right. The mirror should be adjusted a few
degrees at a time and the view checked from
the driver's seat before making further
adjustments.

E80396
Note: Alignment marks on the mirror head and
arm, indicate the initial position the mirror was
The rear windows can be operated from the set to during manufacture.
switches on the rear doors if the rear window
isolation switch has not been activated.

111
L

Windows and mirrors


ELECTRIC EXTERIOR MIRRORS Note: On vehicles fitted with the driver's seat
memory facility, up to three exterior mirror
CAUTION positions for each starter key can be stored.
Objects viewed in exterior mirrors may See MEMORY FUNCTION (page 138).
appear further away than they actually
Folding the mirror body
are.
Mirror glass adjustment

A B

E81039

The door mirrors are designed to fold forwards


or rearwards on impact. They can also be
folded towards the side windows into a park
E81037 position.

A. Right-hand drive vehicles Manual operation


B. Left-hand drive vehicles On some vehicles this operation can be carried
out by physically pushing the mirror bodies
With the starter switch turned to position I or II,
towards the side windows.
rotate the knob to select either the left or right
mirror.

E81038

Push the knob in the appropriate direction to


tilt the mirror glass up, down, left or right.

112
R

Windows and mirrors


Electric operation Reverse mirror dipping
Vehicles with driver’s seat memory have a
function which dips the exterior mirrors
whenever reverse gear is selected, giving the
driver a view of the kerb.
When this feature is first used, the mirrors will
dip to a preset position. The degree of dipping
can be programmed using the following
sequence:
1. Turn the starter key to position I or II. Do
not start the engine.
2. Select or store a driver’s seat memory
position. See MEMORY FUNCTION
E81040
(page 138).
With the rotary knob in the central position, 3. Select reverse gear, the exterior mirrors
push the knob downwards to fold the mirrors. will adjust to a preset position.
Push the knob downwards again to unfold the 4. Adjust the mirrors to the required dipped
mirrors. position.
If the mirrors are accidentally knocked out of 5. Perform a memory store procedure on the
position (i.e. with one mirror folded and the currently selected driving seat position.
other in the normal position), an additional
operation of the switch will re-synchronise 6. DOOR MIRROR DIP STORED will be
them. displayed on the message centre
accompanied by a single chime.
This feature can be enabled or disabled. See
TRIP COMPUTER (page 115).

113
L

Windows and mirrors


INTERIOR MIRROR
Manual mirror

E80447

Manually adjust the position of the mirror to


provide the best rear view.
Move the lever (forwards or backwards) to
change the angle of the mirror glass. This
allows the mirror to be dimmed to counteract
the glare from the headlamps of a following
vehicle.
Automatic dimming mirror

E81427

Some rear-view mirrors are fitted with a feature


that will automatically darken the mirror to
counteract the glare from the headlamps of a
following vehicle.
This feature is temporarily switched off when
reverse gear is selected.

114
R

Information displays
TRIP COMPUTER
Information displays

RANGE 246 MILES

AV.
EXT 73 F FUEL 17.4 MPG
AV.
TRIP 134.5 MILES SPEED 45 MPH
OVERSPEED WARNING
65 MPH

EXT 72 F

E81031 TRIP 134.5 MILES


The trip computer can be set to give a wide E81032

range of information. The units used can be


A series of short presses (less than two
selected by the driver. See PERSONALISED
seconds) will scroll through the following:
SETTINGS (page 116).
• Range (with current fuel tank contents).
At engine start-up, the display shows SYSTEM
• Average fuel consumption.
CHECK IN PROGRESS. When this check is
completed, the outside temperature is shown. • Average speed.
If the vehicle is moving, the display will also • Overspeed warning function (a long press
show the current trip distance. turns the function on or off).
Trip computer statistics can be viewed by • A review of active warning messages.
pressing the i button. • Outside temperature.
A long press (over two seconds) will zero the • Trip distance.
trip distance recorder and then start to record • Clock (24 hour time format).
distance from that point. Note: The clock is set via the audio system.
See CLOCK (page 130).

115
L

Information displays
PERSONALISED SETTINGS When selections are complete, a short press
Various trip computer settings can be selected, (less than two seconds) on the i button will
by the driver, to suit personal requirements. All save the settings and return to the trip
of the selections made are associated with the computer display.
remote control that was used during the Note: If the vehicle is moved while changes are
process. These choices are recalled when the being made, the system will prevent any further
vehicle is next unlocked using that remote input until the vehicle is stationary again.
control. See MEMORY FUNCTION (page 138).
With the starter key in any position, the vehicle TRIP COMPUTER SELECTION
stationary and a blank display, a short press SETTINGS
(less than two seconds) on the I button brings TRIP DISTANCE MILES/KM
up the SETTINGS display. UNITS (odometer)
FUEL USAGE UNITS MPG
l/100km
Km/l
SETTINGS
EXTERNAL °C or °F
ENTER TEMPERATURE
EXIT
OVERSPEED Off
WARNING 20 - 250 km/h or 15 to
3 140 mph in 5-unit
steps
4
HEADLAMP OFF 30/60/120/240
1 DELAY seconds
AUTO DOOR LOCK ON/OFF
2
(speed related
locking)
REVERSE MIRROR ON/OFF
TRIP DISTANCE DIP†
UNITS
KM
LAZY ENTRY† ON/OFF
NEXT
EXIT BACK RESTORE DEFAULT YES/NO
E81030
SETTINGS

Press button 1 to access the settings that can † Vehicles with driver’s seat memory.
be personalised.
Move through the menu, by pressing buttons 1
or 2, and make selections by pressing buttons
3 or 4.

116
R

Information displays
INFORMATION MESSAGES Information messages
Information messages will be displayed as and
when applicable, and also when the starter
switch is turned on or off. Where the message
requires action by the driver - Take corrective
LOW WASHER FLUID
action as soon as possible.
Messages are displayed in order of importance
with critical warnings taking priority.
E81033
Languages
Driver warning and information messages are The language displayed in the main message
displayed in the main message centre. centre is a Dealer configurable feature.
They are displayed when a fault is detected and If navigation is fitted, the language selected for
also when the starter switch is turned off. navigation display will also be displayed in the
Messages have different priority levels and are main message centre. If the main message
grouped into the following categories. centre does not support the selected navigation
language, English will be displayed.
Critical warning messages
Critical warning messages are accompanied by
Service interval indicator
an audible warning and the message may have
the handbook symbol next to it.
Do not ignore these messages - Take
corrective action immediately!
Warnings messages
Warning messages are non-critical, but must
be treated with some urgency. They may also E81053

be accompanied by an audible warning when


the message is displayed. The display will activate when a pre-determined
distance or time before service is reached.
Do not ignore these messages - Take When the starter switch is turned to position II,
corrective action as soon as possible. and the pre-determined value is reached, a
All warning messages are displayed distance countdown to the next service
for approximately four seconds, appears in the display. A minus sign preceding
after which this symbol is displayed the distance indicates that the service interval
in the main message centre, indicating that point has been exceeded by that distance.
there are messages to be reviewed. Review the After approximately five seconds, the display
messages by pressing the i button on the reverts to total distance travelled.
direction indicator lever until the list of
messages appear. Note: After the completion of each service, the
repairer will reset the distance display for the
The message centre will cycle through the countdown to the next service.
messages until the i button is pressed again.

117
L

Information displays
Gear selector display

E81054

Vehicles with automatic transmission: the


display shows the current gear selector
position and indicates when SPORT has been
selected.
Vehicles with manual transmission: the display
shows the gear engaged.

118
R

Climate control
AIR VENTS
Climate control

3
2

5 4

E81929

119
L

Climate control
1. Face level vents Third row seats vent
• Direct the air flow by moving the control
in the centre of the louvres. Rotate the
thumbwheel to open, or close the vents.
• To ensure best ventilation and minimum
noise, the vents should be fully open
when the air distribution control is set to
face level.
2. Driver’s lap vent
• Airflow can be directed to the driver’s lap
via an outlet located below the steering E81008
wheel. Control the airflow by adjusting
the louvres. A fixed louvre outlet on the left-hand side rear
3. Centre console rear vent controls quarter panel provides airflow to the third-row
seat lower area.
• Move the louvres to adjust the direction
and volume of airflow. Rotate the bezel Intake air
to direct the air flow. The ventilation system provides fresh,
• The temperature cannot be set by the conditioned and/or heated air to the interior of
rear occupants. the vehicle from the air intake grille in front of
4. Rear upper vent controls the windscreen.
• Press the ridged portion of the louvres Note: Always keep the air intake grille clear of
to open and adjust the volume of air. obstructions such as leaves, snow or ice.
• Rotate the louvres to direct the air flow. Particulate air filter
5. Rear pillar vent controls The ventilation system is fitted with a
• Direct the airflow by moving the control particulate air filter to remove most potentially
in the centre of the louvres. harmful particles such as pollen, industrial
fall-out and road dust from the air entering the
vehicle's interior.
Combined filter
Vehicles fitted with automatic temperature
control have a combined carbon and
particulate air filter.
The carbon layer reduces the level of odours
coming through the heater system from
outside.

120
R

Climate control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
1 2 3

7 6 5 4
4
E80976

1. Temperature control 5. Heated windscreen


2. Air distribution control 6. Economy mode
3. Blower control 7. Air recirculation control
4. Heated rear screen

The manual air conditioning system provides Note: The system will not achieve a
air at a variable temperature, direction and flow temperature differential from left to right of
with selectable air recirculation, economy more than 4°C (7°F).
mode and rear screen heating. To obtain maximum air conditioning, rotate the
The system may be fitted with windscreen temperature controls fully counterclockwise.
heating. This activates the air conditioning and air
Note: The indicator in a switch illuminates if recirculation, and sets the blower speed at
the feature is operating. maximum and the air distribution to face-level.
Note: Rotating the temperature controls fully
Operation of controls clockwise provides maximum heating to the
Temperature controls foot/screen vents.
Rotate the controls 1 to set the required When in stationary traffic, select P or N
temperature for the corresponding side of the (automatic transmission) to maximise air
passenger compartment. conditioning efficiency.
Temperatures within the range 16°C (60°F) to
28°C (83°F) can be set. The blue dot gives
maximum cooling and the red dot maximum
heating.

121
L

Climate control
Air distribution control General notes
Rotate to select the desired distribution setting: • For optimum operating efficiency, ensure
Windscreen and side window vents all air vents (including those in the rear of
E80977
the vehicle) are open.
Face level vents • For the automatic temperature control
system to function efficiently, all windows
Foot level vents and the sunroof should be closed, and the
E80979
air intake vents free from ice, snow, leaves
or other debris.
Position the control 2 between two symbols to • In very humid conditions, slight screen
obtain air flow from both sets of vents. misting may be experienced when the air
Blower control conditioning system is turned on. This is a
natural occurrence and will clear after a
Rotate the blower control 3 to adjust airflow
few seconds.
through the vents.
• The air conditioning compressor will not
Economy mode function unless the engine is running.
Press the button to select Economy • Surplus water produced by the
mode. An LED in this switch dehumidifying process is expelled from
illuminates. The air conditioning is the system via drain tubes beneath the
switched off. This reduces the load on the vehicle. This may result in a small pool of
engine, thereby improving fuel consumption. water forming on the road when the
Air recirculation vehicle is stationary.
Press the button once to activate air
recirculation. Press the button a
second time to deactivate air
recirculation.
Air recirculation prevents air entering from
outside, and recirculates the air inside the
vehicle. This prevents the entry of traffic
fumes.
Air recirculation also significantly influences
the dehumidifying and cooling performance of
the air-conditioning system.
Note: Prolonged recirculation at low ambient
temperatures may cause the windows to mist.

122
R

Climate control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
3 1 2 3

12
4 11
10

5 8 7 9
6
E80975

1. Auto mode 7. Off


2. Blower control 8. Economy mode
3. Temperature control 9. Rear environment
4. Air distribution control 10. Heated rear screen
5. Air recirculation control - manual 11. Heated windscreen
6. Air recirculation control - with pollution 12. Defrost mode
sensor

The air conditioning system features automatic Operation of controls


temperature and air distribution control and is
programmed to maintain optimum levels of Auto mode
comfort within the vehicle in all but the most Allowing the system to function automatically
severe climatic conditions. is preferable in most operating conditions.
The configuration of controls may vary • Press AUTO for fully automatic operation.
depending on the specification of your system. • Rotate the temperature controls 3 to select
The variants are shown as insets to the main the required temperature.
illustration. In Auto mode, air conditioning, air distribution,
The system may include windscreen heating. blower speeds and air recirculation are
Note: The indicator in a switch illuminates if adjusted automatically to maintain, a
the feature is operating. comfortable environment irrespective of
prevailing conditions.
The air distribution and blower controls can be
operated independently to override the
automatic setting.

123
L

Climate control
In this case, the appropriate indicator in the Air distribution control
AUTO switch extinguishes. The circular Press to select the desired distribution setting:
indicator represents the blower, the
Windscreen and side window vents
rectangular indicator represents air E80977

distribution.
Face level vents
Press AUTO again to re-establish automatic
operation. Foot level vents
E80979
Note: If the air distribution and blower controls
are operated independently, the system may
not be able to maintain the required More than one setting can be selected to
temperature settings. achieve the desired distribution.

Blower control Air recirculation - manual


Rotate the blower control 2 to adjust airflow Press the button once to activate air
through the vents. recirculation. Press the button a
second time to deactivate air
Temperature controls recirculation.
Rotate the controls 3 to set the required Air recirculation prevents air entering from
temperature for the corresponding side of the outside, and recirculates the air inside the
passenger compartment. vehicle. This prevents the entry of traffic
Temperatures within the range 16°C (60°F) to fumes.
28°C (83°F) can be set. The blue dot gives Air recirculation also significantly influences
maximum cooling and the red dot maximum the dehumidifying and cooling performance of
heating. the air-conditioning system.
Note: The system will not achieve a Note: Prolonged recirculation at low ambient
temperature differential from left to right of temperatures may cause the windows to mist.
more than 4°C (7°F).
To obtain maximum air conditioning, rotate the Air recirculation - with pollution sensor
temperature controls fully counterclockwise. Press the button once to activate air
recirculation. Press the button a
This mode automatically activates the air
second time to activate automatic
conditioning and air recirculation, and sets the
air recirculation. Press the button a third time
blower speed at maximum and the air
to switch the system off.
distribution to the face-level vents.
In Auto mode, air recirculation is regulated
Note: Rotating the temperature controls fully
automatically to enable the air-conditioning
clockwise provides maximum heating to the
system to achieve its optimum performance.
foot/screen vents.
Air recirculation prohibits the entry of air from
When in stationary traffic, select P or N in an
outside the vehicle, recirculating the air inside
automatic transmission vehicle to maximise air
the vehicle instead. This is useful to prevent the
conditioning efficiency.
entry of traffic fumes.

124
R

Climate control
Air recirculation also significantly influences Defrost mode
the dehumidifying and cooling performance of If the windscreen is misting or
the air-conditioning system. E80986 covered in ice, press button, the
Note: Prolonged recirculation at low ambient system will immediately direct its
temperatures may cause the windows to mist. output to achieve maximum screen clearing by:
• Setting the blower speed to an appropriate
Off
level.
Press to switch the system off; the
• Distributing air flow to the screen only.
indicator in the switch will illuminate
to show this condition. Pressing the • Deactivating air recirculation (in certain
button again returns the system to its previous circumstances).
mode. • The windscreen and rear screen heaters
will be switched on (or their timed
Economy mode operating cycle will recommence if they
Press the button to select economy are already switched on).
mode. An LED in this switch
Press the button a second time (or select AUTO
illuminates. The air conditioning is
or any air distribution control) to switch off the
switched off. This reduces the load on the
defrost mode. Heated screens will remain on
engine, thereby improving fuel consumption.
until their time-out period has expired.
Rear environment
General notes
The rear environment unit is located
• For optimum operating efficiency, ensure
E80983
behind the left-hand side rear
all air vents (including those in the rear of
quarter panel and provides heating
the vehicle) are open.
and air conditioning to the rear passengers. Do
not obstruct the louvres on the side of the • For the automatic temperature control
quarter panel. system to function efficiently, all windows
and the sunroof should be closed, and the
• Automatic: press the button once to
air intake vents free from ice, snow, leaves
control the rear heating and air
or other debris.
conditioning using the front controls. The
upper amber light will be illuminated. • In very humid conditions, slight screen
misting may be experienced when the air
• Manual: press the button a second time to
conditioning system is turned on. This is a
pass control to the rear passengers. The
natural occurrence and will clear after a
lower amber light will be illuminated.
few seconds.
• Off: press the button a third time to switch
• The air conditioning compressor will not
the rear heating and air conditioning off.
function unless the engine is running.
• Surplus water produced by the
dehumidifying process is expelled beneath
the vehicle. This may result in a small pool
of water forming when the vehicle is
stationary.

125
L

Climate control
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS
CONTROLS Note: The heated windscreen and rear screen
only operate while engine is running.
Heated windscreen
Press to operate. The screen heater
will operate for a timed period
before automatically switching off.
Heated rear screen
CAUTION
1 2 3 To avoid damage to the heating
elements, do not attach labels to the rear
screen. Also, do not scrape or use abrasive
materials to clean the inside of the rear screen.
Press to operate. The screen heater
will operate for a timed period
before automatically switching off

E81009 Exterior mirrors


The exterior mirrors have integral heating
1. Temperature control: turn the control elements which disperse ice or mist. These
clockwise (red dot) to increase the operate automatically when the starter switch
temperature of the incoming air. is in position II and are controlled according to
2. Distribution control: the external temperature and wiper status.
• turn the control fully counterclockwise,
to direct incoming air to the third row
seats vent
• turn the control fully clockwise to direct
air to the rear seat upper vents and the
rear pillar vents.
3. Blower control: turn the control clockwise,
to increase the blower speed.
Note: The panel is only active when the rear
environment button on the front control panel
is set to manual mode.

126
R

Climate control
AUXILIARY HEATER
CAUTION
WARNINGS Always close the roof when the vehicle is
If the fuel-burning heater has been used unattended.
recently, do not touch the unit’s
exhaust when working in the engine
compartment.
Turn the starter switch off, to ensure
that the fuel-burning heater is switched
off when refuelling the vehicle.
When the engine is started in very cold
weather, the auxiliary heater is automatically
switched on to provide extra heat to help warm
up the engine.
During this period, exhaust fumes from the
heater may be seen coming from under the
bonnet.

ELECTRIC SUNROOF E81042

WARNINGS The sunroof can be operated when the starter


Accidental closure of a sunroof on any switch is in positions I or II and for 40 seconds
part of the body, can result in serious after position 0 has been selected, provided
personal injury. that a front door is not opened.
Ensure that children are kept clear and • To open the sunroof to the tilted position,
that the sunroof is not obstructed when briefly press the rear of the switch. The
opening or closing. roof will move to its tilted position.
For their safety, when leaving children • To fully open the sunroof from the tilted
unattended in the vehicle always position, briefly press the rear of the
remove the key from the starter switch. switch again.
Ensure that all adult passengers are • To close the sunroof to the tilted position,
familiar with the controls and the briefly press the front of the switch.
potential dangers of operating an electrically • To fully close the sunroof, press and hold
operated sunroof. the front of the switch. Releasing the
Do not allow passengers to extend any switch before the roof is fully closed will
part of their bodies through the sunroof stop movement.
aperture while the vehicle is moving - injury Note: While the sunroof is moving, a further
from flying debris, branches of trees or other press of the switch will stop the movement.
obstructions could occur. Note: If the starter key is not in position II, the
switch has to be pressed and held to operate
the sunroof.

127
L

Climate control
Anti-trap mechanism
CAUTION
It is possible to override the anti-trap
mechanism when movement is
restricted by ice or dirt, by pressing and
holding the front of the switch whilst the roof
is closing.
If the sunroof encounters resistance while
closing, the operation is interrupted and the
roof opens slightly, to prevent the sunroof
trapping vulnerable parts of the body or other
obstructions..
This anti-trap feature does not apply when the
roof is being closed from the tilted position.
Sunroof calibration
Under some circumstances (i.e. if the battery is
disconnected), the sunroof position may need
to be recalibrated. The sunroof position is
recalibrated as follows:
1. With the battery connected, turn the starter
switch to position ll.
2. Press and hold the front of the switch for
20 seconds. The sunroof will start to
move. Continue to hold the switch until the
sunroof completes one full open and
closing cycle. When the sunroof stops
moving, release the switch.
The sunroof can then be operated as normal.
Note: Calibration will not function if the battery
voltage is low.

128
R

Convenience features
SUN VISORS INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Convenience features

AUTO

E80434

The sun visor can be pivoted downwards, or to


the side as required to reduce glare. E80432

The sun visor is fitted with illuminated mirrors. Rotate the dimmer control to vary the level of
Lifting the cover of the vanity mirror will switch instrument pack illumination.
on the lamp. Closing the cover switches off the
lamp.

SUN BLINDS

E80433

Pull the sunroof blind, against spring pressure,


across the sunroof aperture to deploy it. When
it is pressed against the edge of the aperture, it
will lock into place.
To open, push vertically on the textured part of
the blind handle. Allow the blind to return
under spring pressure.
The blinds retract into the panel between the
sunroofs.

129
L

Convenience features
CLOCK To adjust the hours, rotate the control
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
Setting the time - standard audio system decrease. Pressing the rotary control to accept
the hours setting moves the highlight on to the
Clock Cancel minutes setting.
Set Repeat the exercise for minutes and press the
rotary control to accept the value shown. The
highlight moves on to OK and a further press of
the rotary control accepts the settings.
Clock Cancel Set 12-24 hour display
Set

Clock Cancel
Set

Clock PM
Set 06 : 15 OK
Clock Set
12/24

Clock
Set AM 09 : 15 OK

Clock Set
12/24 24h r

Clock
Set AM 09 : 43 OK E80429

To set the clock display to 12 or 24 hour


E80428
format, enter the Clock Set menu by pressing
To access the Clock Set menu, press the MENU the MENU OK button. Turn the rotary control
OK button, turn the right-hand rotary control to until Clock Set is highlighted, and press the
scroll to the clock menu, then press the rotary control again to adjust the format. Rotate the
control to select Set. control to scroll between 12 and 24, then press
the control to select the required format.

130
R

Convenience features
Setting the time - premium audio system

09
Cancel
PTY Seek Time
FM Scan Set AM 09
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

32
News
Clock
1 2 3 4 5 6
Time
Set AM 09 32
1 2 3 4 5 6

12 24
E80431

Time
To adjust the hours, rotate the control
12/24 12 clockwise to increase, or counterclockwise to
1 2 3 4 5 6 decrease. Press the rotary control to accept the
value shown.
E80430
Once the hours have been set and accepted,
the minutes will be highlighted and are set in
Access the clock set menu by pressing the the same way. Having set both hours and
MENU OK button. Use the rotary control to minutes, the display will return to the main
scroll to Clock, then press the control to select. menu.
Rotate the control to scroll between 12 and 24,
then press the control to select the required
format.

131
L

Convenience features
CIGAR LIGHTER ASHTRAY
CAUTION
Do not use the ashtrays for disposing of
waste paper or other combustible items.
A fire may result.

E80426

Push the centre of the faceplate and it will


lower to reveal the lighter.
With the starter switch turned on, press the
lighter in to heat up. When it has reached the
correct temperature it will partially eject and
can then be withdrawn for use.
• Only hold the cigar lighter by the handle. E80423

• Do not plug accessories into the cigar Push the bottom edge of the ashtray cover to
lighter socket. Use the auxiliary power open (left inset).
sockets provided.
To remove the ashtray, open fully, then pull the
After use, push the lighter back in to the first ashtray forwards.
position and lift up the faceplate.

132
R

Convenience features
AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS Rear auxiliary power sockets
CAUTIONS
Never plug non-approved accessories
into a power socket - damage to the
vehicle's electrical systems could occur.
Always run the engine during prolonged
use of electrical accessories, otherwise
the battery may become discharged.
Note: Power sockets can be used to power
approved accessories that use a maximum of
E80421
180 Watts.
Raise cover to access the auxiliary power
Front auxiliary power socket
socket in the rear of the centre console.

1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0

E80422

On 7-seat vehicles, a third power socket is


E80420
fitted in the left-hand side trim in the loadspace
Pull down the hinged cover to access the area.
socket. When released, the cover will return to
its closed position.

133
L

Convenience features
CUP HOLDERS

1
5 5
2 2

2
3 3

5 5

4 4 3

5 4

E80419

1. Front passenger's cup holder Note: The inner cores of the cup holders can be
2. Front seat cup holders removed for cleaning or to make a holder for a
larger drinks container.
3. Second-row seats cup holders
4. Rear compartment cup holders
5. Door bottle holders

134
R

Convenience features
CENTRE CONSOLE
WARNINGS
The driver should not drink or use the
cup holder while driving.
If the cup holder is retractable, it should
be kept closed when not in use.
Do not carry open-top drink containers
in the cup/bottle holders while the
vehicle is in motion; a spilled hot drink could
cause personal injury. Spilled drinks can also
damage upholstery, carpeting and electrical
components. E80541

Use only for soft containers. Do not use Lift the catch at the front of the lid to access the
to hold cups or bottles made of glass, storage area.
china or hard plastic, as these may cause
injury in the event of an accident or emergency Card holder
manoeuvre. Unopened, sealed containers
(cans of drink, for example) are hard objects
and may also cause injury.

E80542

On the front inside face of the centre console is


a feature to hold a credit/toll card.
CD storage
A rubber mat in the bottom of the centre
console is designed to hold CD cases and is
removable for cleaning.

135
L

Convenience features
COOL BOX The cool box is most effective when filled with
When fitted, the cool box replaces the centre cold or pre-chilled items.
console storage area. The cool box must be cleaned regularly to
remove any condensation or contamination
that could lead to odours.
Note: The cool box will continue to operate for
a short period after the starter switch is turned
to position 0.

E80549

The cool box is switched on/off using the


switch on the inside front lip of the cool box.
This switch has a built-in indicator which will
illuminate to show that the cool box is
operating. There is a short delay (one or two
seconds) between pressing the switch, and
illumination of the indicator. During this period
the control system checks the battery voltage.
If the indicator does not illuminate when the
cool box is switched on, or it goes out while the
cool box is operating, this means that the
battery voltage is low and the cool box has
switched itself off. This will only happen when
the engine is not running.
If the engine is started, the indicator will
illuminate and the cool box will continue to
operate.
The cool box should be left switched off when
it is not needed to protect the vehicle's battery.
The tray on top of the cool box should always
be in place to ensure maximum cooling
performance. This tray can be inverted to allow
for the storage of taller bottles while still
maintaining the sealing.
The tray can be clipped onto the inside of the
main lid when not required.

136
R

Convenience features
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

1
2

4 4

4 3

E80534

1. Glovebox
WARNING
2. Lower glovebox
Do not wedge the lids of the rear
3. Centre console storage bins open as this may restrict
4. Rear storage bins the deployment of the rear airbags.

137
L

Convenience features
MEMORY FUNCTION 5. Memory Stored will be displayed on the
message centre to confirm the action. A
WARNING single chime will sound to confirm.
Before activating the seat memory,
Recalling a stored seat position
ensure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions Press the pre-set button associated with the
and that all occupants are clear of moving desired driving position. The seat and mirrors
parts. will move to the position stored on that pre-set.
A confirmation message will display in the
2 1 message centre and a double chime will sound
when adjustments are complete.
Note: To stop seat movement at any time,
press any seat adjustment control.
Lazy entry
When this feature is enabled, the vehicle stores
the seating and mirror positions for each
remote control. Next time the vehicle is
E80425
3 unlocked using a remote control, the position
of the seat and mirrors will adjust to the last
1. Memory store button. used position.
2. Memory pre-set buttons. This feature can be disabled or enabled in the
3. Seat adjustment controls. See ELECTRIC Settings option accessed via the trip computer.
SEATS (page 57). See TRIP COMPUTER (page 115).
Up to three different driver seat and exterior
mirror positions can be stored in the memory,
one for each of three possible remote controls.
Your preferred setting for the reverse mirror
dipping feature can also be stored. See
EXTERIOR MIRRORS (page 111).
Setting a memory pre-set
1. Insert the starter key and turn it to position
I or II.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired position.
3. Press the memory store button 1 to
activate the memory function.
4. Within five seconds, press the desired
pre-set button 2.

138
R

Starting the engine


GENERAL INFORMATION STARTER SWITCH
Starting the engine

WARNING
Never start or leave the engine running
in an unventilated building - exhaust
gases are poisonous.

CAUTION
Do not run the diesel engine above idle
speed until the oil pressure warning light
extinguishes. This will ensure that the engine
and turbo-charger bearings are properly E80362

lubricated before being run at speed.


The starter switch uses the following sequence
Similarly, always allow the engine to idle for 10 of key positions to operate the steering lock,
seconds before switching off. electrical circuits and starter motor.
Continued use of the starter will not only Position 0
discharge the battery, but may cause
• Steering locked.
damage to the starter motor.
• Some lighting circuits are operational,
Before starting the engine and driving including sidelamps and hazard warning
1. Check that the electric parking brake is lamps.
applied and that the gear selector is in the • With the driver’s door open, seat memory
P (Park) or N (Neutral) position (automatic facility operational.
transmission vehicles) or Neutral (manual
transmission vehicles). Position I
2. Switch off all non-essential electrical • Steering unlocked.
equipment. • Clock, audio system and cigar lighter can
3. Insert the starter key and turn the switch to now be operated.
position II. For diesel models, wait until the • Wipers/washers are operational.
glow plug warning light extinguishes. Position II
4. Turn the key to position III and • All instruments, warning indicators and
immediately release it. The starter will electrical circuits are operational.
automatically switch off when the engine
starts. Do not press the accelerator pedal Position III
while starting. • The starting sequence is initiated. Note
that operation of position I electrical
In temperate climates do not operate the
functions will be interrupted during engine
starter for longer than 10 seconds. If the
cranking.
engine fails to start, switch off and wait 10
seconds before re-using the starter. Note: On vehicles with automatic
transmission, gear selector position P or N
Note: The battery charging and oil pressure
must be selected before the engine can be
warning lights should extinguish as soon as
started.
the engine is running.

139
L

Starting the engine


STEERING WHEEL LOCK Cold climates
In very cold climates the oil pressure warning
WARNING light may take several seconds to extinguish.
It is impossible to steer the vehicle Similarly, engine cranking times will also
when the steering lock is engaged. Do increase. At -25°C (-13°F) the starter motor
not remove the key, or turn it to position 0, may require continuous operation for as long
while the vehicle is in motion. as 30 seconds before the engine will start. For
this reason, ensure that all non-essential
electrical equipment is switched off to
maximise the available battery power for
starting.
After starting
On automatic transmission vehicles ensure
that the electric parking brake and foot brake
are firmly applied and the accelerator pedal is
not depressed while moving the gear selector
E80361
lever from N or P. An interlock will prevent this
movement if the footbrake is not applied.
To unlock the steering column
Warming-up
Insert the key into the starter switch and rotate
In the interests of fuel economy and of
key to position I. If the key will not rotate, turn
reducing engine wear, it is advisable to drive
the steering wheel left or right while rotating
the vehicle straight away, remembering that
the key.
harsh acceleration or labouring the engine
To lock the steering column before normal operating temperature has been
Remove the key from the starter switch and reached can damage the engine.
turn the steering wheel until the lock engages. Driving
Seek qualified assistance, if your vehicle is
STARTING A PETROL ENGINE burning excessive oil (blue smoke from the
• Do not continue to operate the starter after exhaust), as this will progressively reduce
a few failed attempts (unburnt fuel may be catalyst efficiency.
drawn into the exhaust system, thereby
poisoning the catalyst), seek qualified
assistance.
• When starting the engine, Do not drive if a
misfire is suspected and do not attempt to
clear a misfire by pressing the accelerator,
seek qualified assistance.

140
R

Starting the engine


STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE Warming-up
• Do not continue to operate the starter after In the interests of fuel economy and of
a few failed attempts (unburnt fuel may be reducing engine wear, it is advisable to drive
drawn into the exhaust system, thereby the vehicle straight away, remembering that
poisoning the catalyst), seek qualified harsh acceleration or labouring the engine
assistance. before normal operating temperature has been
• When starting the engine, do not drive if a reached can damage the engine.
misfire is suspected and do not attempt to Driving
clear a misfire by pressing the accelerator,
Seek qualified assistance, if your vehicle is
seek qualified assistance.
burning excessive oil (blue smoke from the
The glow plug warning indicator in exhaust), as this will progressively reduce
the instrument pack illuminates catalyst efficiency.
when the starter switch is turned to
position II. When the engine is cold, wait for
the light to extinguish before starting. If the
engine is warm, the light will not illuminate.
Cold climates
In very cold climates the oil pressure warning
light may take several seconds to extinguish.
Similarly, engine cranking times will also
increase. At -25°C (-13°F) the starter motor
may require continuous operation for as long
as 30 seconds before the engine will start. For
this reason, ensure that all non-essential
electrical equipment is switched off to
maximise the available battery power for
starting.
After starting
On automatic transmission vehicles ensure
that the electric parking brake and foot brake
are firmly applied and the accelerator pedal is
not depressed while moving the gear selector
lever from N or P. An interlock will prevent this
movement if the footbrake is not applied.

141
L

Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION Starting
Transmission

The engine can only be started with the selector


CAUTION lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions.
Do not select reverse gear unless the • Always apply the electric parking brake and
vehicle is stationary. This may cause foot brake before starting the engine.
damage to the transmission.
• Keep the brakes applied while moving the
selector lever into a drive position (the
selector lever cannot be moved from P or
N unless the foot brake is applied).
Note: If pressure is applied to the selector lever
before the footbrake is applied any gear
selected may not be available irrespective of
the lever position. In this situation, remove
pressure from the selector lever, ensure that
the foot brake is applied, and select the
required gear.

E80496

When the gearbox is in neutral, the gear lever


is spring-loaded to lie naturally between 3 and
4 gear positions.
A spring loaded inhibitor prevents the
accidental selection of reverse gear. To select
reverse gear, use a knock-over action to
overcome the inhibitor.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, especially with the keys in the
starter switch.
Always select P and turn the starter
E80498
switch to position O before leaving the
vehicle. • The selector release button must be
pressed while selecting P and R and also to
enable the lever to be moved between the
P and R positions.

142
R

Transmission
• Do not rev the engine or allow it to run
above normal idle speed while selecting D
or R , or while the vehicle is stationary with
any gear selected.
• Always keep the brakes applied until you
are ready to move off - remember, once a
drive gear has been selected, an automatic
vehicle will tend to creep forward (or P
backward if reverse is selected).
• Do not allow the vehicle to remain P
P

stationary for any length of time with a R R


drive gear selected and the engine running ++ N
M
D N
(always select N if the engine is to idle for -
S

a prolonged period). D
Note: The gear selector lever must be in the P
E80497
position before the starter key can be removed.
An illuminated indicator on the selector panel
Selector lever positions
and a number or letter on the gear selector
CAUTIONS display in the instrument pack, identify the
Do not select P or R if the vehicle is selected gear position.
moving. This may cause damage to the P - Park
transmission. This position locks the transmission and
Do not select a forward drive gear when should be selected before switching the engine
the vehicle is moving backwards. off. To avoid transmission damage, ensure that
Do not select reverse gear when the the vehicle is completely stationary, with the
vehicle is moving forwards. parking brake applied, before selecting P.
The selector release button must be pressed
before moving the selector lever into P.
With the starter key in position II, press the
selector release button and the footbrake to
move the selector lever out of P.
Note: The selector lever cannot be moved out
of P unless the starter key is in position II.
R - Reverse
Before selecting R, ensure that the vehicle is
stationary, with the brakes applied. The
selector release button must be pressed before
moving the selector lever into Reverse
position.

143
L

Transmission
N - Neutral Sport mode
Select N when the vehicle is stationary and the In Sport mode, full automatic progression
engine is required to idle for a brief period (at through the gear ratios is retained and the
traffic lights, for example). In N, the transmission will stay in the lower gears for
transmission is not locked, so the electric longer. This improves mid-range performance
parking brake must be applied. with downshifts occurring more readily.
If the vehicle remains stationary, the selector
lever becomes locked in Neutral and it is then
necessary to depress the brake pedal in order
to release the selector lever.
Press the selector release button and foot
brake to move from N to R or D.
D - Drive
Before selecting drive ensure that the brakes
are applied. Select D for all normal driving; full P
P

automatic gear changing occurs on all six M R


forward gears, according to road speed and S ++ N

accelerator position.
M
S D
-

Kick-down in automatic mode


To provide rapid acceleration for overtaking, E80499
push the accelerator pedal to the full extent of
its travel (this is known as kick-down), a click To select Sport mode, move the gear lever
will be felt through the accelerator pedal. Up to from the D position towards the left hand side
a certain speed, this will cause an immediate of the vehicle. The word SPORT will appear in
downshift to the lowest appropriate gear, the gear selector display in the instrument pack
followed by rapid acceleration. Once the pedal (for approximately six seconds) and the LED in
is relaxed, normal gear change speeds will the selector display to the side of the selector
resume (dependent upon road speed and lever illuminates.
accelerator pedal position). Sport mode can be deselected at any time, by
Note: Moderate accelerator pressure may also returning the lever to the D position.
result in a downshift in the transmission, To return to Sport mode after CommandShift
depending on vehicle speed. has been selected move the selector into the D
position. Then move it back into Sport mode.
Note: On vehicles fitted with the terrain
response system, Sport mode is only available
when the Terrain Response General program is
selected.

144
R

Transmission
CommandShift™ 4. To deselect CommandShift, simply move
CommandShift gear selection can be used as the selector lever sideways, back to the D
an alternative to fully automatic transmission position. Automatic gear changing will
and is particularly effective when rapid then resume.
acceleration or engine braking are required. Note: In CommandShift, kick-down is still
available for increased acceleration.
Note: If a Terrain Response special program is
active, the automatic transmission will go
straight into CommandShift when the lever is
moved to the Sport/CommandShift position.
Using CommandShift in High range
If CommandShift is selected in high range, gear
1 must be selected to move off from stationary.
P
P Normal sequential gear changing can be
M utilised once the vehicle is moving.
R
S ++ N
Using CommandShift in Low range
M
S D
- If CommandShift is selected in low range, the
vehicle can move off from stationary in gears 1,
2 or 3 - this is particularly useful to improve
E80500
traction when driving off-road.
1. With D selected, move the gear selector
Kick-down in CommandShift
from the D position towards the left-hand
side of the vehicle. When in CommandShift, kick-down overrides
the manual gear selection, to provide increased
2. The transmission then automatically acceleration.
selects the ratio most appropriate to the
vehicle's road speed and accelerator In high range, with CommandShift selected,
depression. Move the selector forward (+) kick-down will cause a downshift to the lowest
or backward (-) and release will manually gear possible for the current speed.
select a higher or lower gear (when Electronically selected automatic
available). The message TRANSMISSION models
COMMANDSHIFT SELECTED appears in
In fully automatic mode or Sport mode (not
the main message centre.
available in CommandShift), the transmission
3. A single forward (+) movement and release control system will electronically adjust gear
of the selector lever will change the change points to suit a variety of driving
transmission to a higher gear, while conditions.
rearward (-) movement and release of the
lever will change down to a lower gear. The
selected gear will be indicated in the digital
display in the instrument pack (see inset).

145
L

Transmission
Hill ascent, trailer and high altitude mode Transmission warning indicators and
A gear change pattern is selected to retain messages
lower gears for longer. This is to counter If a fault occurs within the transmission,
momentum lost by more frequent gear depending on the vehicle specification, either a
changing during hill ascents or towing. This lamp will illuminate in the instrument pack or a
gear change pattern is also selected at high message will be displayed in the main message
altitudes to combat reduced engine torque. centre.
Hill descent mode The transmission warning lamp
When in manual CommandShift™ mode, with illuminates amber when the
the optimum gear for engine braking selected, operation of the transmission is
the selector lever can then be moved across to limited. Seek qualified assistance as soon as
the D position. The transmission will retain the possible.
previously selected manual gear until the The transmission warning lamp illuminates red
descent is completed, then the transmission when the transmission is unable to function
will automatically change to D . properly. Stop as soon as safety permits and
turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle with the
High coolant temperature mode
starter switch turned off for five minutes and
In high ambient temperatures during extreme then turn the starter switch back on. If the red
load conditions, it is possible for the engine light is still on, do not use the vehicle.
and the gearbox to overheat. The transmission
Note: This warning indicator is not fitted to
will select a gear change pattern designed to
vehicles with a message centre.
aid the cooling process.
The transmission temperature
Note: On vehicles fitted with the Terrain
warning lamp Illuminates red when
Response system, automatic transmission
the transmission oil temperature
change points/patterns will change depending
reaches a pre-determined limit. Stop the
on which mode has been selected.
vehicle where safety permits and switch off the
Limp-home mode engine. Allow the transmission to cool for one
Should the transmission develop a fault, F is hour before continuing.
displayed in the gear position display and only Note: This warning indicator is not fitted to
limited gears are available. Seek immediate vehicles with a message centre.
assistance from your Land Rover Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.

146
R

Transmission
Messages
The following table lists the messages relating
to automatic transmission that could appear in
the message centre. Market criteria mean that
some messages will not apply to your vehicle
and will therefore not appear.
Message Meaning What to do?
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance
FAULT transmission has a fault. immediately.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that an Seek qualified assistance
FAULT AND automatic transmission fault immediately.
OVERHEAT has occurred and the
temperature is too high.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance
FAULT LIMITED transmission has a fault and immediately.
GEARS AVAILABLE performance may be affected.

147
L

Transmission
TRANSFER GEARBOX Range changing
The recommended method of changing range
CAUTION is with the vehicle stationary. For vehicles
Do not use auxiliary equipment, such as equipped with a message centre, the messages
roller generators, that are driven by only displayed will assist the experienced driver in
one or two wheels of the vehicle, as they will carrying out a range change on-the-move.
cause failure of the transfer gearbox.
Range change indicators
When the vehicle is in Hi, the Hi range indicator
lamp at the switch is illuminated.
When the vehicle is in Lo, the green
warning indicator in the instrument
pack and the Lo range indicator
lamp at the switch are illuminated.

E80493

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically


controlled transfer gearbox allowing the driver
to select high or low range driving gears.
HIGH range (Hi)
Hi should be used for all normal road driving
and also for off-road driving across dry, level
terrain.
LOW range (Lo)
Lo should only be used in situations where low
speed manoeuvring is necessary, such as
reversing a trailer or negotiating a
boulder-strewn river bed, or when moving off E80494
while heavily loaded or towing. On vehicles
with manual transmission, this will prevent While a Hi to Lo change is in progress, the Lo
prolonged slipping of the clutch. range indicator lamps at the switch and
Also use Lo for more extreme off-road instrument pack display will flash.
conditions, such as steep ascents and When the range change is complete, the high
descents. Do not attempt to use the Lo for range indicator lamp at the switch
normal road driving. extinguishes. The Lo range indicator lamps at
both the switch and the instrument pack
display will illuminate constantly.

148
R

Transmission
A warning chime will sound, and LOW RANGE Stationary range changing
ENGAGED is displayed in the message centre With the vehicle stationary and the engine
for a few seconds. running select the neutral position.
Move the transfer gear switch towards the
range required (Hi or Lo) and then release.
When the switch is released, it returns to the
default position. Range change status will be
confirmed after a couple of seconds by the
instrument pack and message centre at which
point any manual gear can be selected
normally using the clutch.
Range changing on the move
Note: If the vehicle speed is too high when a
range change is requested, a warning chime
sounds and SPEED TOO HIGH FOR RANGE
CHANGE appears in the message centre.
Note: If the vehicle speed is too high for a
range change and the shift lever is not in
neutral, there will be no message or warning
E80495 chime.

While a Lo to Hi range change is in progress, Automatic Transmission - High to Low


the high range indicator lamp at the switch and If N is not selected before using the transfer
the Lo range indicator in the instrument pack gear switch, the message SELECT NEUTRAL
display will flash. FOR RANGE CHANGE is displayed and a
When the range change is complete, the Lo warning chime sounds.
range indicator lamp at the switch and in the Note: Do not attempt to make moving range
instrument pack will extinguish. The Hi range changes at speeds of 3 km/h (2 mph) or less.
indicator lamp at the switch will illuminate With the vehicle slowing down and travelling
constantly. no faster than 40 km/h (24 mph), select N.
A warning chime will sound, and HIGH RANGE Pull the transfer gear switch fully rearwards to
ENGAGED is displayed in the message centre the Lo position and release it.
for a few seconds.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the Stationary method.
When the range change is confirmed by the
indicators, select D.
An interlock prevents selection of a drive gear
until the range change is complete.

149
L

Transmission
Manual transmission - High to Low Transmission warning indicators and
If neutral is not selected before using the messages
transfer gear switch, the message SELECT If a fault occurs within the transmission,
NEUTRAL FOR RANGE CHANGE is displayed depending on the vehicle specification, either a
and a warning chime sounds. lamp will illuminate in the instrument pack or a
Note: Do not attempt to make moving range message will be displayed in the main message
changes at speeds of 3 km/h (2 mph) or less. centre.
With the vehicle slowing down and travelling The transmission warning lamp
no faster than 20 km/h (12 mph), depress the illuminates amber when the
clutch and select neutral. operation of the transmission is
Pull the transfer gear switch fully rearwards to limited. Seek qualified assistance as soon as
the Lo position and release it. possible.
Indication of the range change status is the The transmission warning lamp illuminates red
same as for the Stationary method. when the transmission is unable to function
properly. Stop as soon as safety permits and
When the range change is confirmed by the turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle with the
indicators, select the most appropriate manual starter switch turned off for five minutes and
gear for the vehicle speed. then turn the starter switch back on. If the red
if a gear is selected before the range change is light is still on, do not use the vehicle.
complete, the change will cancel and may leave Note: This warning indicator is not fitted to
the transfer box in neutral. An audible warning vehicles with a message centre.
will be given if this happens.
The transmission temperature
A failed range change condition produces loss warning lamp Illuminates red when
of drive, and attempting to move the vehicle in the transmission oil temperature
this state is not possible. After a failed range reaches a pre-determined limit. Stop the
change, it will be necessary to reselect neutral vehicle where safety permits and switch off the
in the main gearbox and request the range engine. Allow the transmission to cool for one
change again in the normal way. hour before continuing.
Changing from Low to High Note: This warning indicator is not fitted to
With the vehicle travelling no faster than vehicles with a message centre.
60 km/h (38 mph), select N or neutral. Press
the front of the transfer gear switch to the Hi
position and release it.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the stationary method.
Now select D or the most appropriate manual
gear for the vehicle speed.

150
R

Transmission
Messages
The following table lists the messages relating
to transfer box that could appear in the
message centre. Market criteria mean that
some messages will not apply to your vehicle
and will therefore not appear.
Message Meaning What to do?
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
FAULT occurred with the electronic safe to do so.
STOP SAFELY rear differential.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek
FAULT occurred with the transfer box qualified assistance
TRACTION REDUCED control system. immediately.
Off-road performance will be
reduced.
TRANSMISSION Rear differential temperature Reduce speed and seek
OVERHEAT has reached or is approaching qualified assistance
SLOW DOWN the overheat threshold. immediately.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek
RANGE CHANGE occurred which prevents the qualified assistance
NOT AVAILABLE transfer box from changing immediately.
range.
TRANSMISSION Transfer box control module Reduce speed and seek
TRACTION fault. qualified assistance
REDUCED immediately.
SELECT NEUTRAL Alerts driver that range change Select neutral.
FOR RANGE will not occur until neutral is
CHANGE selected on the transmission.
SPEED TOO HIGH Driver has requested range Reduce speed to 40 km/h
FOR RANGE change when vehicle speed is (25mph) on automatic
CHANGE too high. transmission or 20 km/h (12
mph) on manual transmission.

151
L

Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If the indicator illuminates red while the vehicle
Brakes

is being driven, suspect low brake fluid level or


Foot brake a fault with the Electronic Brake Distribution
(EBD) system. Stop the vehicle gently, as soon
WARNINGS
as safety permits and check and top up brake
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal fluid if necessary. If the indicator remains
while travelling as this may overheat illuminated, seek qualified assistance before
the brakes, reduce their efficiency and cause continuing.
excessive wear.
Never allow the vehicle to freewheel Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)
with the engine turned off as full If rapid full brake application is made,
braking assistance will not be available. Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) automatically
boosts the braking force to the maximum and
If the red brake warning indicator
helps to stop the vehicle. Also, if the driver
illuminates while the vehicle is in
brakes more slowly, but with sufficient brake
motion, bring the vehicle to a halt as quickly as
pressure to activate Anti-lock Braking System
traffic conditions and safety allow and seek
(ABS) on both front wheels, the system
qualified assistance before continuing.
automatically increases the braking force so
Never place non-approved floor that all four wheels are in ABS control,
matting or any other obstructions optimising the performance of the ABS system.
under the brake pedal. This restricts pedal
travel and braking efficiency. If the brake pedal is released, EBD will cease
operation.
The brake system warning indicator
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
illuminates amber and red briefly in
illumination of the amber brake warning
the instrument pack as a bulb check
indicator.
when the starter switch is turned to position II,
and monitors five separate brake functions. Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD)
• Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) - amber. Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD), balances
• Brake pad wear - amber. braking forces between front and rear axles to
• Electric Parking Brake (EPB) - amber. maintain maximum braking efficiency.
• Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD) - red. For example, under light loads EBD applies less
• Brake fluid level - red. effort to the rear brakes to maintain vehicle
stability; conversely allowing full braking effort
If the indicator remains amber after starting, or to the rear wheels when the vehicle is towing or
illuminates whilst driving, suspect a fault with is heavily laden.
the Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) system or
worn brake pads. Drive with care and seek A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
qualified assistance urgently. illumination of the red brake warning indicator.

152
R

Brakes
Servo assistance Brake pads
The braking system is servo assisted, but only Brake pads require a period of bedding in. For
when the engine is running. Without this the first 800 km (500 miles), you should avoid
assistance greater braking effort is necessary situations where heavy braking is required.
to safely control the vehicle, resulting in longer
Wet conditions
stopping distances. Always observe the
following precautions: Driving through water or even very heavy rain
may adversely affect braking efficiency. Always
• Always take particular care when being
dry the braking surfaces by intermittent light
towed with the engine turned off.
application of the brakes.
• If the engine should stop for any reason
while the vehicle is in motion, bring the Messages
vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic The following table lists the messages relating
conditions safely allow, and do not pump to brakes that could appear in the message
the brake pedal as the braking system may centre. Market criteria mean that some
lose any remaining assistance available. messages will not apply to your vehicle and will
therefore not appear.

Message Meaning What to do?


CHECK Brake fluid in reservoir below Seek qualified assistance
BRAKE FLUID recommended level. immediately.
CHECK Brake pads worn beyond the Seek qualified assistance
BRAKE PADS service limit. immediately.
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been Follow the instructions to
AND PARKBRAKE detected without brake pedal achieve a manual release.
SWITCH contact.
TO RELEASE
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been Follow the instructions to
OR CLUTCH detected without brake or achieve a manual release.
AND PARKBRAKE clutch pedal contact.
SWITCH
TO RELEASE

153
L

Brakes
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS • Never place additional floor matting or any
other obstruction under the brake pedal.
CAUTIONS This restricts pedal travel and may impair
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) cannot brake efficiency.
overcome the physical limitations of The ABS warning indicator
braking distance, or the danger of illuminates amber in the instrument
aquaplaning, i.e. where a layer of water pack as a bulb check when the
prevents adequate contact between the tyres starter switch is turned to position II. If the ABS
and the road surface. warning indicator remains on or illuminates
The fact that a vehicle is fitted with ABS whilst driving, a fault with the ABS system is
must never tempt the driver into taking indicated. Drive with care, avoiding heavy
risks that could affect safety. In all cases, it brake application, and seek qualified assistance
remains the driver's responsibility to drive urgently.
within normal safety margins, having due
consideration for prevailing weather and traffic
Cornering Brake Control (CBC)
conditions. Cornering Brake Control (CBC) is an advanced
form of ABS, which maintains vehicle stability
The driver should always take account
and steering control during braking whilst
of the surface to be travelled over and
cornering or changing lanes at speed.
the fact that brake pedal reactions will be
different to those experienced on a non-ABS Off-road driving
vehicle. Anti-lock braking will operate in off-road
If the wheels begin to lock under braking, ABS driving conditions, but on certain surfaces
will automatically come into operation to allow reliance on the system is unwise. ABS cannot
efficient braking without wheels locking. This compensate for driver error or inexperience on
will be recognisable by a rapid pulsation felt difficult off-road surfaces.
through the brake pedal. Note: On soft, deep surfaces such as powdery
No matter how hard you brake, dependent snow, sand or gravel, and on rough ground,
upon road conditions, you should be able to the ABS may require a greater braking distance
continue steering the vehicle as normal. than a brake system without ABS. The natural
In an emergency situation, ABS functions most action of locked wheels on soft surfaces builds
effectively when full braking effort is applied a wedge of surface material in front of the
even when the road surface is slippery. The wheels which assists them to stop.
ABS system constantly monitors the speed of Note: If the vehicle is stopped on a very steep
each wheel and varies the brake pressure to slope where little traction is available, it may
each, according to the available grip. slide with the wheels locked as there is no
• Do not pump the brake pedal at any time; wheel rotation signal for the ABS. Briefly
this will interrupt operation of the system release the brakes to permit some wheel
and may increase the stopping distance. movement, then re-apply the brakes to allow
ABS to gain control.

154
R

Brakes
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) If the lever is operated while the vehicle is
travelling at less than 3 km/h (2 mph), the
WARNING vehicle will be brought to a stop abruptly. The
Do not rely on the Electric Parking stop lamps will not illuminate.
Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle
Applying the electric parking brake
stationary if the brake system warning
automatically
indicator is illuminated or the EPB warning
indicator is flashing. Seek qualified assistance On manual transmission vehicles the electric
urgently. parking brake will be applied automatically
when the starter key is removed. This operation
Note: If the vehicle is used in severe off-road must only be carried out when the vehicle is
conditions such as wading, deep mud, etc., stationary.
additional maintenance and adjustment of the
This feature can be inhibited by turning the
parking brake will be required. Consult your
starter switch on and off, then pressing down
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
on the lever while removing the starter key.
Applying the electric parking brake
Dynamic operation
CAUTION
Driving the vehicle with the electric
parking brake applied or repeated use of
the parking brake to decelerate the vehicle may
cause serious damage to the brake system.
In an emergency, the electric parking brake can
be applied dynamically, i.e. with the vehicle
1 2 travelling at more than 3 km/h (2 mph). Pulling
up on the lever and holding it up gives a
gradual reduction in speed. The brake warning
indicator will illuminate accompanied by a
harsh sound and CAUTION PARKBRAKE
APPLIED appears in the message centre. The
E81356
stop lamps will illuminate.
Releasing or depressing the lever will cancel
1 Right-hand drive vehicles the electric parking brake application.
2 Left-hand drive vehicles
With the vehicle stationary, pull up the lever
(arrowed) and release it. The lever will return to
the neutral position and the red EPB warning
indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate.

155
L

Brakes
Releasing the electric parking brake In the event of a failure, the message
PARKBRAKE FAULT. AUTO RELEASE NOT
CAUTIONS FUNCTIONAL will be displayed in the message
The electric parking brake operates on centre.
the rear wheels of the vehicle and hence
Electric parking brake automatic release -
secure parking of the vehicle is dependent on
automatic transmission models
being on a hard and stable surface.
If the vehicle is stationary with the electric
Do not rely on the electric parking brake
parking brake applied and D or R selected,
to operate effectively if the wheels have
press the accelerator and drive away. The
been immersed in mud and water.
parking brake will release automatically.
To disengage the electric parking brake, the
To delay automatic release, hold the electric
starter switch must be in position II. Apply
parking brake lever in the applied position, and
pressure to the foot brake on automatic
release at the desired point.
transmission vehicles, (clutch pedal in vehicles
with a manual transmission) while pressing The parking brake system gradually reduces
down on the parking brake lever. the system load (depending on gradient), to
assist a smooth drive away. If the reduction in
Electric parking brake automatic release - system load causes the vehicle to move after a
manual tranmission models valid gear is selected, full load will be
If the vehicle is stationary with the electric automatically re-applied to the electric parking
parking brake applied, press the accelerator brake.
and release the clutch to drive away. The To override the load reducing feature of the
parking brake will release automatically. electric parking brake, apply the parking brake
Automatic release will operate in first, second after selecting a gear.
and reverse in high range and first, second, In the event of a failure, the message
third and reverse in low range PARKBRAKE FAULT. AUTO RELEASE NOT
To delay automatic release, hold the electric FUNCTIONAL will be displayed in the message
parking brake lever in the applied position, and centre.
release at the desired point. At the start of a journey, electric parking brake
The parking brake system gradually reduces release times may be extended when changing
the system load (depending on gradient), to from P or N. This is to allow for increased gear
assist a smooth drive away. If the reduction in engagement times.
system load causes the vehicle to move after a
valid gear is selected, full load will be
automatically re-applied to the electric parking
brake.
To override the load reducing feature of the
electric parking brake, apply the parking brake
after selecting a gear.

156
R

Brakes
EPB warning indicators
The EPB warning indicator illuminates in the
instrument pack for three seconds as a bulb
check when the starter switch is turned to
position II.
If the system detects a fault with the
electric parking brake, the amber
brake system warning indicator will
illuminate and the message PARKBRAKE
FAULT will appear in the message centre.
If the system detects a fault while
EPB is operated, the red warning
indicator will flash and the message
PARKBRAKE FAULT. SYSTEM NOT
FUNCTIONAL will appear in the message
centre.
Note: The red indicator will continue to be
illuminated for at least ten seconds after the
starter switch has been turned off.
When parking a vehicle with an EPB fault,
ensure that it is parked on a level surface and is
secured stationary without reliance on the EPB.
Releasing the electric parking brake in an
emergency
E81357
WARNINGS
To prevent the vehicle moving, chocks 1. Using a suitable lever, remove the
must be placed on both sides of one of following:
the wheels or the foot brake must be applied • left-hand drive vehicles, the coin tray on
before releasing the cable. the opposite side of the gear shift lever
Emergency release of the electric from the EPB lever.
parking brake takes considerable • right-hand drive vehicles, the cover
physical effort. If the tools slip, break or are behind the EPB lever.
used incorrectly a serious injury may occur. 2. Attach the jack handle to the cable loop
Whenever possible, this operation should be (arrowed) and insert the screwdriver shaft
carried out by Roadside Assistance. through the jack handle.
If the electric parking brake is applied and the 3. Pull cable to release the EPB.
system develops a fault, the following The electric parking brake must be applied
procedure can be used to manually release the using the lever for the system to operate again.
parking brake.

157
L

Brakes
Messages
The following table lists the messages relating
to electric parking brake (EPB) that could
appear in the message centre. Market criteria
mean that some messages will not apply to
your vehicle and will therefore not appear.
Message Meaning What to do?
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been Follow the instructions to
AND PARKBRAKE detected without brake pedal achieve a manual release.
SWITCH contact.
TO RELEASE
PRESS FOOTBRAKE A switch release has been Follow the instructions to
OR CLUTCH detected without brake or achieve a manual release.
AND PARKBRAKE clutch pedal contact.
SWITCH
TO RELEASE
PARKBRAKE A garage technician has If not required, an ignition reset
BEDDING CYCLE requested a bedding cycle. will cancel the function.
ACTIVE
PARKBRAKE FAULT Electric parking brake Seek qualified assistance.
functions may not be available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Drive-away release function is Use manual release.
AUTO RELEASE not available.
NOT FUNCTIONAL
PARKBRAKE FAULT Supports the red warning Seek qualified assistance
SYSTEM indicator - electric parking immediately.
NOT FUNCTIONAL brake functions are not
available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Electric parking brake has lost Follow the instructions to park
TO HOLD VEHICLE vehicle speed information. the vehicle.
REMOVE KEY THEN
APPLY PARKBRAKE
PARKBRAKE OFF An emergency release Once original faults have been
LIFT SWITCH operation is detected. corrected, apply the switch to
TO APPLY reinstate electric park brake.
CAUTION Electric parking brake has been Only use this function in an
PARKBRAKE applied while the vehicle is emergency.
APPLIED moving.

158
R

Parking aid
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The driver is made aware of any obstruction
Parking aid

within range by an intermittent tone. As the


CAUTIONS vehicle moves closer to an obstruction, the
The front parking aid may emit tones if it frequency of the intermittent tone increases.
detects a frequency tone using the same The range of the front sensors, and the two
band as the sensors. sensors on the corner of the rear bumper is
Keep the sensors clean. If the sensors approximately 60 cm (2 feet). The two sensors
are dirty their performance may be in the centre of the rear bumper have a range of
impaired. When washing the vehicle, avoid approximately 1.5 metres (5 feet).
aiming high pressure jets directly at the
sensors. USING THE PARKING AID
WARNING
Parking aids may not detect moving
objects such as children and animals,
until they are dangerously close. Always
manoeuvre with caution.

CAUTION
The parking aid is for guidance only. The
sensors may not be able to detect certain
types of obstruction (narrow posts or small
narrow objects, small objects close to the
ground and some objects with dark,
non-reflective surfaces, for example).
With the starter switch in position II, the front
and rear parking aid are activated whenever
Reverse is selected. A short confirmation tone
will sound after one second.
E80443
If an obstruction is detected by the sensors
The parking aid alerts the driver to any while manoeuvring the vehicle, an intermittent
obstructions that need to be avoided whilst tone will sound. As the vehicle moves closer to
manoeuvring. When the parking aid is active, the obstruction, the intermittent tone increases
an indicator in the switch on the centre console in frequency.
illuminates. When the distance between the sensor and the
The vehicle is fitted with four ultrasonic obstruction is less than approximately 30 cm
sensors on each of the bumpers (some (1 foot), the tone becomes continuous.
vehicles are fitted with sensors only in the rear If Neutral is selected from Reverse, both sets of
bumpers). sensors will remain active.

159
L

Parking aid
The parking aid is automatically switched off
when the vehicles forward speed exceeds
16 km/h (10 mph).
Selecting P, or activating the electric parking
brake while the vehicle is stationary, will switch
off the parking aid.
Front parking aid - manual operation

2
E80442 3

When driving into a limited space, the front


parking aid can be manually activated.
To activate the front parking aid, press the
switch on the centre console (arrowed). The
indicator in the switch will illuminate and a
short confirmation tone will sound.
Press the switch again to deactivate the
parking aid.
Towing
The rear sensors are automatically switched off
when a trailer is attached to the vehicle.
System fault
If a system fault is detected, a long high pitched
tone will sound and the switch indicator light
will flash. Check that the sensors are not
obscured by dirt, ice or snow and clean if
necessary. If the problem persists, seek
qualified assistance.

160
R

Driving hints
RUNNING-IN Low oil pressure - red
Driving hints

Proper running-in will have a direct bearing on Illuminates as a bulb check when
the reliability and smooth running of your the starter switch is turned to
vehicle throughout its life. position II and extinguishes when
the engine is started. If the indicator remains
In particular, the engine, gearbox, brakes and
on, flashes on and off, or illuminates whilst
tyres need time to bed-in and adjust to the
driving, stop the vehicle as soon as safety
demands of everyday motoring. During the
permits and switch off the engine immediately.
first 800 km (500 miles), it is essential to drive
Seek qualified assistance before driving.
with consideration for the running-in process
Always check the oil level when this indicator
and heed the following advice:
illuminates.
• Limit maximum road speed to 110 km/h
(70 mph) or 3,000 rev/min. Initially, drive Overspeed warning - amber
the vehicle on a light throttle and only Illuminates when the vehicle speed
increase engine speeds gradually once the is exceeding the limit set by the
running-in distance has been completed. driver. See PERSONALISED
• Do not operate at full throttle or allow the SETTINGS (page 116).
engine to labour in any gear.
Breakdown safety
• Avoid fast acceleration and heavy braking
If a breakdown occurs while travelling:
except in emergencies.
• Wherever possible, consistent with road
• Remember! Regular servicing is vital to
safety and traffic conditions, the vehicle
ensure that the brake pads are examined
should be moved off the main highway,
for wear and changed periodically to
preferably onto the shoulder as far as
ensure long term safety and optimum
possible.
performance.
• Switch on hazard warning lamps.
GENERAL DRIVING POINTS • If possible, position a warning triangle or a
flashing amber light at an appropriate
Warning indicators distance from the vehicle to warn other
Battery charging - red traffic of the breakdown, (note the legal
requirements of some countries).
Illuminates as a bulb check when
the starter switch is turned to • Consider evacuating passengers through
position II and extinguishes once the doors facing away from traffic, to a
the engine is running. If it remains on, or safe area away from the vehicle, as a
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the precaution in case your vehicle is
battery charging system is indicated. Seek accidentally struck by another one.
qualified assistance urgently.

161
L

Driving hints
Servicing requirements • Assume that pedestrians and other drivers
Vehicles which operate in arduous conditions, are going to make mistakes. Anticipate
particularly on dusty, muddy, or wet terrain, what they might do. Be ready for their
and vehicles which undergo frequent, or deep mistakes.
wading conditions will require more frequent • Avoid distractions.
servicing. Contact a Land Rover • Before changing lanes, check your mirrors
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice. and use the direction indicators.
After wading in salt water, or driving on sandy • Never operate your vehicle when you have
beaches, wash the underbody components and consumed alcohol, are sleepy or fatigued
exposed panels with fresh water. This will help or have taken any medication that affects
to protect the vehicle's cosmetic appearance judgement, reflexes or alertness.
and prevent impairment of electric parking
brake efficiency. Wading

Vehicle stability CAUTIONS


The maximum advisable wading depth is
WARNING normally 600 mm (24 in). This can be
Many vehicle rollovers occur when a increased to 700 mm (27 in) if the air
driver attempts to bring a vehicle back suspension is set to off-road height. Wading at
onto the road after some or all of the wheels greater depths may cause damage.
drift onto the shoulder of the road, especially If the vehicle remains stationary for any
when the shoulder is unpaved. If you find length of time in water above the level of
yourself in such a situation, do not initiate any the door sills, severe electrical damage may
sharp or abrupt steering and/or braking occur.
manoeuvres to re-enter the roadway. Instead,
Do not switch off the engine during
let the vehicle slow down as much as safely
wading. If the engine stalls during
possible before attempting to re-enter the
wading re-start immediately. Should the
roadway and keep your wheels as straight as
engine stall, have it checked by qualified
possible while re-entering the roadway.
technician as soon as possible.
Measures that can reduce the risk of injury and If during wading water enters the engine
death from vehicle crashes and roll-over are: air intake, switch off immediately. The
• Limit your speed. Posted speed limits vehicle should be towed from the water and
should never be exceeded. recovered to a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
• Take curves at reasonable speeds, Repairer.
avoiding unnecessary braking.
• Drive defensively. Be aware of road and
weather conditions. Avoid risk-taking
behaviour such as following too close,
rapid lane changing or abrupt
manoeuvres.

162
R

Driving hints
REDUCED ENGINE PERFORMANCE ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel consumption is influenced by two major
Engine Management System (EMS) fault
factors:
Illuminates amber in the instrument
• How your vehicle is maintained.
pack when the engine management
system registers a serious fault - • How you drive your vehicle.
reduced performance may be experienced. To obtain optimum fuel economy, it is essential
Avoid high speeds and consult your Land that your vehicle is maintained in accordance
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as with the manufacturer's service schedule.
possible. Items such as the condition of the air cleaner
Check engine - petrol models only element, tyre pressures and wheel alignment
will have a significant effect on fuel
Illuminates amber in the instrument
consumption. But, above all, the way in which
pack as a bulb and system check
you drive is most important. The following
when the starter switch is turned on
hints may help you to obtain better value from
and extinguishes as soon as the engine is
your motoring:
started. Illumination at any other time indicates
that the emission performance of the engine • Avoid unnecessary, short, start-stop
management system is impaired - seek journeys.
qualified assistance. • Avoid fast starts by accelerating gently and
smoothly from rest.
If the indicator flashes while driving,
immediately reduce engine power to avoid • Do not drive in the lower gears for longer
catalytic converter damage. than necessary.
• Decelerate gently and avoid sudden and
heavy braking.
• Anticipate obstructions and adjust your
speed accordingly well in advance.
• When stationary in traffic, select neutral to
improve fuel economy and air conditioning
performance.
• Turn off air conditioning when not
required.

163
L

Cruise control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION USING CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control

CAUTIONS To operate
Do not use cruise control in traffic Accelerate until the desired cruising speed is
conditions where a constant speed reached. This must be above the system's
cannot easily be maintained. operational minimum speed of 30 km/h
Do not use cruise control on winding or (18 mph).
slippery road surfaces, or in off-road Press switch 1 to maintain that road speed.
conditions. An amber warning indicator in the
Do not use Sport mode when cruise instrument pack will illuminate
control is selected. when cruise control is operating.
Cruise control is operated via switches on the The speed can be increased by normal use of
steering wheel and enables the driver to the accelerator e.g. for overtaking. When the
maintain a constant road speed without using accelerator is released, road speed will return
the accelerator pedal. to the previously set cruising speed.
Note: If the accelerator pedal is pressed for
more than 60 seconds, cruise control will be
cancelled.
1
2 Suspending cruise control
Cruise control can be suspended by a single
3 press of switch 4. The warning indicator in the
4 instrument pack extinguishes.
Cruise control will also suspend when the
brake or clutch pedal is pressed, when the gear
E80444 selector is moved into neutral or if HDC or DSC
becomes active.
The steering wheel switches operate as
follows: To resume cruise control at the previously set
speed, press switch 3.
1. Set + : Set or increase the speed.
Note: The set speed will not be erased by
2. Set - : Set or decrease the speed. pressing switch 4. The set speed will only be
3. Resume: Resume set speed. erased when the starter switch is turned to
4. Cancel: Cancels without erasing position 0 or the gear selector is moved to P or
memorised speed. R.
Note: Cruise control is not available when the
vehicle is being driven in low range gears or if
a Terrain Response special program is
selected.

164
R

Cruise control
To reduce the cruising speed
Press and hold switch 2; the vehicle will
decelerate. Release the switch as soon as the
desired speed is reached. The vehicle speed at
the point of switch release becomes the new
set speed.
Alternatively, the set speed can be decreased
incrementally by tapping the (-) switch. Each
press of the switch will decrease the speed by
2 km/h (1 mph).
To increase the cruising speed
WARNINGS
It is important to remember that when
travelling downhill the vehicle may
exceed the set speed.
The driver must always ensure that a
safe speed is maintained within the
speed limit, taking account of traffic and road
conditions.
Press and hold switch 1; the vehicle will
accelerate. Release the switch as soon as the
desired speed is reached.
The vehicle speed at the point of switch release
becomes the new set speed.
Alternatively, the set speed can be increased
incrementally by tapping the (+) switch. Each
press of the switch will increase the speed by
2 km/h (1 mph).
A further alternative is to increase speed by
normal use of the accelerator. When the
desired speed is reached, press switch 1 to set
the cruise control.

165
L

Stability control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • To rock the vehicle out of a hollow or out
Stability control

of a soft surface.
WARNING • Starting in deep snow or on a loose
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) cannot surface.
compensate for driver misjudgement. It • Driving in deep sand.
is the driver's responsibility to drive
• Driving on tracks with deep longitudinal
appropriately in every situation. Do not take
ruts.
risks that could endanger yourself and
passengers. • Driving through deep mud.

The system controls dynamic stability when


accelerating. Additionally, it identifies unstable
driving behaviour, such as understeering and
oversteering and helps to keep the vehicle
under control by manipulating the engine
output and applying the brakes at individual
wheels. The system is ready to operate each
2 3
time the engine is started. E81084

An amber warning indicator in the To deactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
instrument pack illuminates briefly DSC switch on the instrument panel (the DSC
as a bulb and system check when warning indicator will illuminate continuously).
the starter switch is turned to position II. Deactivating DSC has no effect on traction
If the warning indicator flashes, the system is control operation.
active, regulating engine output and brake Note: Driving with DSC deactivated, may add
forces. additional loads on the brakes - always drive
If the warning indicator illuminates constantly, with DSC switched on if possible.
and does not extinguish when the DSC switch
Reactivating Dynamic Stability Control
is pressed, a fault has been detected in the
(DSC)
system. Any fault will deactivate DSC. Drive
with care and seek qualified assistance as soon To reactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
as possible. DSC switch on the instrument panel. DSC will
automatically reactivate when the engine is
USING STABILITY CONTROL started.
DSC is reactivated automatically when the
Deactivating Dynamic Stability Control program is changed on vehicles fitted with the
(DSC) Terrain Response system.
Land Rover recommend that DSC is
operational in all normal driving conditions.
In some driving conditions, to maximise
traction, it may be beneficial to deactivate DSC.
Such conditions include:

166
R

Stability control
Messages
The following table lists a message relating to
dynamic stability control that could appear in
the message centre. Market criteria mean that
some messages will not apply to your vehicle
and will therefore not appear.
Message Meaning What to do?
DSC SWITCHED OFF System not available - To reselect, press DSC switch.
switched off by driver.

167
L

Traction control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Traction control

Electronic Traction Control (ETC) improves


vehicle traction when one or more wheels has
a tendency to spin. It operates in conjunction
with the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
system.
If a wheel is spinning, ETC automatically brakes
that wheel until it regains grip.
An amber warning indicator in the
instrument pack illuminates briefly
as a bulb check when the starter
switch is turned to position II.
If ETC or DSC is activated by the system, the
warning indicator will flash and continue to
flash until the vehicle regains traction and or
stability.
The indicator will be constantly illuminated if
DSC is manually deactivated. Deactivating DSC
has no effect on traction control.
If the warning indicator illuminates constantly,
and does not extinguish when the DSC switch
is pressed, a fault has been detected in the
system. Any fault will deactivate the system.
Drive with care and seek qualified assistance
urgently.

168
R

Hill descent control (HDC)


PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Press and release the switch (arrowed) to
Hill descent control (HDC)

Hill Descent Control (HDC) operates in select HDC. To deselect, press and release
conjunction with the anti-lock braking system again.
to provide greater control in off-road situations HDC can be selected at speeds below 80 km/h
particularly when descending severe gradients. (50 mph), but full HDC function is not active
During a hill descent, if engine braking is until the vehicle speed falls below 50 km/h
insufficient to control the vehicle speed, HDC (30 mph). The green HDC indicator will
automatically operates the brakes to slow the illuminate.
vehicle and maintain a speed relative to the If the vehicle speed exceeds 80 km/h (50 mph),
selected gear range and the accelerator pedal HDC will deselect and the green HDC indicator
position. will extinguish.
In vehicles with manual transmission, HDC If HDC is selected and vehicle speed rises
should only be used in first and reverse gears above 50 km/h (30 mph) in high range, HDC
in high range and all gears in low range. Once function is suspended and the green HDC
the vehicle is moving, the clutch pedal should indicator will flash. A message will also appear
be fully released. in the message centre.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, HDC If HDC is deselected when HDC is operating,
should only be used in D, R and CommandShift the system fades out, allowing the vehicle to
1 in high range and in D, R and all gradually increase speed.
CommandShift gears in low range. When in D, In low range, HDC controls the vehicle speed
the vehicle will automatically select the most more aggressively. Use low range when
appropriate gear. descending steep slopes.
Note: If Terrain Response is fitted, some of the When driving off-road, HDC can be
program and range combinations will activate permanently selected to ensure that control is
or deactivate HDC automatically. maintained. ABS and traction control are still
operational.
USING HDC Note: HDC is automatically deselected if the
starter switch is turned off for more than 6
hours.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) in action
The green warning indicator
illuminates briefly as a bulb and
system check when the starter
switch is turned to position II.
If HDC is selected and all operating conditions
are met, the indicator will illuminate. If all
E81081
operating conditions are not met (vehicle in
HDC should be used in conjunction with an neutral, clutch pedal pressed, vehicle speed
appropriate gear. above HDC operating range) the indicator will
flash.

169
L

Hill descent control (HDC)


If an HDC fault occurs, HDC will fade-out and If the brake pedal is depressed when HDC is
then deselect, or deselect immediately active, HDC is overridden and the brakes will
(depending on the type of fault and whether or perform as normal (a pulsation might be felt
not HDC is in operation). The indicator will through the brake pedal). If the brake pedal is
extinguish and the message SYSTEM NOT then released, HDC will start operating at the
AVAILABLE will appear in the message centre reduced speed.
or the HDC fault amber indicator will illuminate.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) faults
Faults in the HDC system can be displayed by
the message centre or by the amber warning
1 indicator.
2 More information on the messages that may be
displayed is given later in this section.
The HDC amber indicator is fitted to
models without a message centre
and has two functions.

E81082
1. Illuminate continuously if there is a fault in
the HDC system. If the fault is detected
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, while the system is active, HDC will fade
descent speeds can be varied using the out. Do not attempt a steep descent when
steering-wheel-mounted cruise control HDC is unavailable, alternatively use a very
switches. To reduce the descent speed, press low gear and/or the foot brake. Consult
and hold switch 2. Release the switch when the your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
desired speed is reached. Repairer at the earliest opportunity.
To increase the descent speed, press and hold 2. Flash if the brake temperatures reach a
switch 1. Release the switch when the desired pre-defined limit. HDC will fade out and
speed is reached. become temporarily inactive. HDC will not
Alternatively, the descent speed can be be available until the brakes reach an
adjusted by tapping switch 1 or 2. Each press acceptable temperature.
of the switch will adjust the descent speed by HDC fade-out
approximately 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
HDC fade-out gradually decreases the HDC
Note: Each gear has a pre-defined minimum function with the effect that the rate of hill
descent speed. descent will increase. HDC will be disabled
The descent speed will only increase if the completely once the descent is complete.
gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the
vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is
reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing switch 1
may result in no speed increase.
Note: With HDC selected, gear changes can be
carried out in the normal way.

170
R

Hill descent control (HDC)


Messages
The following table lists the messages relating
to Hill Descent Control (HDC) that could appear
in the message centre. Market criteria mean
that some messages will not apply to your
vehicle and will therefore not appear.
Message Meaning What to do?
HDC FAULT Hill Descent Control system Drive with care and do not
SYSTEM fault. attempt to descend steep
NOT AVAILABLE slopes. Seek qualified
assistance immediately.
HDC HDC not operative because of Select correct gear if HDC is
NOT AVAILABLE incorrect gear selection. HDC is required. In Low range, HDC
IN THIS GEAR fully functional in 1st and operates in all gears for manual
Reverse gears in manual and automatic transmissions.
transmissions and 1, R and D
in automatic in High range. It
operates in all gears in Low
range.
HDC HDC unavailable, speed Reduce vehicle speed.
NOT AVAILABLE threshold exceeded. Maximum
SPEED TOO HIGH HDC operating speed is
50 km/h (30 mph), maximum
speed for HDC selection is
80 km/h (50 mph).
HDC TEMPORARILY HDC switched off while brake Wait until message disappears
NOT AVAILABLE system is cooling. before attempting to descend
SYSTEM COOLING steep slopes.

171
L

Terrain response
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: Changing from one special program to
Terrain response

another will result in the system adopting a


different set of criteria for the systems it
controls. For instance, the engine revs
produced by the current throttle position might
increase or decrease slightly in the new
program, or the suspension could change
height. The changes are not dramatic, but are
noticeable.
To obtain the maximum benefits from the
system, it is suggested that you experiment
E80899 with the different features in an environment
that will not affect other road users.
The Terrain Response™ system is a
permanently active system, continuously
USING TERRAIN RESPONSE
providing benefits in traction and driveability.
These benefits can be further enhanced for
specific off-road driving conditions by the
selection of one of the four special programs.
Dependant on the selected special program,
the system optimises the vehicle set-up for the
prevailing conditions, providing the maximum
in traction, driveability and vehicle response.
The systems comprising Terrain Response are:
• Engine management.
• Gearbox management. E80901

• Intelligent differential control. Rotate the control to select the required special
• Dynamic stability, traction control and Hill program. When the selector reaches either end
Descent Control (HDC) systems. of its range, it can be turned further, but doing
• Air suspension. so has no effect.
The system will provide a variable throttle In addition to General, four special programs
response, ranging from very cautious (large are available:
pedal movement has a minimum effect on • Grass/gravel/snow (also includes ice).
engine power) when driving in slippery • Mud/ruts.
conditions, to very responsive (engine power is • Sand.
allowed to rise more quickly) when driving over
• Rock Crawl.
sand.
When the starter switch is turned on, the
indicators around the control are illuminated,
with the active program highlighted in amber.

172
R

Terrain response
If a special program is active, the special Grass-Gravel-Snow
program indicator will also be displayed on the Use this special program for
message centre. surfaces which are firm, but have a
coating of loose material. This could
be grass, snow or loose gravel, pebbles or
sand. This program should also be selected in
icy conditions.
HDC will engage automatically in low range,
but can be manually de-selected. See USING
HDC (page 169).
E80902
Start off in a higher gear than usual, second
If the starter switch is turned off when a special gear in high range or third gear in low range.
program is selected, the program will remain in Manual transmission vehicles: when
the system memory for approximately six Grass/Gravel/Snow program is selected,
hours. The system will return to that program confirmation will be given in the message
when the starter switch is turned back on. centre. This message will appear only once per
The message centre will confirm that the ignition cycle.
previously selected special program is still Using the vehicle with snow chains fitted could
selected. After six hours, the system will affect operation of Terrain Response. See
automatically revert back to the General USING SNOW CHAINS (page 248).
program. Note: If the vehicle cannot obtain forward
General traction in deep snow, switch off Dynamic
Stability Control (DSC). DSC must be switched
Select as soon as a special program
on as soon as conditions permit. See USING
E80903
is not required.
STABILITY CONTROL (page 166).
All systems, except Hill Descent
Control (HDC), will adopt settings based on the Mud-Ruts
conditions sensed. HDC will remain active if it Use this special program when
was manually selected. The suspension will traversing muddy or deeply rutted
also change from raised to normal ride height ground that is soft and uneven and
when the vehicle starts moving. demands maximum axle displacement.
The General setting is suitable for surfaces that Unevenness of the ground could be caused by
match typical road surfaces, including dry roots, brushwood or small logs.
cobbles, Tarmac or wooden planks. System settings are similar to
Grass-Gravel-Snow, except for the individual
systems that optimise traction and driveability
in muddy/rutted driving conditions. Low range
is recommended for this program.

173
L

Terrain response
If low range is not selected, the message centre Increased suspension height
will prompt the driver. If the Mud-Ruts When a special program requires increased
program and low range are selected together, suspension height, the system will
the vehicle ride height will be raised automatically raise the suspension, unless
automatically. there is electric load on the trailer socket,
Sand indicating that a trailer is attached to the
vehicle.
Use this special program on soft
and predominantly dry, yielding A message will be displayed on the message
sandy ground, such as dry beaches centre.
and sand deserts. Also use for deep gravel. Driver override options
Where the sand is damp or wet, select The following two systems controlled by
Mud-Ruts special program. Terrain Response may also be operated by the
Note: If the sand is extremely soft and dry and driver.
of a depth that allows the wheels to sink, switch • Air Suspension
off Dynamic Stability Control (DSC). DSC must • Hill Descent Control
be switched on as soon as conditions permit.
See USING STABILITY CONTROL (page 166). In some special programs, the Terrain
Response system will switch on HDC and, in
Rock Crawl low range, the system will automatically raise
Use this special program on solid, the suspension to off-road height.
E80907
unyielding ground, which demands Both the HDC and ride height selections can be
high levels of wheel displacement cancelled by the driver at any time. If HDC or a
and careful vehicle control, such as clusters of specific ride height has not been selected by
boulders. This program would also be used for the system, the driver can select them at any
crossing river beds strewn with submerged time.
rocks. HDC and ride height selections will be
Rock Crawl is only selectable in low range. If confirmed through the message centre and by
selection is attempted in high range, the driver the individual system information indicators,
will be prompted to select low range. This irrespective of whether the system or driver
special program will utilise system control selected them. Use of special programs,
settings to optimise the vehicle suspension and particularly in low range, may prompt some
traction system for extreme suspension driving advice and warnings as well as
articulation and good low-speed control. additional information on the message centre.
Wading Note: Use the CommandShift function on the
gearbox to lock the vehicle in a particular gear.
When driving through water less than 600 mm
(24 inches) deep, select the Terrain Response
program suitable for the surface beneath the
water.

174
R

Terrain response
Inappropriate special program selection
CAUTION
Selecting an inappropriate special
program will not endanger the driver or
damage the vehicle. It will, however, impair the
vehicle's response to the conditions and
reduce the durability of the suspension and
drive systems.
If selection of an inappropriate special program
is attempted, such as choosing Rock Crawl
while in high range - the symbol of that
program will flash amber and an audible chime
will sound. The message centre will advise that
the special program is unavailable and suggest
corrective action.
If the requirements have not been met after 60
seconds, the warnings will cease and the
message centre will show the active program.
If the system becomes partly inoperable, it may
not be possible to select some special
programs. A warning will be given when
selection of an affected program is attempted.
If the system becomes totally inoperable, all of
the special program indicators will be switched
off and the message centre will display a
message.
The suspension system provides an automatic
levelling function. See ADJUSTING THE
SUSPENSION (page 180).If low range is
needed, it is likely that mobility and vehicle
composure would benefit from increased
ground clearance.

175
L

Terrain response
Messages
The following table lists the messages relating
to Terrain Response that could appear in the
message centre. Market criteria mean that
some messages will not apply to your vehicle
and will therefore not appear.
Message Meaning What to do?
CAUTION! Terrain Response system Raise suspension manually to
RISK OF would have selected off-road off-road height if possible and
GROUNDING WITH height but the driver has appropriate.
SUSPENSION AT manually lowered the vehicle
NORMAL HEIGHT (or the system cannot raise the
vehicle).
HDC FAULT HDC system fault. Drive with care and do not
SYSTEM attempt to descend steep
NOT AVAILABLE slopes. Seek qualified
assistance immediately.
HDC HDC not operative because of Select correct gear if HDC is
NOT AVAILABLE incorrect gear selection. See required.
IN THIS GEAR USING HDC (page 169).
HDC HDC unavailable, speed Reduce vehicle speed.
NOT AVAILABLE threshold exceeded. Max HDC
SPEED TOO HIGH operating speed is 50 km/h (30
mph), max speed for HDC
selection is 80 km/h (50 mph).
HDC TEMPORARILY HDC switched off while brake Wait until message disappears
NOT AVAILABLE system is cooling. before attempting to descend
SYSTEM COOLING steep slopes.
PROGRAM CHANGE It is temporarily impossible to If conditions change within 60
IN PROGRESS select a new program. This can seconds, the chosen program
be due to ABS or DSC activity will be selected.
or the overheating of the If the message is prompted by
electronic differentials. electronic differential overheat,
then it will take longer but there
will be separate advice about
this.
Once the differentials have
cooled, try to reselect the
special program.

176
R

Terrain response

Message Meaning What to do?


RECOMMEND Low range is recommended for Select low range.
LOW RANGE Mud-Ruts special program.
IS SELECTED
FOR MUD-RUTS
PROGRAM
RECOMMEND RAISING Mud-Ruts program is being Raise suspension manually to
SUSPENSION TO used in high range. Suspension off-road height or select low
OFF ROAD HEIGHT raised automatically in low range.
IN DEEP MUD-RUTS range.
RECOMMEND STARTING IN In slippery conditions start off Select second/third gear.
2ND/3RD GEAR in a higher gear than usual.
FOR SLIPPERY
CONDITIONS
RESET SUSPENSION Suspension still in extended Check if vehicle is clear of
HEIGHT IF CLEAR mode. obstacle. If clear, select
OF OBSTACLE required suspension.
SELECT LOW RANGE Vehicle is not in low range, so Select low range if Rock Crawl
TO ACTIVATE Rock Crawl cannot be is required.
ROCK CRAWL activated.
SELECT NEUTRAL Range change will not occur Select neutral.
FOR RANGE until neutral is selected.
CHANGE
SLOW DOWN OR VEHICLE Vehicle will automatically Choose to slow down or accept
WILL LOWER/RAISE lower/raise if vehicle speed height change.
increases.
SPEED TOO HIGH Vehicle speed is too high for Reduce speed to 40 km/h
FOR RANGE requested range change. (25mph) on automatic
CHANGE transmission or 20 km/h (12
mph) on manual transmission.
SYSTEM FAULT There is a fault on the Terrain Be careful off-road as full
SOME PROGRAMS Response system. Terrain Response programs
NOT AVAILABLE are not available.
Seek qualified assistance
immediately.
SYSTEM FAULT There is a fault on the Terrain Be careful off-road as Terrain
SPECIAL PROGRAMS Response system. Response programs are not
NOT AVAILABLE available
Seek qualified assistance
immediately.

177
L

Terrain response

Message Meaning What to do?


TRAILER CONNECTED Vehicle has not achieved If a trailer is connected, do
OFF ROAD HEIGHT off-road height as trailer socket nothing.
NOT SELECTED is being used. If no trailer is connected but
AUTOMATICALLY something else, such as a bike
rack, is connected, raise to
off-road height manually.
If nothing is connected, check
socket for faults.

178
R

Air suspension
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: If Terrain Response is in use, some of its
Air suspension

programs/range combinations will adjust


+70mm suspension height automatically.
55mm Note: If the trailer socket is in use, increased
supension height control will be inhibited.

0mm Extended mode


If the vehicle is grounded while at off-road
height and traction control is induced, the
system provides additional lift to clear the
50mm obstruction. Extended mode is activated
E80695
automatically and cannot be selected manually.

The air suspension system maintains the Access height


correct vehicle height by controlling the
WARNING
quantity of air in the vehicle's air springs.
Ensure that the vehicle is clear of
Unless stated otherwise, height changes may people and obstacles before lowering
only be made while the engine is running and the suspension. Remember that the difference
the driver and passenger doors are closed. between off-road height and access height is
When the air suspension system lifts the 105 mm (4.1 in.).
vehicle, it normally uses compressed air stored
This is 50 mm (2.0 in.) lower than On-road
in its reservoir. The suspension will rise much
height. It provides easier entry, exit and loading
more slowly if this reservoir is depleted due to
of the vehicle.
repeated raising and lowering of the
suspension. The suspension will automatically rise from
access height when the vehicle speed exceeds
On-road height 10 km/h (6 mph).
The normal height for the vehicle. If access height was selected directly from
off-road height, the system will return to
Off-road height
off-road height when the vehicle speed exceeds
This is 55 mm (2.2 in.) higher than on-road 10 km/h (6 mph). Otherwise the system will lift
height. It provides improved ground clearance the suspension to on-road height.
and approach, departure and break-over
angles. See TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS High speed height
(page 268). This feature lowers the suspension ride height
Off-road height can be selected at any speed up by 20 mm (0.75 in), if the vehicle exceeds 160
to 40 km/h (24 mph). When the system is at km/h (100 mph) for longer than five seconds.
off-road height, the system will automatically This action is automatic and cannot be
select on-road height if the vehicle speed over-ridden. Ride height will return to normal
exceeds 50 km/h (30 mph). when vehicle speed remains below 130 km/h
(80 mph) for 30 seconds.

179
L

Air suspension
Locked at access height (crawl mode) ADJUSTING THE SUSPENSION
This mode enables the vehicle to be driven at
low speeds at access height, to give increased 1 2
roof clearance in multi-storey car parks, etc.
Locked at access height can be selected when 3
the vehicle speed is below 10 km/h (6 mph).
When the vehicle is in this mode, On-road
4
height will be selected automatically if the
vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h (24 mph). 5
Suspension warning indicator
6
The suspension warning indicator in
the instrument pack illuminates
both red and amber briefly as a bulb 7
E80690
check when the starter is turned to position II.
If the indicator illuminates amber, a 1. Raise/lower switch
suspension fault has been detected, but the 2. Raising indicator
vehicle can still be driven normally.
3. Off-road indicator
If the indicator flashes red, a serious
4. On-road indicator
suspension fault has been detected and the
vehicle should be driven slowly until qualified 5. Access indicator
assistance can be obtained. 6. Lock indicator
The first illumination of the indicator will be 7. Lowering indicator
accompanied by a warning chime.
Suspension height indicators
Indicators 2 or 7 will illuminate to show the
direction of movement. They extinguish when
the height change is completed.
If a height change is requested that is not
allowed, such as attempting to raise the height
of the vehicle with the engine not running,
indicators 2 and 7 will flash twice and a chime
will sound. A message will be displayed on the
message centre.
A flashing indicator 2 or 7 indicates that the
system is in a waiting state or shows that it will
automatically override the driver's choice if
speed criteria are exceeded.

180
R

Air suspension
Access height Locked at access height crawl mode
If access height is selected while vehicle speed
is above 20 km/h (12 mph), indicators 5 and 7 1
will flash while the system waits for the vehicle
to slow down. The system will cancel the
access height request if the vehicle does not
slow sufficiently within one minute.
When the vehicle slows down to 20 km/h
(12 mph), indicator 4 will extinguish as the
5
system goes to the part-lowered height.
Indicator 5 will be lit and indicator 7 will
continue to flash. 6
The vehicle must slow down to 8 km/h
(5 mph), within one minute to prevent access E80691

height cancellation. Indicators 5 and 7 will be


When the suspension is at on-road or access
lit. When access height is reached, indicator 7
height and the vehicle speed is below 35 km/h
will extinguish.
(22 mph), press the raise/lower switch 1 in the
Access height may be selected up to down direction for one second. Indicators 5
40 seconds after the starter switch is turned and 6 will illuminate to confirm the selection,
off, provided that the driver's door has not and a chime will sound.
been opened within this time.
Locked at access height can be cancelled by
pressing the raise/lower switch in the up
direction for one second. Indicator 6 will
extinguish.
Note: When locked at access height is
cancelled, the suspension will rise to on-road
height if the vehicle speed is greater than 10
km/h (6 mph).
Access height from off-road height
When the suspension is at off-road height,
press switch 1 down, then press it again before
indicator 7 goes out.
The system will remember to return the
suspension to off-road height automatically if
the vehicle is driven above 10 km/h (6 mph).

181
L

Air suspension
Automatic height change warnings
2

3
2
4
4

7 5

E80692

When the suspension is at off-road height, E80693 7


access or locked at access height, the
The indicator for the target height 3, 4 or 5 will
suspension height will change automatically
remain lit and the lifting indicator 2 or the
when vehicle speed exceeds predetermined
lowering indicator 7 will flash.
levels.
The height change will resume if all of the
When the suspension is at off-road height or
doors are closed within 90 seconds.
locked at access height, it warns the driver that
the vehicle is approaching a speed threshold. A If the doors are not closed within this time, the
chime will sound, a message will be displayed raising indicator 2 or the lowering indicator 7
on the message centre and the on-road will extinguish and the indicators showing the
indicator 4 and either 2 or 7 will flash. heights above and below the current position
will be illuminated.
The off-road height speed warning is shown
above. If the vehicle slows down, the warning Selecting a new height using the raise/lower
will disappear. switch 1, or driving off will reset the system.

Door open override Extended mode


If a door is opened during a height change If the vehicle is grounded and traction control
while the vehicle is at rest, the height change is induced, the system raises the vehicle clear
will be restricted. of the obstruction. Extended mode is activated
automatically and cannot be selected manually.

182
R

Air suspension
Suspension freeze
1 If the system is attempting to change the
suspension height and it detects that the
suspension is prevented from moving, the
3 system will freeze all movements.
This can be caused by attempting to lower the
vehicle on to an obstacle or attempting to lift
the vehicle against an obstruction.
The indicators operate in the same way as
described in extended mode and the same
message will be displayed on the message
centre. As in extended mode, to exit this freeze
E80694 state, either press the switch 1 up or down, or
drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 20
When extended mode is activated, indicator 3
km/h (12 mph).
will flash. A message will be displayed on the
message centre. Remote operation
To exit extended mode, either press the
raise/lower switch 1 briefly up or down or drive WARNINGS
the vehicle at a speed greater than 5 km/h (3 The remote control will operate
mph) for 30 seconds. normally from inside the vehicle. It is
therefore important to keep it out of reach of
Additional lift whilst in extended mode children at all times.
When extended mode is invoked and the When operating the remote control
automatic lifting of the vehicle has been from inside the vehicle, ensure that a
completed, the driver can select an additional responsible adult checks for obstructions
lift in order to clear the obstacle. This can be under the vehicle and and supervises the
particularly useful when extended mode has lowering process.
been invoked on soft surfaces.
Care should be taken with all
To request additional lifting, wait for the raising suspension height changes when a
indicator 2 to extinguish then press and hold trailer is attached to the vehicle.
the switch 1 for three seconds whilst pressing
The remote control can be programmed to
the brake pedal. A chime will sound to confirm
operate the air suspension.
that the request has been accepted. Indicator 2
will be illuminated while the vehicle is being
lifted.
To exit extended mode briefly press either the
raise or lower switch. Alternatively, the vehicle
will automatically lower if driven at a speed
greater than 5 km/h (3 mph) for 30 seconds.

183
L

Air suspension
AIR SUSPENSION MESSAGES
When a message centre is fitted to the vehicle,
messages relating to the air suspension
system may be displayed. For an explanation of
those messages, refer to the following table.
Message Meaning What to do?
CAUTION! RISK OF Displayed when the Terrain Raise suspension manually to
GROUNDING WITH Response system would off-road height if possible and
SUSPENSION AT NORMAL normally have provided appropriate.
HEIGHT off-road height but the driver
has manually lowered the
vehicle (or the system cannot
raise the vehicle).
RECOMMEND RAISING In deep ruts it is beneficial to Raise suspension manually to
SUSPENSION TO OFF ROAD raise the vehicle to off-road off-road height.
HEIGHT IN DEEP MUD-RUTS height. This is done
automatically in low range but
has to be done manually if
mud/ruts program is used in
high range.
RESET SUSPENSION HEIGHT Suspension still in extended Check if vehicle is clear of
IF CLEAR OF OBSTACLE mode. obstacle. If clear, select
required suspension.
SLOW DOWN OR VEHICLE Vehicle will automatically Choose to slow down or accept
WILL LOWER/RAISE lower/raise if vehicle speed height change.
increases.
SUSPENSION CLOSE DOOR Air suspension height change Close all doors.
TO CHANGE HEIGHT is prevented because a door is
open.
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Seek qualified assistance
air suspension system. System immediately.
may still operate normally.
SUSPENSION FAULT MAX A major fault has been detected Drive slowly until fault can be
SPEED 50 km/h (MAX SPEED in the air suspension system. rectified.
30 mph) Height cannot be controlled.
SUSPENSION FAULT NORMAL A fault has been detected in the Seek qualified assistance
HEIGHT ONLY air suspension system. Only immediately.
normal height is available.

184
R

Air suspension

Message Meaning What to do?


SUSPENSION FAULT STOP Major component failure. Stop vehicle immediately and
SAFELY STOP ENGINE seek qualified assistance.
SUSPENSION SPEED TOO A height change has been Reduce vehicle speed.
HIGH TO CHANGE HEIGHT requested but is prevented
because speed is too high.
SUSPENSION START ENGINE Vehicle height can only be Start the engine.
TO RAISE VEHICLE raised with the engine running.
SUSPENSION WILL RAISE Air suspension compressor is Wait for suspension to carry
WHEN SYSTEM COOLED cooling. Lifting will resume out lifting sequence.
when compressor has cooled.

185
L

Fuel and refuelling


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FUEL QUALITY
Fuel and refuelling

WARNINGS
Fuel vapour is highly flammable, and in
confined spaces is explosive and toxic. D
Pb
In the event of spillage, and before refuelling, DIESEL
always switch off the engine. Do not use
exposed flame or light. Do not smoke. Do not
inhale fumes.
To avoid fuel spillage that could be
hazardous to other road users, always
stop refuelling when the fuel nozzle shuts off
for the second time. Additional fuel will fill the
expansion space in the tank which could lead
TIGHTEN UNTIL CAP CLICKS
to fuel overflowing. OR ENGINE LIGHT MAY COME ON
SEE OWNERS GUIDE

CAUTION E80367

Never use additives of any kind in the


The correct fuel specification for your vehicle is
fuel tank. Additives could reduce engine
shown on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
life or affect exhaust emissions.
Note: Do not leave the remote handset in the Fuel specification - petrol engines
vehicle while refuelling. Always lock the vehicle CAUTION
if it is to be left unattended.
On vehicles fitted with a catalytic
converter, serious damage to the
catalyst will occur if leaded fuel is used.
Only use Unleaded 95 RON fuel to EN 228
specification. Unleaded fuel no lower than 90
RON may also be used.
The RON value (octane rating) and type of
petroleum available at garage forecourts will
vary in different parts of the world.
During manufacture, engines are tuned to suit
the fuel supplies commonly available in the
country for which the vehicle is destined.
However, if a vehicle is later exported to a
different country, or is used to travel between
different territories, the owner should be aware
that the available fuel supplies may not be
compatible with the engine specification.

186
R

Fuel and refuelling


Using petrol with a lower octane rating than 91 Methanol
RON, however, can cause persistent, heavy Some fuels contain methanol (methyl or wood
engine knock (a metallic rapping noise). If alcohol). If you use fuels containing methanol
severe, this can lead to engine damage. the fuels must also contain co-solvents and
If heavy engine knock is detected when using corrosion inhibitors for methanol. Also, do not
the recommended octane rated fuel, or if use fuels that contain more than 3% methanol
constant engine knocking is present while even if they contain co-solvents and corrosion
maintaining a steady speed on level roads, inhibitors. Fuel system damage or vehicle
contact your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised performance problems resulting from the use
Repairer for advice. of such fuels is not the responsibility of Land
Note: An occasional, light, engine knock while Rover, and may not be covered under the
accelerating or climbing hills is acceptable. warranty.

Ethanol fuels Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether (MTBE)


Unleaded fuel containing an oxygenate known
CAUTIONS as MTBE can be used provided the ratio of
This vehicle is not fitted with the MTBE to conventional fuel does not exceed
equipment necessary for the use of fuels 15%. MTBE is an ether based compound,
containing more than 10% ethanol. derived from petroleum, which has been
Do not use E85 fuels (85 per cent ethanol specified by several refiners as the substance
content). Equipment necessary for the to enhance the octane rating of fuel.
use of fuels containing more than 10% ethanol Reformulated gasoline
is not fitted to this vehicle. If E85 fuels are
Several petroleum companies have announced
used, serious engine and fuel system damage
the availability of reformulated fuels. These
will occur.
fuels are specially designed to further reduce
Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol (grain vehicle emissions. Land Rover fully supports
alcohol) may be used. Ensure the fuel has all efforts to protect and maintain ambient air
octane ratings no lower than those quality and encourages the use of reformulated
recommended for unleaded fuel. Most drivers gasoline where available.
will not notice any operating difference with
fuel containing ethanol. If a difference is
detected, the use of conventional unleaded fuel
should be resumed.

187
L

Fuel and refuelling


Fuel specification - diesel engines RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
CAUTION CAUTION
The maximum allowable Bio-diesel mix Do not run the fuel tank dry. This could
is 5%, meeting EN 590 specification. create an engine misfire capable of
Only use Diesel or Automotive Gas Oil (AGO) to damaging the engine, the catalytic converter
EN 590 specification. or the fuel pump.
The quality of diesel fuel (Derv) can vary in Note: Should the vehicle run out of fuel it will
different countries and only clean, good quality be necessary to add a minimum of 4 litres
fuel should be used. It is important that the (0.8 gallons) of fuel in order to restart the
sulphur content of diesel fuel does not exceed engine. In some circumstances it will be
0.3%. In Europe all supplies should be within necessary to drive a short distance, typically
this limit, but in other parts of the world, you 1.6 - 5 kilometres (1 - 3 miles) in order for the
should check with your supplier. vehicles monitoring systems to register the
additional fuel.
In markets where the sulphur content exceeds
0.3%, more frequent engine oil and filter
changes will be required.

CAUTION
If the fuel tank is accidentally filled with
petrol, it is essential that you seek
qualified assistance before attempting to start
the engine.
Note: The use of commercial vehicle diesel
pumps with a higher fill rate, may result in E80510
premature pump cut-off and fuel spillage.
When the remaining fuel reaches a minimum of
12 litres (three gallons), the amber low fuel
warning indicator illuminates. The remaining
fuel should give a range of 80 km (50 miles).

188
R

Fuel and refuelling


FUEL FILLER FLAP
CAUTIONS
The fuel filler flap has a spring loaded
release, do not force it open. If the flap
has been forced open, it may fail to close
properly. Seek qualified assistance.
When replacing the fuel filler cap make
sure that it is tightened until it clicks
three times. Failure to do so may result in the
engine warning light illuminating due to
evaporative emission levels increasing.

E80364

With the vehicle fully unlocked (all doors and


the tailgate), press the left side of the fuel filler
flap to open.
The fuel filler flap springs open revealing the
filler cap.
E80363

The fuel filler is located behind the rear


right-hand wheel arch. An arrow on the fuel
gauge points to that side of the vehicle.

E80365

The filler cap is secured to the vehicle by a


strap. For your convenience a holder is
provided on the flap to store the cap whilst
refuelling.

189
L

Fuel and refuelling


REFUELLING
WARNINGS
To avoid any sudden discharge of fuel
caused by excessive fuel vapour
pressure, do not fully remove the filler cap
until any captive tank pressure has been
released.
Take careful note of warning labels
located around the filler cap.
Do not attempt to fill the tank beyond its
maximum capacity. If the vehicle is to 1 2
be parked on a slope, in direct sunlight, or high
ambient temperature, expansion of the fuel
could cause spillage.

CAUTION
When refitting the fuel filler cap, ensure E82173

that it is tightened until it clicks. Failure


to do so may result in the engine warning Insert the pump nozzle 1 into the filler neck,
indicator illuminating due to evaporative pushing the spring-loaded cover 2 aside.
emission levels increasing. When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle
and replace the cap. Turn the cap clockwise
until it clicks three times.

190
R

Fuel and refuelling


FUEL CUT-OFF
If the Supplementary Restraint System is
activated during an accident, the fuel supply to
the engine may be stopped. If this happens, the
system must be reset before attempting to
restart the engine.
Resetting the fuel cut-off system
WARNING
To avoid the possibility of fire or
personal injury, do not reset the fuel
cut-off system if you see or smell fuel.
If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the system as
follows:
1. Turn the starter switch to position 0 and
wait for one minute.
2. Turn the starter switch to position II and
wait for 30 seconds.
3. Make a further check for fuel leaks.
4. If no leak is found, start the engine as
normal.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING
Exhaust system temperatures can be
extremely high - do not park on ground
where combustible materials such as dry
grass or leaves could come into contact with
the exhaust system.

CAUTION
Catalytic converters can be easily
damaged through improper use,
particularly if the wrong fuel is used, or if an
engine misfire occurs.

191
L

Fuel and refuelling


FUEL CONSUMPTION
Fuel consumption figures
The fuel consumption figures shown below have been calculated using a standard testing
procedure (the new EC test procedure from Directive 99/100/EC), and produced in accordance with
The Passenger Car Fuel Consumption (Amendment) Order 1996.
Under normal use, a vehicle’s actual fuel consumption figures may differ from those achieved
through the test procedure, depending on driving technique, road and traffic conditions,
environmental factors, vehicle load and condition.

Variant Urban Extra-urban Combined CO2 emissions


l/100km (mpg) l/100km (mpg) l/100km (mpg) g/km
V6 Diesel (manual) 11.1 (25.4) 8.1 (34.9) 9.2 (30.7) 244
V6 Diesel (automatic) 13.1 (21.6) 8.5 (33.2) 10.2 (27.7) 270
V8 Petrol 20.9 (13.5) 12.1 (22.3) 15.0 (18.8) 354

Urban cycle
The urban test cycle is carried out from a cold start and consists of a series of accelerations,
decelerations and periods of steady speed driving and engine idling. The maximum speed attained
during the test is 50 km/h (30 mph) with an average speed of 19 km/h (12 mph).
Extra-urban cycle
The extra-urban cycle test is carried out immediately after the urban test. Approximately half of the
test comprises steady-speed driving, while the remainder consists of a series of accelerations,
decelerations and engine idling. The maximum test speed is 120 km/h (75 mph) and the average
speed 63 km/h (40 mph). The test is carried out over a distance of 7 km (4.4 miles).
Combined
The combined figure is an average of the urban and extra-urban test cycle results, which has been
weighted to take account of the different distances covered during the two tests.
Note:
These figures should not be compared with the figures produced using the ECE/EEC procedure
previously required by The Passenger Car Fuel Consumption Order 1983. Because of the changes
in test procedure, even the urban figures would differ if the same car were subjected to both tests.

192
R

Load carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION REAR LOADSPACE HATCHES
Load carrying

WARNINGS
Do not carry loose items of luggage on
top of the luggage cover - these may
damage the cover or obscure vision, and could
become dangerous projectiles in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
All equipment, luggage or tools carried
in the loadspace should be secured to
minimise the risk of injury to the driver and E80967
passengers in the event of an accident or
emergency manoeuvre. There are access hatches on both sides of the
rear loadspace. On 7-seater models the
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS right-hand side hatch gives access to the
toolkit and the left-hand hatch gives access to
the tow bar.
Pull down the catch (upper inset) and pull the
hatch away from the side of the vehicle.
When refitting the hatch, ensure that it is
securely and correctly fitted before driving.

E80966

Four fixing points are provided in the rear


loadspace floor, to assist in safely securing
large items of luggage. Land Rover provide a
range of approved luggage retention
accessories.

193
L

Load carrying
LUGGAGE COVERS Operating the luggage cover
1. Pull the rigid portion of the blind to unroll
CAUTIONS
the cover.
When retracting the cover ensure that
2. Engage the end pieces into the recessed
nothing is left on top. If any items are left
features moulded into the loadspace sides.
on top, including paper or fabrics, they may be
drawn into the mechanism and cause it to jam. Stowing the luggage cover
If the cover is damaged in any way it
WARNING
should not be used as the damaged area
may prevent the cover from operating When fitting the cartridge in position
correctly. ensure that the paddle returns to the
flush (horizontal) position. Failure to do so
may allow the cartridge to move when the
vehicle is in motion.

E80969

The luggage cover is a tray unit with a


roller-blind type of cover which can be
E80970
extended to cover the rear loadspace.
The luggage cover cartridge can be placed at 1. Disengage the ends from the recess and
either end of the loadspace. The foremost fully retract the cover into the tray unit.
fitting is close behind the second row of seats; 2. Fold the rigid portion of the blind back
the rearmost is behind where the third row of under the unit and press until the edge
seats are in a 7-seat vehicle. engages and is retained.

194
R

Load carrying
Removal and refitting of luggage cover 5-seat vehicle
Note: It is easier to do this if the second row
WARNING
seat backs have been tipped forward.
Do not store the loadspace cover loose
in the vehicle.
When the luggage cover is removed, it must be
stored away from the vehicle.
7-seat vehicle
WARNING
Never fit the luggage cover behind the
second row of seats if the third row is to
be occupied.

CAUTIONS
Remove the stowed unit before moving
the seats.
Do not attempt to raise the second-row
seats into the upright position, or tip
them forward for third-row access, while the
luggage cover is in this stowed position as
damage will result.
E80971 In order to fit the blind into position the third
row seats must be folded down.
1. Pull up the paddle at the right-hand end of
the cartridge; this disengages the locking Once fitted into position in the loadspace sides,
bolt. Lift the right-hand end of the unit and the third row seats must be deployed.
pull it away from the opposite loadspace If the luggage cover is removed from a 7-seat
side. vehicle in order to maximise the loadspace area
2. Installation of the cartridge is the reverse by folding down both second and third rows of
of the removal procedure above. seats, the unit can be stowed in the gap
between the folded-flat second and third row
seats.

195
L

Load carrying

E81919

This is done by lowering the unit into the gap


between the rows of seats and engaging the
unit’s receivers onto the studs protruding from
the outboard portions of the outboard
second-row seat-backs.

196
R

Towing
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing

E80894
The trailer warning indicator
WARNINGS illuminates as a bulb check when
To preserve vehicle handling and the starter switch is turned to
stability, only fit towing accessories position II and extinguishes when the engine is
that have been designed and approved by started.
Land Rover. If a trailer is attached and the direction
Do not use lashing points or vehicle indicators are used, this indicator will flash in
recovery towing points to tow a trailer. time with the direction indicator lamps. If it
Use of the towing eyes for purposes other than does not flash, a faulty trailer bulb is indicated.
their designed intention could result in
damage or injury. Points to remember
• When calculating the laden weight of the
CAUTION trailer, remember to include the weight of
An equalising or other form of weight the trailer plus the load.
distributing hitch should not be used • Vehicles with air suspension: To ensure
with your vehicle. that the towing hitch is at the correct
height before balancing the combination
The torque ranges of Land Rover engines allow
ensure that:
maximum-weight loads to be pulled smoothly
from standstill and reduce gear changing on • All doors are closed.
hills or rough terrain. To avoid excessive clutch • The engine is running.
wear, the use of low range is recommended for • On-road ride height is selected.
manual transmission vehicles when • Where the load can be divided between
manoeuvring heavy trailers or performing hill trailer and tow vehicle, loading more
starts. weight into the vehicle will generally
It is the driver's responsibility to ensure that improve the stability of the combination.
the towing vehicle and trailer are loaded and • Towing regulations vary from country to
balanced, so that the combination is stable country. Always ensure national
when in motion. When preparing your vehicle regulations governing towing weights and
for towing, pay attention to any instructions speed limits are observed (refer to the
provided by the trailer manufacturer as well as relevant national motoring organisation for
to the information that follows. information).

197
L

Towing
Note: When towing do not exceed 100 km/h All towing circuits are independently fused in
(60 mph), or 80 km/h (50 mph) when the the tow hitch fusebox. See FUSE BOX
temporary spare wheel is in use. LOCATIONS (page 254).
Towing weights - Australia only GEAR CHANGING
Australian regulations specify that the weight
To avoid overheating the gearbox, and the
of a trailer must not exceed 1.5 times the
clutch in manual gearbox vehicles, it is not
towing vehicle’s weight.
advisable to tow heavy trailer loads at speeds
Never exceed the towing weights specified in of less than 32 km/h (21 mph) using the main
this section. gearbox in high range. Select low range
instead.
Vehicle weights
WARNING LEVELLING
In the interest of safety, the gross To ensure optimum stability, it is essential that
vehicle weight, maximum rear axle the trailer is level with the ground, with the
weight, maximum trailer weight and tow hitch towing hitch and trailer drawbar set at the same
load (nose weight) must not be exceeded. height (note the illustration at the start of the
Exceeding allowable vehicle and axle loads will section).
increase the risk of tyre and suspension This is particularly important when towing twin
failure, increase vehicle brake stopping axle trailers.
distance and adversely affect vehicle handling • The trailer should be level with the ground
and stability. This may result in a crash or when loaded.
rollover. • The height of the drawbar hitch point
Nose weight should be set so that the trailer is level
when connected to the loaded vehicle.
WARNING
The nose weight, plus the combined
weight of the vehicle's load carrying
area and rear seat passengers, must never
exceed the specified maximum rear axle load.
Trailer socket
The trailer socket is located alongside the rear
towing point and behind the towing point
cover.
The vehicle's electrical system is configured to
support all towing requirements and the
electrical socket fitted will comply with legal
requirements for the specific territory.

198
R

Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Markets except Australia
Tyre pressures Increase rear pressures of towing vehicle to those for
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight conditions.
Nose weight If the vehicle is loaded to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), the
nose weight is limited to 150 kg (330 lb). If a greater nose
weight is necessary (up to 250 kg (550 lb) maximum), vehicle
load should be reduced to ensure the GVW and rear axle
weights are not exceeded.
Breakaway cable or secondary A breakaway cable or secondary coupling must be attached. If
coupling the trailer/caravan is fitted with brakes, it is usual for an
attached breakaway cable to operate the brakes in the event of
the coupling becoming detached. See your trailer
manufacturer's literature. If your trailer does not have a
breakaway cable, a secondary coupling must be attached. Use
a suitable point on the towing bracket to securely attach the
coupling. It is not advisable to loop cables or couplings around
the neck of the tow ball as they could slide off.

Australia only
Tyre pressures Increase rear pressures of towing vehicle to those for
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight conditions.
Nose weight Must be a minimum of 7% of gross caravan/trailer weight, up
to a maximum of 350 kg (772 lb).
Hitch height Must be set with the engine running, so that the caravan/trailer
is level when connected to the vehicle.

199
L

Towing
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Towing weights
Maximum permissible towed weights On-road Off-road
Unbraked trailers 750 kg (1 654 lb) 750 kg (1 654 lb)
Trailers with overrun brakes 3 500 kg (7 716 lb) 1,000 kg (2 205 lb)
Nose weight 150 kg (330 lb) -

Maximum towing/load limits


Gross Train Weight (Weight of Vehicle 6 680 - 6, 30 kg 14 727 - 14 837 lb
plus Trailer with Overrun Brakes)
Roof load (including the weight of roof 75 kg 165 lb
rack)

Note: The gross vehicle weight must not be


exceeded.

DETACHABLE TOW BALL


Stowage
WARNING
The tow ball is heavy. Care must be
taken when handling it.
When handling the tow ball, hold the bottom of
the component. Locking into position occurs
automatically and causes the locking lever to
rotate under spring pressure.
Your vehicle is fitted with a towing housing
which will accept a detachable tow ball.
The following illustrations show a UK and Rest
of the World tow ball. An Australian tow ball is
visually different, but is stowed in exactly the
same place.

200
R

Towing
5-seat models

E82305

7-seat models

E82306

The tow ball is stowed under an access cover


in the loadspace floor (5-seat models) or
behind an access cover on the left-hand side of
the loadspace (7-seat models).

201
L

Towing
Fitting the tow ball

1 4

2 3

E82307

1. Remove the protective cover from the tow 5. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock the
ball mounting and stow it in the tow ball tow ball. Remove the key and store in a
stowage area. safe place.
2. The tow ball can only be installed when the The tow ball must be locked in position before
green locking lever is in the unlocked towing.
position.
3. Insert the tow ball into the mounting and
push firmly upwards until the tow ball
locks into position.
4. The red marker should be completely
covered by the green locking lever.

202
R

Towing
Removing the tow ball

2
3

E82308

1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to


unlock the tow ball.
2. Pull the handle outwards and rotate
counterclockwise until a click is heard. The
marker on the handle should show red.
3. Carefully lower the tow ball and place it in
its stowage area and fully secure it.
4. Replace the protective towing cover in the
tow ball mounting. Press the bottom of the
cover to fix it in position.
Store the tow ball in the stowage area when not
in use.

203
L

Towing
TOW BAR DIMENSIONS
Fixed - tow ball

E81325

Tow ball dimensions


Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial
A Wheel centre to centre of tow ball 1,190 mm 46.9 in.
B Ground to centre of tow ball 409 mm 16.1 in.
C Centre of tow ball to tow bar attachment 170 mm 6.7 in.
D Centre of tow ball to tow bar attachment 124 mm 4.9 in.

Note: Dimensions refer to towing equipment


officially released by Land Rover.

204
R

Towing
Multi-height drop plate - tow bar

H I

D F E
G

B
A

J K

E81326

Tow ball dimensions


Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial
A Wheel centre to centre of tow ball 1,210 mm 47.64 in.
(horizontal)
B Centre of outer attachment points to 403,6 mm 15.89 in.
centre of tow ball (horizontal)
C Centre line of housing bayonet slot tip 192,4 mm 7.57 in.
radius to centre of tow ball (horizontal)
D Centre of inner attachment points to 108 mm 4.25 in.
centre of tow ball (horizontal)

205
L

Towing

Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial


E Centre of inner attachment points to 20 mm 0.79 in.
centre of tow ball (vertical)
F Centre of upper tow ball plate bolt to 36 mm 1.42 in.
centre of tow ball (vertical)
G Centre of lower tow ball plate bolt to 70 mm 2.76 in.
centre of tow ball (vertical)
H Centre of outer attachment points to 167.3 mm 6.59 in.
centre of tow ball (horizontal)
I Centre line of housing bayonet slot tip 174.3 mm 6.86 in.
radius to centre of tow ball (vertical)
J Distance between inner attachment 180.5 mm 7.10 in.
point centres
K Distance between outer attachment 822.5 mm 32.38 in.
point centres

206
R

Vehicle care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Remove heavy deposits of mud and dirt with a
Vehicle care

hose before washing the vehicle.


CAUTIONS Wash the vehicle frequently using a sponge
Some high pressure cleaning systems and generous quantities of cold or lukewarm
are sufficiently powerful to penetrate water containing a suitable car shampoo. Rinse
door/window seals and damage trim and door thoroughly and dry with a chamois leather, or
locks. synthetic substitute.
Never aim the water jet directly at the engine Note: In hot weather, do not wash the vehicle
air intake, heater air intakes, body seals (door, in direct sunlight.
sunroof, windows etc.), or at any components
which may be damaged (lights, mirrors, Cleaning after off-road driving
exterior trim etc.). Ensure that the vehicle and underside is
Do not use a power wash system in the cleaned soon after off-road driving, taking
engine bay area as it may damage fragile particular care to clean areas where mud and
components, electrical systems etc. debris may have compacted.
Ensure that you read and comply with all
warnings and product instructions
supplied with any cleaning products.
Never use cleaning products that are not
approved for use on vehicles.

E81976

Using a hose pipe, direct clean water through


the front bumper (where arrowed) to remove
any build up of mud on the radiator and air
conditioning condenser.
Removing tar spots
Use white spirit to remove tar spots and
E79400 stubborn grease stains from paintwork. Ensure
that after using white spirit, the area is washed
Washing the vehicle immediately with soapy water to remove all
traces of spirit.
CAUTION
Substances that are corrosive, such as
bird droppings, tree resin, dead insects,
tar spots, road salt and industrial fall out can
damage the vehicle's paintwork. Any such
deposits should be removed as soon as
possible to prevent damage to the vehicle's
paintwork.

207
L

Vehicle care
Underbody maintenance CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Corrosive materials used on highways to
CAUTION
control snow and ice, as well as accumulations
from off-road driving or wading in salt water Ensure that you read all of the
can collect on the vehicle's underbody. If these information, and instructions for use,
materials are not removed, accelerated provided with cleaning products.
corrosion can occur. Regularly flush the
Plastic and cloth
underbody with plain water, and pay particular
attention to areas where mud and debris Clean plastic or cloth faced surfaces with warm
collect. water and a non-detergent soap then wipe
clean with a soft cloth.
If damage or corrosion is detected, please have
the vehicle checked by a Land Rover CAUTION
Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as Do not polish instrument panel. Polished
possible. surfaces are reflective, and may interfere
Polishing with the driver's view.
Occasionally treat the paint surface with an Leather
approved polish containing the following
properties: CAUTION
• Very mild abrasives to remove surface Only use cleaning products specifically
contamination without removing or designed for use on leather. The use of
damaging the paint. products which are not approved will
• Filling compounds that will fill scratches invalidate your warranty.
and reduce their visibility. Leather should be cleaned and protected at
• Wax to provide a protective coating least every six months.
between the paint and the elements. Land Rover recommend the use of leather
Note: Do not apply car polish to the unpainted cleaning kit BAC500490. Use only in
areas of the bumper mouldings - polish will accordance with the instructions.
become ingrained in the textured finished. Note: Some materials/fabrics are prone to
dye-transfer which can cause unsightly
Glass and mirrors
discolouration of lighter coloured leathers.
The rear screens and mirror glass should only Affected areas should be cleaned and
be cleaned using soapy water and a soft cloth. re-protected as soon as possible.
This will avoid damaging the reflective surface
of the mirror and the heating elements and Carpet and fabrics
antenna in the rear screen. Only clean with a dilute solution of an approved
Never use abrasive cleaning products or metal upholstery cleaner. It is advisable to test all
ice scrapers on the mirrors or the front/rear cleaners on a concealed area before use.
screens.

208
R

Vehicle care
Instrument pack, clock and radio REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Only use a soft dry cloth to clean the Regularly inspect the paintwork for damage.
instrument panel, clock, and audio equipment. Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
Do not use cleaning fluids or sprays. the bodywork should be repaired promptly.
Seat belts Bare metal will corrode quickly and, if left
untreated can result in expensive repairs.
WARNING Some exterior panels of your vehicle are made
Do not allow any water, cleaners, or of aluminium which will not corrode in the
fabric from cloths to enter the seat belt same manner as steel. However, any damage
mechanism. Any substance which enters the should still receive prompt attention.
mechanism may affect the performance of the Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
seat belt in an impact. touch-up materials available from your Land
Extend the seat belts fully, then use warm Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer. Larger
water and a non-detergent soap to clean. Allow areas of damage will require professional
the seat belts to dry naturally whilst fully repair.
extended.
Note: Whilst cleaning the seat belt, take the
opportunity to examine the webbing for
damage/wear. Any wear or damage should be
reported to, and rectified by a Land Rover
Dealer/Approved Repairer.
Airbag module covers
WARNINGS
Do not allow the airbag covers, or
surrounding areas, to become
contaminated with liquids. Any substance
which enters the mechanism can prevent
correct deployment of an airbag during an
impact.

CAUTION
Airbag covers should only be cleaned
using a slightly dampened cloth, and a
small amount of upholstery cleaner.

209
L

Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION Owner Maintenance
Maintenance

Regular systematic maintenance is the key to CAUTION


ensuring the continued reliability and efficiency
of your vehicle. Any significant or sudden drop in fluid
levels, or uneven tyre wear, should be
Maintenance is the owner's responsibility and reported to a qualified technician without
you must ensure that owner maintenance delay.
operations, oil services, inspections and brake
fluid and coolant changes are carried out when In addition to the routine maintenance, a
required and according to the manufacturer's number of simple checks must be carried out
recommendations. more frequently. Advice is given on the pages
that follow.
The routine maintenance requirements for your
vehicle are shown in the Service Portfolio book. Daily checks
Most of this necessary workshop maintenance • Operation of lamps, horn, direction
requires specialised knowledge and indicators, wipers, washers and warning
equipment, and should preferably be entrusted indicators.
to a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer. • Operation of seat belts and brakes.
Service Portfolio • Look for fluid deposits underneath the
The Service Portfolio book includes a Service vehicle that might indicate a leak.
Record section, which enables a record to be Weekly checks
kept of all the servicing and inspections that are
• Engine oil level. See ENGINE OIL CHECK
carried out on the vehicle. This section of the
(page 219).
book also has an area for brake fluid changes
to be recorded. • Brake fluid level. See BRAKE FLUID CHECK
(page 222).
Ensure your service provider signs and stamps
• Power steering fluid level. See POWER
the book after each service and inspection.
STEERING FLUID CHECK (page 223).
• Screen washer fluid level. See WASHER
FLUID CHECK (page 224).
• Tyre pressures and condition.
• Operate air conditioning.
Note: The engine oil level should be checked
more frequently if the vehicle is driven for
prolonged periods at high speeds.

210
R

Maintenance
Driving in arduous conditions Road testing dynamometers (rolling
When a vehicle is operated in extremely roads)
arduous conditions, more frequent attention Because your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock
must be paid to servicing requirements. brakes and permanent four-wheel drive, it is
For example: If your vehicle experiences deep essential that any dynamometer testing is
wading conditions, even daily servicing could carried out only by a qualified person, familiar
be necessary to ensure the continued safe and with the dynamometer testing and safety
reliable operation of the vehicle. procedures practised by Land Rover
Dealers/Authorised Repairers.
Arduous driving conditions include:
• Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions. Safety in the garage
• Driving on rough and/or muddy roads
WARNINGS
and/or wading.
If the vehicle has been driven recently,
• Driving in extremely hot conditions.
do not touch exhaust and cooling
• Towing a trailer or driving in mountainous system components until the engine has
conditions. cooled.
Contact a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Never leave the engine running in an
Repairer for advice. unventilated area - exhaust gases are
Emission control poisonous and extremely dangerous.
Your vehicle is fitted with various items of Do not work beneath the vehicle with
emission and evaporative control equipment, the wheel changing jack as the only
designed to meet specific territorial means of support.
requirements. You should be aware that Keep your hands and clothing away
unauthorised replacement, modification or from drive belts and pulleys.
tampering with this equipment by an owner or Remove metal wrist bands and
repair shop, may be unlawful and subject to jewellery, before working in the engine
legal penalties. compartment.
In addition, engine settings must not be Do not touch electrical leads or
tampered with. These have been established to components while the engine is
ensure that your vehicle complies with running, or with the starter switch turned on.
stringent exhaust emission regulations. Do not allow tools or metal parts of the
Incorrect engine settings may adversely affect vehicle to make contact with the battery
exhaust emissions, engine performance and leads or terminals.
fuel consumption, as well as causing high
temperatures, which will result in damage to
the catalytic converter and the vehicle.

211
L

Maintenance
Fuel system OPENING AND CLOSING THE
WARNINGS BONNET
Under no circumstances should any Opening the bonnet
part of the fuel system be dismantled or
replaced by anyone other than a suitably
qualified vehicle technician. Failure to comply
with this instruction, may result in fuel spillage
with a consequent serious risk of fire.
Ensure sparks and naked lights are kept
away from the engine compartment.
Wear protective clothing, including,
where practicable, gloves made from
an impervious material.
Poisonous fluids
Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous
and should not be consumed or brought into
contact with open wounds. These include;
battery acid, antifreeze, brake, clutch and E80332
power steering fluid, petrol, diesel, engine oil
and windscreen washer additives. 1. Pull the bonnet release handle located on
the left-hand side of the vehicle.
For your own safety, always read and obey all
instructions printed on labels and containers. 2. Lift the bonnet safety catch lever located
below the centre point of the words LAND
Used engine oil ROVER, and raise the bonnet.
Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause
serious skin disorders, including dermatitis Closing the bonnet
and cancer of the skin. Always wash WARNING
thoroughly after contact.
Do not drive with the bonnet retained by
It is illegal to pollute drains, water the safety catch alone.
courses or soil. Use authorised
waste disposal sites to dispose of Lower the bonnet until the safety catch
used oil and toxic chemicals. engages. Using both hands, press the bonnet
down until the catches click.
Check that both catches are fully engaged by
attempting to lift the front edge of the bonnet.
This should be free from all movement.

212
R

Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW
V8 Petrol engine, left-hand drive
vehicles

2 1 3

4 5 6

E80380

1. Engine oil filler cap


WARNING
2. Engine oil dipstick
While working in the engine
3. Brake fluid reservoir compartment, always observe the
4. Power steering reservoir safety precautions listed under Safety in the
5. Cooling system reservoir garage. See GENERAL INFORMATION
(page 210).
6. Washer reservoir

213
L

Maintenance
V8 Petrol engine, right-hand drive
vehicles

3 1 2

4 5 6

E80381

1. Engine oil filler cap


WARNING
2. Engine oil dipstick
While working in the engine
3. Brake fluid reservoir compartment, always observe the
4. Power steering reservoir safety precautions listed under Safety in the
5. Cooling system reservoir garage. See GENERAL INFORMATION
(page 210).
6. Washer reservoir

214
R

Maintenance
V6 Petrol engine, left-hand drive
vehicles

1 2 3

4 5 6

E80382

1. Engine oil filler cap


WARNING
2. Engine oil dipstick
While working in the engine
3. Brake fluid reservoir compartment, always observe the
4. Power steering reservoir safety precautions listed under Safety in the
5. Cooling system reservoir garage. See GENERAL INFORMATION
(page 210).
6. Washer reservoir

215
L

Maintenance
V6 Petrol engine, right-hand drive
vehicles

3 2 1

4 5 6

E80383

1. Engine oil filler cap


WARNING
2. Engine oil dipstick
While working in the engine
3. Brake fluid reservoir compartment, always observe the
4. Power steering reservoir safety precautions listed under Safety in the
5. Cooling system reservoir garage. See GENERAL INFORMATION
(page 210).
6. Washer reservoir

216
R

Maintenance
V6 Diesel engine, left-hand drive
vehicles

1 2 3

4 5 6

E80384

1. Engine oil filler cap


WARNING
2. Engine oil dipstick
While working in the engine
3. Brake fluid reservoir compartment, always observe the
4. Power steering reservoir safety precautions listed under Safety in the
5. Cooling system reservoir garage. See GENERAL INFORMATION
(page 210).
6. Washer reservoir

217
L

Maintenance
V6 Diesel engine, right-hand drive
vehicles

3 1 2

4 5 6

E80385

1. Engine oil filler cap


WARNING
2. Engine oil dipstick
While working in the engine
3. Brake fluid reservoir compartment, always observe the
4. Power steering reservoir safety precautions listed under Safety in the
5. Cooling system reservoir garage. See GENERAL INFORMATION
(page 210).
6. Washer reservoir

218
R

Maintenance
UNDER BONNET COVERS ENGINE OIL CHECK
The oil consumption of an engine is influenced
Removal
by many factors. Under high loads an engine
will consume more oil than usual. Diesel
engines consume slightly more oil than petrol
engines.
Check the oil level weekly, when the engine is
cold and with the vehicle resting on level
ground.
Checking the oil level
Note: If it is necessary to check the oil level
when the engine is hot, switch off the engine
and let the vehicle stand for five minutes to
allow the oil to drain back into the sump. Do not
start the engine.

E80386

1. Press the two tabs to release the front edge


of the cover.
MAX
2. Lift the front of the cover and slide towards
the front of the vehicle to remove. MIN
Fitting
CAUTION
Ensure that no pipes, cables, or other
items have been trapped between the MAX
cover and casing.
MIN
1. Slide the rear edge of the cover under the
rubber trim fitted to the scuttle panel. E80357

2. Align front edge of cover to casing and 1. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe the blade
press down until the two tabs click into clean with a lint free cloth.
place.
2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdraw
again to check the oil level. Never allow the
oil level to fall below the lower mark or hole
on the dipstick.

219
L

Maintenance
As a general guide, if the level on the dipstick: Engine oil specification
• Is nearer to the upper mark or hole than
the lower, add no oil. Variant Specification
• Is nearer to the lower mark or hole than the Diesel vehicles SAE 5W-30 meeting
upper, add half a litre (one pint) of oil. specification ACEA:B1 or
• Is below the lower mark or hole, add one B3
litre (two pints) of oil and re-check the level Petrol vehicles WSS-M2C913-B ¹
after a further five minutes.
Topping up the oil ¹ If you are unable to find an oil that meets the
specification defined by WSS-M2C913-B, you
CAUTIONS must use an SAE 5W-30 oil meeting
Your vehicle warranty may be invalidated specification ACEA:A3 or specification API SL
if damage is caused by using oil that or SM.
does not meet the required specification.
Failure to use an oil that meets the
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
required specification could cause If the quantity of fluid in the coolant
excessive engine wear, a build up of sludge reservoir drops below the
and deposits, and increase pollution. It could recommended level, an amber
also lead to engine failure. warning indicator in the instrument pack will
illuminate. Stop the vehicle and check the
Overfilling with oil could result in severe
coolant level.
engine damage. Oil should be added in
small quantities and the level re-checked to On vehicles with a message centre, the
ensure that the engine is not overfilled. message LOW COOLANT LEVEL or COOLING
SYSTEM FAULT MONITOR GAUGE will be
1. Unscrew the oil filler cap.
displayed in place of the warning indicator.
2. Add oil to maintain the level between the
MIN and MAX marks or holes on the Checking the coolant level
dipstick. Clean up any oil spilled during
CAUTION
topping-up.
Running the engine without coolant will
3. Check the oil level again after 5 minutes.
cause serious engine damage.
It is essential to use the correct specification
The coolant level in the expansion tank should
oil, and to ensure it is suitable for the climatic
be checked at least weekly (more frequently in
conditions in which the vehicle is to be
high mileage or arduous operating conditions).
operated.
Always check the level when the system is
Note: The approximate quantity of oil required cold.
to raise the level from MIN to MAX on the
dipstick is 1.5 litres (2.64 pints).

220
R

Maintenance

CAUTION
When travelling in territories where the
water supply contains salt, always
ensure you carry a supply of fresh (rain or
distilled) water. Topping up with salt water will
cause serious engine damage.
Top-up to the upper level indicator mark
located above the COLD FILL RANGE text, on
the side of the expansion tank. Use only a 50%
mix of water and Castrol SF antifreeze.
Note: In an emergency - and only if the
approved antifreeze is unavailable - top-up the
cooling system with clean water, but be aware
of the resultant reduction in frost protection.
Do not top-up or refill with conventional
antifreeze formulations. If in doubt consult a
E80387 qualified technician.
Ensure the cap is tightened fully after top-up is
Ensure the coolant level is maintained between
completed by turning the cap until the ratchet
the level indicator marks located above and
cap clicks.
below COLD FILL RANGE, on the side of the
expansion tank. This should be viewed by Antifreeze
standing in front of the vehicle. Ignore any
coolant visible in the top section of the tank. WARNINGS
If the level has fallen appreciably, suspect Antifreeze is poisonous and can be fatal
leakage or overheating and arrange for the if swallowed - keep containers sealed
vehicle to be examined by a qualified and out of the reach of children. If accidental
technician. consumption is suspected, seek medical
attention immediately.
Topping up the coolant If the fluid comes into contact with the
skin or eyes, rinse immediately with
WARNINGS
plenty of water.
Never remove the filler cap when the
engine is hot - escaping steam or CAUTIONS
scalding water could cause serious personal
The use of non-approved antifreeze will
injury.
have an adverse effect on the engine
Avoid spilling antifreeze onto a hot cooling system and therefore engine
engine - a fire may result. durability.
Unscrew the filler cap slowly, allowing
the pressure to escape before removing
completely.

221
L

Maintenance

CAUTIONS Note: If the warning indicator illuminates, or


the message is displayed while the vehicle is
Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;
being driven, stop the vehicle as soon as safety
soak up any spillage with an absorbent
permits by gently applying the brakes.
cloth immediately and wash the area with a
mixture of car shampoo and water. Check and top-up the fluid level if necessary.
Antifreeze contains important corrosion Checking the fluid level
inhibitors. The antifreeze content of the coolant
must be maintained at 50% ± 5% all year round WARNING
(not just in cold conditions). To ensure that the Seek qualified assistance immediately if
anti-corrosion properties of the coolant are brake pedal travel is unusually long or if
retained, the antifreeze content should be there is any significant loss of brake fluid.
checked once a year and completely renewed Driving under such conditions could result in
every ten years, regardless of distance extended stopping distances or complete
travelled. Failure to do so may cause corrosion brake failure.
of the radiator and engine components. With the vehicle on level ground, check the
The specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze fluid level at least every week (more frequently
solution at 20°C (68°F) is 1.068 and protects in high mileage or arduous operating
against frost down to -40°C (-40°F). conditions).

BRAKE FLUID CHECK


WARNINGS
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of the reach
of children. If accidental consumption of fluid
is suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the
skin or eyes, rinse immediately with
plenty of water.
Take care not to spill the fluid onto a hot E80388
engine - a fire may result.
Do not drive the vehicle with the fluid Check the level visually through the side of the
level below the MIN mark. transparent reservoir without removing the
filler cap.
If the quantity of fluid in the brake
The brake fluid level should be between the
reservoir drops below the
MIN and the MAX marks.
recommended level, a red warning
indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate The fluid level may fall slightly during normal
or the message CHECK BRAKE FLUID will be use as a result of brake pad wear but should
displayed in the message centre. not be allowed to fall below the MIN mark.

222
R

Maintenance
Topping up the fluid Checking the fluid level
CAUTIONS CAUTIONS
Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces. The engine must not be started if the
Soak up any spillage with an absorbent fluid level has dropped below the MIN
cloth immediately and wash the area with a mark - severe damage to the steering pump
mixture of car shampoo and water. could result.
Only use new fluid from an airtight Seek qualified assistance immediately if
container (fluid from opened containers there is a large or sudden drop in the
or fluid previously bled from the system will fluid level.
have absorbed moisture, which will adversely If it can be established that fluid loss is slow,
affect performance, and must not be used). then the reservoir may be topped-up to the
1. Clean the filler cap before removing to upper level mark to enable the vehicle to be
prevent dirt from entering the reservoir. driven to a repair facility for examination.
2. Disconnect the electrical lead. Do not drive the vehicle if there is a possibility
3. Unscrew the cap (1/8 turn) and remove. that the leaked fluid will come into contact with
a hot surface, such as the exhaust.
4. Top-up the reservoir to the MAX mark
using Shell DOT4 ESL brake fluid. If Shell Check and top-up the fluid level only with the
DOT4 ESL is not available, a low viscosity engine switched off and the system cold, and
DOT4 brake fluid that meets ISO 4925 ensure that the steering wheel is not turned
class 6 and Land Rover LRES22BF03 after stopping the engine.
requirements may be used.
5. Replace the cap and reconnect the
electrical lead, ensuring that the lead
points to the centre-line of the vehicle.

POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK


WARNINGS
Power steering fluid is highly toxic -
keep containers sealed and out of reach
of children. If accidental consumption of fluid
is suspected, seek medical attention
immediately. E80389

If the fluid comes into contact with the


The level of fluid can be seen through the
skin or eyes, rinse immediately with
translucent body of the reservoir.
plenty of water.
The fluid level should be between the MIN and
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine -
the MAX marks.
a fire may result.

223
L

Maintenance
Topping up the fluid CAUTIONS
CAUTIONS Body panels may suffer discolouration
as a result of screen wash spillage. Take
Power steering fluid will damage painted
care to avoid spillage, particularly if an
surfaces. Soak up any spillage with an
undiluted or high concentration is being used.
absorbent cloth immediately and wash the
If spillage occurs, wash the affected area
area with a mixture of car shampoo and water.
immediately with water.
Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX
If the quantity of fluid remaining in
mark.
the washer reservoir drops to less
1. Clean the filler cap before removing to than one litre, an amber warning
prevent dirt from entering the reservoir. indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate
2. Remove filler cap. or the message LOW WASHER FLUID will be
3. Top-up the reservoir until the fluid level is displayed in the message centre.
between the MIN and MAX marks using
Texaco Cold Climate PAS fluid.
4. Replace filler cap.

WASHER FLUID CHECK


WARNINGS
Some screen wash products are
inflammable, particularly if high or
undiluted concentrations are exposed to
sparking. Do not allow screen wash fluid to
come into contact with naked flames or
sources of ignition. E80390

If the vehicle is operated in


The washer reservoir supplies both front and
temperatures below 40°C (40°F), use a
rear screen washer jets and headlamp washer
washer fluid with frost protection. In cold
jets.
weather, failure to use a washer fluid with frost
protection, could result in impaired vision and Check and top-up the reservoir level at least
increase the risk of a vehicle crash. every week. Always top-up with screen washer
fluid to prevent freezing.
CAUTIONS Operate the washer switches periodically to
Do not use an antifreeze or vinegar/water check that the nozzles are clear and properly
solution in the washer reservoir - directed.
antifreeze will damage painted surfaces, while
vinegar can damage the windscreen washer
pump.

224
R

Vehicle battery
BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS
Vehicle battery

WARNINGS
There is a label on the battery depicting a Battery posts, terminals and related
number of warning signs. The warning signs accessories contain harmful lead and
are as follows: lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
No smoking, no naked flames, no A low maintenance battery specifically
sparks. designed for use with this vehicle is fitted in the
Keep away from children. engine compartment.
The exterior of the battery should be
Shield eyes. occasionally wiped clean to remove any dirt or
grease.
Battery acid. If a new battery is to be fitted, it must be the
same type as the original. The use of
unapproved batteries is not recommended and
Explosive gas.
could invalidate the vehicle warranty.
We recommend that the battery charge is
checked frequently if the vehicle is used mostly
BATTERY CARE for short distance trips or if it is not used for
WARNINGS long periods of time.
Batteries contain acid, which is both Note: The service life of the battery is
corrosive and poisonous. If spillage dependent on its condition of charge. It must
occurs: always be sufficiently charged for the battery to
last an optimum length of time.
On clothing or the skin - remove any
contaminated clothing immediately, flush the
skin with large amounts of water, and seek
medical attention urgently.
In the eyes - flush with clean water
immediately for at least 15 minutes. Seek
medical attention urgently.
Swallowing battery acid can be fatal
unless immediate action is taken - seek
medical attention urgently.
Always wear eye protection when
working around batteries.
For your safety, remove all metal wrist
bands and jewellery before working in
the engine compartment and never allow the
battery terminals or vehicle leads to make
contact with tools or metal parts of the vehicle.

225
L

Vehicle battery
Check and replenish battery electrolyte WARNINGS
WARNING Do not connect positive (+) terminals to
negative (-) terminals, and ensure
Do not allow naked lights near the
booster cables are kept away from any moving
battery (batteries generate hydrogen
parts in the engine compartment.
gas which is highly flammable).
Do not attempt to start the vehicle if the
electrolyte in the battery is suspected of
being frozen.
Do not disconnect the discharged
battery.
Take care when working near rotating
parts of the engine.

CAUTION
Do not push or tow start a vehicle with a
E81572 discharged battery.

Unscrew the six cell plugs. Using booster cables (jump leads) from a
donor battery, or a battery fitted to a donor
Check that the electrolyte is level with the vehicle, is the only approved method of starting
plastic level indicator 1. If necessary, top up a vehicle with a discharged battery.
with distilled water, but do not overfill.
Note: In normal climates this must be carried Boosting from another vehicle
out at least once a year. During hot weather or CAUTION
in hot climates the electrolyte level must be
checked at least every three months. Do not use a 24 volt booster start
system. These produce excessive
Note: If illumination is required, use a hand voltage and can damage the vehicles electrical
held flashlight to inspect the electrolyte level. system.
Refit the six cell plugs.
If a donor vehicle is to be used, both vehicles
should be parked with their battery locations
USING BOOSTER CABLES adjacent to each other. Ensure that the two
WARNINGS vehicles do not touch.
During normal operation batteries emit Apply the electric parking brake and ensure
explosive hydrogen gas - ensure sparks that the transmission of both vehicles is set in
and naked lights are kept away from the engine neutral (P or Park for vehicles with automatic
compartment. transmission).
Make sure both batteries are of the Turn off the starter switch and all electrical
same voltage (12 volts), and that the equipment of both vehicles.
booster cables have insulated clamps and are
approved for use with 12 volt batteries.

226
R

Vehicle battery
Boosting procedure 2. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
end of the red booster cable to the positive
WARNINGS (+) battery terminal.
Do not connect the black cable to the 3. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of
negative terminal of the discharged the black booster cable to the negative (-)
battery. If in doubt, seek qualified assistance. terminal of the battery or the vehicle’s
Ensure that each connection is securely negative (-) connection point.
made and that there is no risk of the 4. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
clips accidentally slipping or being pulled from end of the black booster cable to a good
the connection points/battery terminal - this earth point (e.g. an engine mounting or
could cause sparking, which could lead to fire other unpainted metal surface) at least
or explosion. 0.5m (20 in.) from the battery and well
away from fuel and brake lines.
Check that the cables are clear of any moving
parts of both engines, then start the engine of
+
the donor vehicle and allow it to idle for a few
minutes.
Now start the vehicle with the discharged
+ battery. Once both engines are running
normally, allow them to idle for two minutes
before switching off the donor vehicle engine.
+
Do not switch on any electrical circuits on the
previously disabled vehicle until after the
booster cables have been removed.
Disconnecting the booster cables must be an
exact reversal of the procedure used to connect
+ them, i.e. disconnect the black cable from the
negative (-) connection terminal on the donor
vehicle first.

E80818

Always adopt the following procedure,


ensuring the cables are connected in the order
shown below
1. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of
the red booster cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the battery or the vehicle’s
positive (+) connection point.

227
L

Vehicle battery
CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY Engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) or fit
wheel chocks. See CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS (page 231).
Batteries generate explosive gases, Remove the starter key and wait two minutes
contain corrosive acid and produce for the engine management system to power
levels of electric current sufficient to cause down.
serious injury.
Open the bonnet. See OPENING AND CLOSING
While charging, shield your eyes or THE BONNET (page 212).
avoid leaning over the battery and keep
Disconnect only the negative (-) terminal of the
the area around the top of the battery well
battery.
ventilated.
While charging, always heed the precautions: Reconnecting the battery
• Before charging, disconnect and remove Ensure that everything requiring power from
the battery from the vehicle - charging the the battery - lights, audio, etc - is switched off.
battery with the cables connected may Reconnect the battery lead.
damage the vehicle’s electrical system. Note: If the battery was disconnected while it
• Make sure the battery charger leads are had an insufficient charge to disarm the alarm,
securely clamped to the battery terminals the alarm could sound on reconnecting.
before switching on the battery charger. Operating the remote control or inserting the
Do not move the leads once the charger is key into the starter switch will disarm the
switched on. alarm.
• When charging is finished, switch off the Insert the starter key and turn to position II.
battery charger before disconnecting the
Operate the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to
leads from the battery terminals.
extinguish the amber warning lamp.
Note: Be aware that a battery will take longer to
charge in a cold environment. Effects of battery disconnection
After charging, leave the battery for one hour After reconnecting the battery, a number of the
before reconnecting to the vehicle - this will vehicle systems will be reset automatically.
allow time for explosive gases to disperse, This may take a few minutes. Some systems
thereby minimising the risk of fire or explosion. have to detect certain conditions while the
vehicle is being driven before full operability
Disconnecting the battery returns. This in no way affects the safe
If the vehicle is already locked and alarmed, operation of the vehicle.
you will first have to unlock and disarm it using
the remote control. See LOCKING AND
UNLOCKING (page 47).
Note: If the battery is flat and the vehicle is
locked and alarmed, you will first have to
unlock the left-hand front door using the
starter key.
Insert the starter key and turn it to position II.

228
R

Vehicle battery
Battery warning indicator Replacement
The red warning indicator in the Ensure that the battery is fitted the right way
instrument pack illuminates as a round (terminal posts towards the rear of the
bulb check when the starter switch vehicle) and that the clamping plate is secure.
is turned to position II and extinguishes once Tighten the clamping plate nuts until the
the engine is running. If it remains on, or clamping plate is free from movement, but do
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the not over tighten.
battery charging system is indicated. Seek
Replacement batteries
qualified assistance urgently.
Only fit a replacement battery of the same type
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY and specification as the original - other
batteries could cause a fire hazard when
WARNINGS connected to the vehicle’s electrical system.
Always remove the starter key before
disconnecting the battery. Failure to do Petrol vehicles H7 75 amp/hr
this may cause a failure of the airbag SRS. Diesel vehicles H8 90 amp/hr
Do not reverse the polarity of the
battery - the electrical system may be Battery disposal
damaged if the battery leads are connected to Used batteries should be recycled.
the wrong terminals. However, batteries are hazardous -
you should seek advice about
CAUTIONS disposal from your local authority.
Keep the battery upright at all times -
damage will be caused if the battery is
tilted more than 45 degrees.
Do not run the engine with the battery
disconnected; or disconnect the battery
with the engine running.
Disconnect the negative (-) cable first and then
the positive (+) cable. When reconnecting,
connect the positive cable first and then the
negative cable. Do not allow the battery
terminals to make contact with metal parts of
the vehicle.
Removal
To release the battery from the vehicle, undo
the nuts securing the battery clamping plate
and remove the clamping plate.

229
L

Wheels and tyres


GENERAL INFORMATION
Wheels and tyres

Tyre markings

3 4 5 6
2 7 8
1
9

15
10
14

13 11
12

E80640

1. P indicates that the tyre is for passenger 7. The speed rating denotes the maximum
use. speed at which the tyre should be used for
2. The width of the tyre from sidewall edge to extended periods. †
sidewall edge in millimetres. 8. Tyre manufacturing standard information,
3. The aspect ratio, also known as the profile, which can be used for tyre recalls and
gives the sidewall height as a percentage other checking processes. Most of this
of the tread width. So, if the tread width is information relates to the manufacturer,
205 mm, and the aspect ratio is 50, the place of manufacture etc. The last four
sidewall height will be 102 mm. numbers are the date of manufacture. For
example, if the number was 3105, the tyre
4. R indicates that the tyre is of Radial ply
was made in the 31st week of 2005.
construction.
9. M+S or M/S indicates that the tyre has
5. The diameter of the wheel rim given in
been designed with some capability for
inches.
mud and snow.
6. The load index for the tyre. This index is
not always shown.

230
R

Wheels and tyres


10. The number of plies in both the tread area, CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
and the sidewall area, indicates how many
layers of rubber coated material make up Tool kit location
the structure of the tyre. Information is 5-seat vehicles
also provided on the type of materials
used.
11. Wear rate indicator. A tyre rated at 400 for
example, will last twice as long as a tyre
rated at 200.
12. The traction rating grades a tyres
performance when stopping on a wet road
surface. The higher the grade the better the
braking performance. The grades from
highest to lowest are, AA, A, B, and C.
E80452
13. The maximum load which can be carried
by the tyre. On 5-seat vehicles, the tool kit is located under
14. Heat resistance grading. The tyres a panel set in the loadspace floor.
resistance to heat is grade A, B, or C, with Note: Tool types and positions, may vary from
A indicating the greatest resistance to heat. the illustrations.
This grading is provided for a correctly
inflated tyre, which is being used within it's 7-seat vehicles
speed and loading limits.
15. The maximum inflation pressure for the
tyre. This pressure should not be used for
normal driving. See TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS (page 268).
† Speed ratings

Rating Speed (mph)


Q 99
R 106
S 112
E80453
T 118
U 124 On 7-seat vehicles, the tool kit is stowed
behind an access cover in the loadspace area.
H 130
Note: Take careful note of the stowage position
V 149
of each of the tools as it is important to return
W 168 them to their correct position after use.
Y 186

231
L

Wheels and tyres


Tool kit content Care of the jack
Examine the jack occasionally, clean and
1 grease the moving parts, particularly the screw
2 thread, to prevent corrosion.
To avoid contamination, the jack should always
3 4 be stowed in its fully closed position.
Wheel changing safety
6 WARNINGS
5
If possible, choose a safe place to stop
7
away from the main road.
8 Ensure that the jack will be positioned
on firm, level ground; never on soft
ground, or over metal gratings or manhole
9 covers. Do not place additional material
between the jack and the ground; this may
jeopardise the safety of the jacking operation.
3 Never raise the vehicle with passengers
4 4
10 inside, or with a caravan or trailer
connected!

Note: Switch on the hazard warning lights to


E80454 alert other road users.
1. Screwdriver handle Before changing a wheel, ensure the following:
2. Screwdriver blade • Front wheels are in the straight-ahead
position.
3. Jack screw rotating hook
• Electric parking brake is applied.
4. Extension piece
• Select P (Park) on an automatic
5. Wheel nut brace transmission vehicle or any gear on a
6. Wheel chocks manual transmission vehicle.
7. Wheel change jack (air suspension) • Turn off the starter switch and remove the
8. Locking wheel nut adapter key.
• Engage the steering lock.
9. Jack adapter (coil suspension)
10. Wheel change jack (coil suspension)

232
R

Wheels and tyres


Spare wheel Spare wheel access - 7-seat vehicle
WARNING
The wheels are extremely heavy. Take
care when manoeuvring the spare
wheel.
Always remove the spare wheel before jacking
up the vehicle.
Spare wheel access - 5-seat vehicle

E80457

Note: Before removing the spare wheel, make a


note of the position that it is stowed in. The
wheel which is to be removed from the vehicle
must be correctly stowed in its place.

E80456

233
L

Wheels and tyres


Lowering the spare wheel Note: 7-seat vehicles: The wheel-hoist winch
nut is close to the back of the rear seats. Turn
the wheel nut brace as far as possible
counterclockwise and then rotate the handle
over the top of the nut and continue to turn it.
Releasing the wheel

E80458

E80467

1. Open the spare wheel access hatch in the E80459

loadspace area.
1. Hold the cable and tilt the lifting lug until it
• 5-seat vehicles, remove the jack from
can be lifted through the hole in the wheel,
the tool tray.
as shown in the illustration.
2. Lift the cap covering the spare wheel-hoist
winch nut.
3. Fit the wheel nut brace to the wheel-hoist
winch nut and rotate counterclockwise to
lower the spare wheel. The mechanism has
been designed for use with the wheel nut
brace. Do not use power tools.
4. Continue to turn the wheel-hoist winch nut
until the wheel is on the ground and the
cable is slack. Do not attempt to turn the
winch nut beyond the physical stop.

234
R

Wheels and tyres


Using wheel chocks Raising the vehicle (Air suspension)
WARNING WARNINGS
As an additional safety precaution, it is Always remove the spare wheel before
necessary to chock the road wheels in jacking up the vehicle.
two places before raising the vehicle. Never work beneath the vehicle with the
The wheel chocks are stowed in the tool kit. jack as the only means of support.
Always use the vehicle support stands before
putting any portion of your body beneath the
vehicle.
The jack is designed for wheel changing
only.
Always place the jack on firm, level
ground.
Always position the jack from the side
of the vehicle, in line with the
appropriate jacking point.
Always raise the jack so that the pin in
the head of the jack engages with a hole
E80455 in the chassis rail at the points shown in the
illustrations.
1. If possible, position the vehicle on level
ground, chocking both sides of the wheel Always use the complete, two-piece,
diagonally opposite the one to be removed. jack lever throughout to minimise any
chance of accidental damage or injury.
Note: If jacking the vehicle on a slope is
unavoidable, place the chocks on the downhill Only jack the vehicle using the jacking
side of the two opposite wheels. points described, or damage to the
vehicle could occur.
Note: Before positioning the jack under the
vehicle, ensure that the air suspension is set to
off-road height.
Note: Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor
which activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted
fore and aft, or side to side, after it has been
locked. If you wish to have the doors locked
while jacking up the vehicle, lock the doors by
pressing the lock button on the remote control
twice within three seconds.

235
L

Wheels and tyres


Jacking points

E80460

236
R

Wheels and tyres


Operating the jack 3. Turn the jack lever clockwise to raise the
jack cradle until it engages with the jacking
point. Ensure that the base of the jack is in
full contact with the road surface.
Raising the vehicle (Coil suspension)
WARNINGS
Always remove the spare wheel before
jacking up the vehicle.
Never work beneath the vehicle with the
jack as the only means of support.
Always use vehicle support stands before
putting any portion of your body beneath the
vehicle.
The jack is designed for wheel changing
only.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle
using any position other than the
jacking points illustrated.
Due to the nature of coil suspension
systems, it is not possible to raise the
wheel clear of the road surface by jacking
under the chassis.
Always place the jack on firm, level
ground.
E80462
Always position the jack from the side
1. Attach the jack cranking lever to the jack. of the vehicle, in line with the
Fit the wheel nut brace onto the end of the appropriate jacking point.
cranking lever. Always raise the jack so that the saddle
of the jack head locates securely onto
Positioning the jack
the jacking point on the suspension arm.
1. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
Note: Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor
nut brace to slacken the wheel nuts half a
which activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted
turn counterclockwise.
fore and aft, or side to side, after it has been
2. Position the jack beneath the jacking point, locked. If you wish to have the doors locked
ensuring that the pin on the jack head while jacking up the vehicle, lock the doors by
aligns with the hole in the chassis. pressing the lock button on the remote control
twice within three seconds.

237
L

Wheels and tyres


Jacking points

E80463

238
R

Wheels and tyres


Operating the jack Positioning the jack

E80464

1. Attach the jack cranking lever to the jack


using the adapter. Fit the wheel nut brace E80465
onto the end of the cranking lever.
1. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
nut brace to slacken the wheel nuts half a
turn counterclockwise.
2. Position the jack beneath the relevant
suspension arm.
3. Turn the jack lever clockwise to raise the
jack cradle until it engages with the jacking
point. Ensure that the base of the jack is in
full contact with the road surface.

239
L

Wheels and tyres


Changing a wheel 7. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in an
alternating pattern until all are tightened.
WARNING
• Do not overtighten by using foot
When fitting a wheel, ensure that the pressure or extension bars on the wheel
mating faces of the hub and wheel are nut brace.
clean and free from rust or anti-seize • Wheel nuts should be tightened to a
compound - any accumulation of dirt or rust torque of 140 Nm ± 10 Nm.
could cause the wheel nuts to become loose.
8. Using a suitable blunt tool, apply light
1. Raise the vehicle until the tyre is clear of pressure to the rear of the displaced wheel
the ground. centre cap and remove.
2. Remove the wheel nuts and place to one 9. Using hand pressure only, fit the centre
side to prevent them from being lost. cap into the newly fitted wheel.
3. Remove the road wheel. Do not damage 10. Finally, check the tyre pressure at the
the style surface of the wheel by placing it earliest opportunity.
face down on the road.
Note: During jacking, the air suspension
4. On alloy wheels, use an approved system may enter an automatic freeze state.
anti-seize compound to treat the wheel See AIR SUSPENSION MESSAGES (page 184).
mounting bore. This will minimise any
tendency for adhesion between the wheel Temporary spare wheel
and the bore.
WARNINGS
• Ensure that no compound comes into
Drive cautiously; the temporary spare
contact with the brake components or
wheel tyre is smaller in size and higher
the flat mounting surfaces of the wheel.
in pressure than a regular tyre. It will cause a
• If, due to an emergency situation, this harsher ride and may have less traction on
treatment is not practicable fit the spare some road surfaces. If driving off-road on a
wheel. Remove and treat the wheel at the temporary spare wheel, drive with extra
earliest opportunity. caution.
5. Fit the spare wheel and lightly tighten the The temporary spare wheel is for
wheel nuts, ensuring they are firmly temporary use only. It must be replaced
seated. Do not fully tighten whilst the tyre by a normal-sized wheel and tyre as soon as
is clear of the ground. Ensure that possible.
directional tyres are fitted correctly.
Only one temporary spare wheel is to
6. Ensure that the space under and around be used on the vehicle at any one time.
the vehicle is free from obstructions then
Do not drive at a speed exceeding 80
lower the vehicle and remove the jack and
km/h (50 mph).
wheel chocks.
The tyre pressure in the temporary
spare wheel/tyre should be 420 kPa
(4.2 bar/60 lbf/in²).

240
R

Wheels and tyres

WARNINGS Using the wheel nut brace, unscrew the wheel


nut and adapter.
The temporary spare wheel has a
shorter life than a regular tyre. Replace Be sure to return the locking wheel nut adapter
the tyre with one of the same type and to the correct storage position.
specification. Stowing the changed wheel
The use of snow chains is not permitted
on a temporary spare wheel. WARNING
After wheel changing, always secure Do not stow the wheel while the vehicle
tools, chocks, jack and replaced wheel is still raised on the jack.
in their correct storage positions. Such objects
if not properly stowed can become flying
missiles in a crash or roll-over, potentially
causing injury or death.
Locking wheel nuts
Vehicles may be equipped with a locking wheel
nut on each wheel. These can only be removed
using the special adapter provided in the tool
kit.
Note: A code number is stamped on the
underside of the adapter. Ensure the number is
recorded on the Security Information card
supplied with the literature pack. Quote this
number if a replacement is required. Do not
keep the Security Information card in the
vehicle.

E80459

1. Place the wheel under the rear of the


vehicle with its style surface uppermost.
2. Place the lifting lug through the wheel
aperture and locate it in position.
3. Winch up the wheel using the wheel-hoist
mechanism.
Do not use power tools on the wheel-hoist
E80466
winch.
Insert the adapter firmly onto the locking wheel
nut.

241
L

Wheels and tyres


4. Continue to wind up until the mechanism
clutches out. This is confirmed by a clear CAUTION
physical feedback from the wheel nut Avoid contaminating the tyres with
brace and an audible noise. vehicle fluids as they may damage the
5. Check that the wheel has returned to the tyre.
same position as the spare wheel as Always drive with consideration for the
previously noted. If in any doubt, unwind condition of the tyres, and regularly inspect the
the winch slightly and repeat the previous tread and side walls for any sign of distortion
step. (bulges), cuts or wear.
The wheel must be securely retained in its The way you drive has a great influence on your
correct position by the winch mechanism safety and on the life of your tyres. Cultivate
or it could become loose. good habits for your own benefit:
6. Replace the locking cap over the • Observe posted speed limits.
wheel-hoist nut. As the underside of this • Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
cap is exposed to the same conditions as • Avoid potholes and objects in the road.
the underside of the vehicle, ensure that it
• Do not run over kerbs or hit the tyre
is firmly in place.
against the kerb when parking.
Note: If, for any reason, the spare wheel is not
to be fitted back in its hoist, the wheel hoist Tyre pressures
should be rewound as follows.
WARNINGS
Position the lifting lug level on the cable and
If the vehicle has been parked in strong
wind up the wheel hoist mechanism until it
sunlight or used in high ambient
clutches out.
temperatures, Do not reduce tyre pressures;
instead, move the vehicle into the shade and
TYRE CARE allow the tyres to cool before checking.
WARNINGS Under-inflation causes excessive
Defective tyres are dangerous. Do not flexing and uneven wear to the tyre.
drive if any tyre is damaged, is This can lead to sudden tyre failure.
excessively worn, or is inflated to an incorrect Over-inflation causes a harsh ride,
pressure. uneven tyre wear and poor handling.
If your vehicle loses traction, avoid A hot tyre at or below the
spinning the tyre. The forces created by recommended cold inflation pressure,
rapidly spinning a tyre can cause damage to, is dangerously under-inflated.
and failure of, the tyre structure. Correctly inflated tyres will ensure that you
Never exceed the 50 km/h (30 mph) point enjoy the best combination of tyre life, ride
indicated on the speedometer. comfort, fuel economy and road handling.
Do not allow anyone to stand near to, or
directly behind, a tyre that might spin.

242
R

Wheels and tyres


Under-inflated tyres wear more rapidly, can Checking tyre pressures
seriously affect the vehicle's road handling
characteristics and fuel consumption, as well WARNING
as increasing the risk of tyre failure. Tyre pressures should be checked
Over-inflated tyres give a harsher ride, wear regularly using an accurate pressure
unevenly and are more prone to damage. gauge when cold. Failure to properly maintain
Tyre pressures should be checked at least once your pressures could increase the risk of tyre
a week with normal road use, but should be failure, with consequential loss of vehicle
checked daily if the vehicle is used off-road. control and personal injury.
Check the pressures (including the spare
wheel) when the tyres are cold - be aware that

DISCOVERY
it only takes 1.5 km (1 mile) of driving to warm
MAX. XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
up the tyres sufficiently to affect the tyre XXX/XXRXX
XXX/XXRXX (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
XXX/XXRXX
pressures.

L7MTA
XXX/XXRXX XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
MAX.
Air pressure naturally increases in warm tyres; TXXX/XXRXX XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)

RTC500XXX
if it is necessary to check the tyres when they XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
are warm (after the vehicle has been driven for
a while), you should expect the pressures to
have increased by up to 30 - 40 kPa (0.3- 0.4
bar) (4 - 6 lbf/in²). In this circumstance, Do not A B
let air out of the tyres in order to match the
recommended cold tyre pressures.

E80376

A Left-hand drive vehicle


B Right-hand drive vehicle
The correct tyre pressures are shown on the
label attached to the drivers door sill.

243
L

Wheels and tyres


The following procedure should be used to Tyre wear
check and adjust tyre pressures:
CAUTION
1. Remove the valve cap.
Tyre condition should be checked after
2. Firmly attach a tyre pressure gauge/inflator
off-road use, check to make sure there
to the valve.
are no cuts, bulges, or exposure of the
3. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge. If ply/cord structure.
required add air to the tyre.
4. If air is added to the tyre, remove the gauge
from the valve and re-attach it before
checking that the pressure is correct.
Failure to remove and re-attach the gauge
to the valve could cause the gauge to show E80377
an incorrect reading.
Tyres fitted as original equipment have wear
5. If too much air is added, remove the gauge
indicators moulded into the tread pattern.
from the valve and allow air out of the tyre
When the tread has been worn down to 1.6 mm
by pressing the centre of the valve.
(1/16 in.) the indicators start appearing at the
Reconnect the gauge to the valve and
surface of the tread pattern, producing the
check that the air pressure is correct. If the
effect of a continuous band of rubber across
pressure is still not correct, repeat this
the width of the tyre.
process and re-check.
A tyre must be replaced as soon as an indicator
6. Refit the valve cap.
band becomes visible or the tread depth
Note: It is an offence in certain countries to reaches the minimum permitted by legislation.
drive a vehicle with tyres that are not properly
Note: If tyre wear is uneven (on one side of the
inflated in accordance with the vehicle's proper
tyre only) or becomes abnormally excessive,
use.
the wheel alignment should be checked by your
Valves Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Keep the valve caps screwed down firmly - they Tread depth must be checked regularly (at
prevent dirt from entering the valve. Check the every maintenance service, or more
valve for leaks (listen for a tell-tale hissing) frequently). Always replace a tyre before the
when you check the tyre pressure. tread reaches a remaining depth of 1.6 mm
(1/16 in.). Do not drive with tyres worn to this
limit; the safety of the vehicle and occupants
will be adversely affected.

244
R

Wheels and tyres


Age degradation Replacement tyres
Tyres degrade over time due to the effects of
WARNINGS
ultraviolet light, extreme temperatures, high
loads, and environmental conditions. It is Always use the same make and type of
recommended that tyres are replaced every six radial-ply tyres front and rear. Do not
years, or sooner id required. use cross-ply tyres, or interchange tyres from
front to rear.
Land Rover recommends that even if unused,
the spare tyre be replaced at the same time as Your vehicle is fitted with road wheels
the four road tyres. that will not accept inner tubes. Do not
fit a tubed tyre.
Punctured tyres Do not replace wheels with any type
WARNING other than genuine Land Rover parts.
Wheels and tyres are designed for both
Do not drive the vehicle with a off-road and on-road use and have a very
punctured tyre. Even if the punctured important influence on vehicle handling.
tyre has not deflated, it is unsafe to use as the Alternative wheels which do not meet original
tyre may deflate suddenly at any time. equipment specifications should not be fitted.
Your vehicle is fitted with tubeless tyres, which When using tyres other than those
may not leak if penetrated by a sharp object, recommended by Land Rover, do not
provided the object remains in the tyre. exceed the speed rating recommended by the
If, however, you feel a sudden vibration or ride manufacturer.
disturbance while driving, or you suspect your Wheel rims and tyres are matched to suit the
tyre or vehicle has been damaged, immediately handling characteristics of the vehicle. For
reduce your speed. Drive slowly, while safety, always check that replacement tyres
avoiding heavy braking or sharp steering comply with the original specification and that
inputs, to the closest safe area out of traffic. the load and speed ratings shown on the side
This may further damage the flat tyre, but your wall are the same as that of the original
safety is more important. equipment. Contact your Land Rover
Stop and inspect the tyres for damage. If a tyre Dealer/Authorised Repairer for further
is under inflated or damaged, remove the tyre information or assistance.
and wheel and replace it with the spare wheel. Tyres of the correct size and type, but of
If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle different make have widely varying
recovered to a tyre repair centre, or a Land characteristics. It is therefore recommended
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer to have the that only Land Rover approved tyres are fitted
vehicle inspected. to all wheels.
A puncture will eventually cause the tyre to lose Ideally, tyres should be replaced as sets of
pressure, which is why frequent checking of four, but if this is not possible, replace the tyres
tyre pressures is important. Punctured or as axle sets.
damaged tyres must be permanently repaired
Always have the wheels re-balanced after
or replaced as soon as possible.
replacing tyres.

245
L

Wheels and tyres


Original wheel and tyre combinations High performance wheel and tyre
combinations
Wheel size Tyre size Load index
CAUTIONS
7J x 17 235/70 R17 H 111
This vehicle may be fitted with a high
8J x 18 255/60 R18 H or V 112
performance wheel and low profile tyre
8J x 19 255/55 R19 H or V 111 combination designed to give enhanced dry
road performance with consideration for
Note: Consult your Land Rover Dealer/ aquaplaning resistance.
Authorised Repairer before fitting any Low profile, high speed rated tyres have
accessory wheels or tyres. a softer tread compound. If driven
Accessory wheels and tyres aggressively they may suffer increased tread
wear and a shorter life than can be expected
from other tyre types.
This wheel and tyre combination is
susceptible to damage if driven off road.
This combination has less performance in
snow or ice conditions than M and S tyres
(tires). High performance tyres must be
replaced with winter tyres when weather
1 2 conditions dictate.

3 Flat spots
If the vehicle is stationary for a long period
when the ambient temperature is high, the
E82330
tyres may form flat spots. When the vehicle is
driven these flat spots will cause a vibration
1. Front tyre pressure. which will steadily disappear as the tyres
2. Rear tyre pressure. regain their original shape.
3. Accessory wheel and tyre specification.

E80322

In order to minimise flat spotting, the tyre


pressures can be increased.
Tyre pressures should be increased by 0.14 bar
(14 kPa, 2 lbf/in²) for each 10°C (20°F)
temperature increase.

246
R

Wheels and tyres


Long term storage Pressure compensation for ambient
Flat spotting can be minimised during long temperature changes
term storage by increasing the tyre pressures
to the maximum indicated on the tyre sidewall.
Note: The tyre pressures should be reduced to
the correct pressure before the vehicle is
driven.
Directional tyres

E80321

If the ambient temperature drops, the tyre


pressures will decrease, which may cause
under inflation. This should be taken into
consideration when travelling to, or through,
areas of lower temperature.
Under inflation causes the tyre side wall height
to reduce, which in turn results in uneven tyre
wear, and a risk of tyre failure.
Tyre pressures may be adjusted before setting
off on a journey to, or through, areas of low
temperature. Alternatively, the tyre pressures
E80378 can be adjusted when low temperature areas
are reached.
Directional tyres must be fitted so that they
rotate in the direction that the arrow is pointing Note: If the tyre pressures are to be adjusted in
when the vehicle is moving forward. the lower temperature area, the vehicle should
be left standing for at least one hour prior to
adjustment.
Tyre pressures should be increased by 0.14 bar
(14 kPa, 2 lbf/in²) for each 10°C (20°F)
temperature decrease.

247
L

Wheels and tyres


USING SNOW CHAINS TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not fit unapproved snow chains - WARNINGS
this could damage tyres, wheels, The Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
suspension and brake components and could system is not a substitute for manually
result in damage to the bodywork of the checking tyre pressures. The TPM system only
vehicle. provides a low tyre pressure warning and does
Snow chains are designed for use on not re-inflate the tyres.
hard-surface roads in extreme snow The TPM system cannot register
conditions only, and are not recommended for damage to a tyre. Regularly check the
off-road use. condition of your tyres, especially if the vehicle
Snow chains must not be fitted to a is driven off-road.
temporary spare wheel.
Never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). CAUTION
When inflating tyres, care should be
If it is necessary to fit snow chains to your taken to avoid bending or damaging the
vehicle, always observe the following: TPM system valves. Always ensure correct
• Snow chains can only be fitted to the front alignment of the inflation head to the valve
wheels of vehicles equipped with 17, 18 or stem.
19 inch wheels. Note: Non-approved accessories may interfere
• Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear with the system. If this occurs, TYRE
wheels of any vehicle. PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT will
• Only Land Rover approved chains should be displayed in the message centre.
be used. These have been tested to ensure Note: Different types of tyre may affect the
that they do not cause damage top the performance of the TPM system. Always
vehicle. Contact your Land Rover replace tyres in accordance with
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for recommendations.
information. Your vehicle may be equipped with a TPM
• Always adhere to the snow chain fitting system which monitors pressure in each tyre,
and retensioning instructions and the including the full-size spare tyre. Temporary
speed limitations recommended for spare tyres are not fitted with sensors and are
varying road conditions. consequently not monitored.
• Only fit snow chains in pairs. Note: The TPM system only provides a low tyre
• Avoid tyre damage by removing the chains pressure warning and does not re-inflate the
as soon as the road is free from snow. tyres.
• In some driving conditions, it may be
beneficial to deactivate Dynamic Stability
Control (DSC) in order to maximise
traction.

248
R

Wheels and tyres


If the telltale light illuminates, you should stop
and check your tyres as soon as possible and
1 inflate them to the recommended pressure. If
low pressure warnings occur frequently, the
cause must be determined and rectified.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tyre
causes the tyre to overheat and can lead to tyre
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tyre tread life, and may affect the
2 vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPM system also monitors the full size
spare tyre pressure. If the pressure for the
spare tyre is incorrect, the message CHECK
SPARE TYRE PRESSURE will be displayed,
accompanied by illumination of the warning
E82445 telltale.
When driving through variable climatic
Wheels fitted with a TPM system can be conditions, the TPM system warnings may be
visually identified by the external metal lock nut intermittent.
and valve 1. All Land Rover non-TPM system
wheels have a rubber valve fitted 2. TPM system malfunction
Your vehicle will also indicate a TPM system
TPM system operation
malfunction by initial flashing and subsequent
The TPM system monitors the pressure of the continuous illumination of the warning telltale.
tyres via sensors located in each wheel and a A text message will accompany the system
receiver located within the vehicle. malfunction and will display TYRE PRESSURE
Communication between sensor and receiver MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT. The TPM
is via Radio Frequency (RF) signals. system fault sequence will be activated at every
The tyre pressure warning ignition cycle until the fault is rectified. When a
comprises an amber warning malfunction occurs, the system may not be
indicator (telltale) within the able to detect or signal low tyre pressure as
instrument pack and an associated message intended.
within the message centre. TPM system malfunctions may occur for a
Each tyre, including the spare (if provided), variety of reasons which may include; other
should be checked regularly, when cold, and radio frequency systems causing interference
inflated to the recommended pressure. When or the installation of incompatible replacement
the low tyre pressure warning is indicated, one tyres on the vehicle.
or more of your tyres is significantly
under-inflated. Spare tyre pressure
The full size spare tyre should be inflated to the
highest pressure for the specified tyre size,
when not in use on the vehicle.

249
L

Wheels and tyres


Full size spare wheel and tyre change If the indicator is illuminated, the system is in
Should it be necessary to change a wheel and lightly laden mode and if the indicator is not
tyre with the spare then the system will illuminated then the system is in heavily laden
automatically recognise the change in wheel mode. If the vehicle is to be used heavily laden
positions. The vehicle needs to be stationary or for towing, the tyre pressures must be
for 15 minutes during the wheel and tyre increased to cope with the additional load, and
change, before the system is ready to detect the tyre pressure monitoring system must be
the change in positions. After driving above set into heavily laden mode.
25 km/h (18 mph) any deflation warning will
clear typically within 5 minutes.
Temporary spare wheel and tyre change
If the temporary spare wheel is fitted, the
system will automatically recognise the change
in wheel positions. After approximately ten
minutes of driving above 18 mph (25 km/h), E82387
the message TYRE PRESSURE FRONT (REAR)
RIGHT (LEFT) NOT MONITORED will be This can be accomplished by pressing the TPM
displayed, accompanied by illumination of the system button on the facia for at least four
warning telltale. seconds with the ignition in position ll and the
The warning telltale will initially flash and will engine not running.
subsequently revert to continuous illumination. To indicate that the system has switched to
Extended use of the temporary spare wheel, heavily laden mode, the indicator in the switch
will produce an additional text message TYRE will extinguish and the message TYRE
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT. PRESSURE MONITORING SET FOR HEAVY
This TPM system display sequence will be LOAD will be displayed on the message centre.
activated at every ignition cycle until the When the vehicle load is returned to normal
temporary spare wheel is replaced by a fully and the tyre pressures are reset, the system
operational full size wheel and tyre assembly. should be put back into lightly laden mode by
Always replace the temporary spare wheel pressing the button as before. The indicator in
before having TPM system faults investigated. the switch will illuminate and the message
The fault may well be rectified with the fitment TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SET FOR
of a fully operational full size running tyre in LIGHT LOAD will be displayed on the message
lieu of the temporary spare wheel assembly. centre. This change to and from heavily laden
mode can be operated only when the ignition is
Vehicle loading in position ll and the engine is not running.
It is possible to select different pressure levels
that correspond to the placard pressures for a
lightly laden and a heavily laden vehicle. The
indicator on the TPM system button will
display the system status.

250
R

Wheels and tyres


If a tyre needs to be changed Replacement sensor fitment procedure
Sensor replacement should be carried out by a
CAUTION
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
The valve stem seal, washer, nut, valve
A replacement sensor must be fitted to a
core and cap should be replaced at every
running wheel in order to be recognised by the
tyre change.
TPM system. Recognition only occurs when
The valve stem seal, washer and nut must be the vehicle is driven above 25 km/h (18 mph)
replaced if the valve retention nut is loosened. for approximately ten minutes.
Sensor units and nuts must be refitted using Should the TPM system warning for any wheel
correct torque figures and associated profile. not clear, even after ensuring correct inflation
Sensors can be removed from the wheel by and driving for more than ten minutes above
unscrewing the valve retention nut. 25 km/h (18 mph), consult your Land Rover
Damage to the vehicle may result if these Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
precautions are not taken.
It is recommended that you should always
have your tyres serviced by a dealer or qualified
technician. If a TPM system is fitted, each
wheel and tyre assembly, with the exception of
a temporary spare, is equipped with a tyre
pressure sensor connected to the tyre valve
stem.
In order to avoid damage to the sensor, the
tyres must be removed and refitted to the road
wheel in a specified manner. Care must be
taken to avoid contact between the bead of the
tyre and the sensor during removal and
refitting of the tyre, otherwise the sensor may
become damaged and/or inoperable.

251
L

Wheels and tyres


Messages
The following table lists the messages relating
to tyre pressure monitoring that could appear
in the message centre. Market criteria mean
that some messages will not apply to your
vehicle and will therefore not appear.
Message Meaning What to do?
CHECK ALL Advisory message, pressure in Check tyre pressures.
TYRE PRESSURES a running tyre decreased to
first warning threshold.
CHECK Pressure in spare tyre Check pressure of spare tyre.
SPARE TYRE decreased to warning
PRESSURE threshold.
TYRE PRESSURE Possible loss of RF Seek assistance immediately.
NOT MONITORED transmission or defective
sensor battery.
TYRE PRESSURE Pressure in a running tyre too Adjust to correct pressure as
TOO HIGH high, threshold reached. soon as possible.
TYRE PRESSURE Pressure in a running tyre Adjust to correct pressure as
VERY LOW decreased to warning soon as possible.
threshold.
TYRE PRESSURE TPM system fault has Seek qualified assistance
MONITORING occurred. immediately.
SYSTEM FAULT
TYRE PRESSURES Adjust to correct pressure as
TOO HIGH soon as possible.
TYRE PRESSURES Adjust to correct pressure as
VERY LOW soon as possible.
TYRE PRESSURE Indicates the system is set to Ensure setting is correct for the
MONITORING SET FOR HEAVY monitor the tyre pressures for current tyre pressures and
LOAD a heavily laden condition. loading conditions.
TYRE PRESSURE Indicates the system is set to Ensure setting is correct for the
MONITORING SET FOR LIGHT monitor the tyre pressures for current tyre pressures and
LOAD normally laden conditions. loading conditions.

252
R

Wheels and tyres


TYRE GLOSSARY Production options weight
The combined weight of options installed
Terms used which weigh in excess of 1.4 kg (3 lb) more
lbf/in² than the standard items that they replaced, and
Pounds per square inch, an imperial unit of are not already considered in kerb or accessory
measure for pressure. weights. Items such as heavy duty brakes, high
capacity battery, special trim etc.
kPa
Vehicle capacity weight
Kilo Pascal, a metric unit of measure for
pressure. The number of seats multiplied by 68 kg
(150 lb) plus the rated amount of load/luggage.
Cold tyre pressure
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The air pressure in a tyre which has been
standing in excess of three hours, or driven for The sum of kerb weight, accessory weight,
less than one mile. vehicle capacity weight, and production
options weight.
Maximum inflation pressure
Rim
The maximum pressure to which the tyre
should be inflated. This pressure is given on The metal support for a tyre, or tyre and tube,
the tyre side wall in lbf/in² and kPa. upon which the tyre beads are seated.
Note: This pressure is the maximum allowed Bead
by the tyre manufacturer. It is not the pressure The inner edge of a tyre that is shaped to fit to
recommended for use. See TECHNICAL the rim and form an air tight seal. The bead is
SPECIFICATIONS (page 268). constructed of steel wires which are wrapped,
or reinforced, by the ply cords.
Kerb weight
The weight of a standard vehicle, including a
full tank of fuel, any optional equipment fitted,
and with the correct coolant and oil levels.
Gross vehicle weight
The maximum permissible weight of a vehicle
with driver, passengers, load, luggage,
equipment, and tow ball load.
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those items
replaced) of items available as factory installed
equipment.

253
L

Fuses
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS Engine compartment fuse box
Fuses

E80810
2
Remove the plastic cover by pressing the tabs.
The fuse values and locations and the circuits
protected are shown on the plastic cover.

E82383

1. Engine compartment fuse box.


2. Passenger compartment fuse box.
3. Tow hitch fuse box.
Note: The engine and passenger compartment
fuse boxes are always fitted on the passenger
side of the vehicle.

254
R

Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse box Tow hitch fuse box

E80791

The supplementary fuse box that protects the


tow hitch circuits, is located behind the
left-hand panel in the luggage compartment.

CHANGING A FUSE
WARNINGS
Fit Land Rover approved replacement
fuses of the same rating and type.
E80809
Incorrect fuse ratings may overload a system
The passenger compartment fuse box is fitted and cause a fire or malfunction. No attempt
behind the glovebox. To access the fuses, open should be made to repair a fuse that has
the glovebox and then pinch the top of the blown.
support stays (arrowed), and lower the Always rectify the cause of the failure
glovebox into the footwell. before replacing a fuse. Seek qualified
A label on the rear of the glovebox shows the assistance if necessary.
circuits protected, the fuse values and their Fuses are simple circuit breaker devices which
locations. protect electrical equipment against the effects
of excess current.
A blown fuse is indicated when the electrical
equipment it protects becomes inoperative.
Always turn the starter switch to position 0 and
switch off the affected electrical circuit before
removing a fuse.

255
L

Fuses

E81022

The fuse removal tweezers are located in the


passenger compartment fuse box. Place the
tweezers onto the head of the suspect fuse (as
shown), squeeze the middle (arrowed) and pull
to remove. A break in the wire inside the fuse
indicates that the fuse has blown.
Note: Owners are advised against removing or
replacing the relays (identified as R1-R19 on
the relays) and fusible links (identified as
FL1-FL20 on the fusible links) in the engine
compartment fuse box. Failure of any of these
items should be investigated by a qualified
technician.

256
R

Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine compartment fuse box

F1 XX XX F2

F3 XX XX F4

F5 XX XX F6

F7 XX XX F8

F9 XX XX F10

F11 XX XX F12

F13 XX XX F14

F15 XX XX F16

F17 XX XX F18

F19 XX F20

F21 XX F22

F23 XX XX F24

F25 XX XX F26

F27 XX XX F28

F29 XX XX F30
E81432

Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected


1 25 White Fuel pump
2 - - -
3 5 Tan Air suspension ECU
4 25 White Diesel EMS (ECM and fuel pump relay control)
5 10 Tan Petrol EMS (purge valve, EGR, inlet manifold tune valve),
E-box fan
6 15 Blue Petrol EMS (ignition coils)
6 15 Blue Diesel EMS (sensors and glow plug relay control)
7 25 White Front seat heater
8 25 White Rear seat heater
9 - - -
10 15 Blue Petrol EMS (throttle motor, MAF), cooling fan
10 15 Blue Diesel - cooling fan

257
L

Fuses

Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected


11 15 Blue Petrol EMS (rear oxygen sensors)
12 10 Red Heated washer jets
13 10 Red Petrol EMS (ECM, VVTs and fuel pump relay control)
13 10 Red Diesel EMS (PCV, VCV)
14 20 Yellow Petrol EMS (front oxygen sensors)
15 30 Green Heated front screen
16 10 Red Heated door mirrors
17 15 Blue Petrol EMS (injectors)
17 15 Blue Diesel EMS (MAF, EGR), E-Box fan
18 30 Green Heated front screen
19 - - -
20 5 Tan Alternator
21 - - -
22 30 Green Rear blower
23 25 White Dynamic Stability Control system
24 20 Yellow Petrol - brake boost pump
25 10 Red Lighting switch
26 20 Yellow Air suspension ECU
27 5 Tan Engine Control Module (ECM)
28 20 Yellow Diesel - auxiliary heater
29 30 Green Front wipers
30 10 Red Auto transmission ECU

258
R

Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse box

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

XX
XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX
F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22

XX
XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX
F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32 F33 F34
XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX
XX

XX

XX

XX

XX
F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 F47 F48
XX
XX

XX
XX

XX
XX

XX

XX

XX

XX
XX

XX

XX
F49 F50 F51 F52 F53 F54 F55

XX
XX

XX

XX

XX

XX
XX
F56 F57 F58 F59
XX

XX

XX

XX

F60 F61 F62 F63


XX

XX

XX
XX

F64 F65 F66


XX

XX

XX

F67 F68 F69


XX

XX

XX

XX XX
SPARES

XX XX

XX XX
E81433

Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected


1 10 Red Interior lamps - glovebox lamp, vanity mirror lamp, map
lamps, switchable roof lamps.
Electric seats (non memory)
2 10 Red Right-hand side lamps
3 - -
4 10 Red Left-hand side lamps
5 10 Red Reverse lamps
6 10 Red Trailer reverse lamp
7 25 White Driver’s window
8 30 Green Trailer pick-up (battery feed)

259
L

Fuses

Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected


9 5 Tan Airbags
10 - - -
11 15 Blue Washer pump
12 15 Blue Horn
13 25 White Heated rear window
14 10 Red Trailer side lamp
15 15 Blue Brake lamps, Brake switch
16 10 Red Powerfold mirror
17 20 Yellow Rear right-hand window
18 5 Tan Rain sensor, ambient light sensor (auto lamps)
19 15 Blue Auxiliary power socket - 2nd row seats
20 15 Blue Sunroof
21 25 White Passenger window
22 10 Red Trailer pick-up (ignition feed)
23 - - -
24 5 Tan Transfer box - centre differential, Terrain Response
25 5 Tan Engine Control Module (ECM)
26 5 Tan Battery back-up sounder
27 10 Red Adaptive front lighting, Headlamp levelling
28 5 Tan Fuse box engine compartment - ignition
29 30 Green Passenger electric seat
30 - - -
31 20 Yellow Rear left-hand window
32 15 Blue Rear fog lamps
33 5 Tan Mirror adjust, Automatic transmission selector
34 15 Blue Auxiliary power socket - front seats
35 5 Tan Air suspension ECU
36 5 Tan Park Distance Control, Tyre Pressure Monitoring system
37 5 Tan Dynamic Stability Control
38 15 Blue Front fog lamps
39 5 Tan Instrument pack
40 5 Tan Key-in sense

260
R

Fuses

Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected


41 5 Tan Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
42 30 Green Audio amplifier
43 10 Red Radio frequency receiver, Tyre Pressure Monitoring
system
44 5 Tan Automatic transmission selector
45 - - -
46 30 Green Drivers electric seat
47 15 Blue Auxiliary power socket - 3rd row seats
48 15 Blue Rear wiper
49 30 Green Central door locking
50 10 Red Electric fuel flap actuator
51 10 Red Climate control ECU
52 5 Tan Telephone, traffic message centre
53 15 Blue Multi-media module, audio unit, DVD player,
Video Display
54 5 Tan Electric seat - memory
55 15 Blue Cigar lighter
56 10 Red Adaptive front lighting (left-hand unit)
57 10 Red Rear seat entertainment module
58 10 Red Telephone, touch screen display, multi-media module, TV
tuner
59 10 Red Cubby box cooler
60 5 Tan Engine Control Module (ECM)
61 10 Red Adaptive front lighting (right-hand unit)
62 5 Tan Low beam, auto lamps
63 10 Red Diagnostic socket
64 5 Tan Automatic transmission ECU
65 - - -
66 5 Tan HDC switch, Brake switch, Steering angle sensor, DSC
switch
67 5 Tan Auto lamps
68 5 Tan Instrument pack
69 5 Tan Auto dimming interior mirror

261
L

Fuses
Tow hitch fuse box

1
2
3
4
5
6
E81903

Fuse Ampere rating Colour Circuits protected


1 7.5 Brown Brake lamp
2 15 Blue Ignition feed
3 15 Blue Battery feed
4 7.5 Brown Rear fog lamps
5 5 Tan Right-hand tail lamp
6 5 Tan Number plate and left-hand tail lamp

262
R

Vehicle recovery
TOWING POINTS Front towing point cover
Vehicle recovery

WARNINGS
The towing points at the front and rear
of the vehicle are designed for on-road
vehicle recovery purposes only and must not
be used to tow a trailer or caravan.
Use of the towing points for purposes
other than their designed intention
could result in damage or injury.
Front towing point
A front towing point, is set behind a removable
cover in the lower front bumper.
Before driving off-road, remove the cover as a
precaution against accidental loss.

E80776

1. Rotate each of the fasteners 90 degrees


counterclockwise with a coin (or
something similar).
2. Lower the top edge and then pull the cover
forward to remove it.
3. Offer up the cover and ensure that the two
lugs on the bottom edge engage with the
holes in the body panel.
4. Turn each fastener 90 degrees clockwise
to secure the cover.

263
L

Vehicle recovery
Rear towing point 4. Offer up the cover and ensure that the four
The towing point provided at the rear of the hooks on the top edge engage with the
vehicle can be used to tow your vehicle, or holes in the body panel.
another vehicle, in recovery situations. 5. Turn each fastener 90 degrees clockwise
Before driving off-road, remove the cover as a to secure the cover.
precaution against accidental loss.
LASHING POINTS
Rear towing point cover
CAUTION
If the vehicle electronics are operational,
the air suspension must be set to access
height before securing the vehicle to a trailer.
See ADJUSTING THE SUSPENSION
(page 180).
Note: The front and rear lashing points are for
lashing only and must not be used for towing.
Front lashing points

E80777

1. Rotate each of the fasteners 90 degrees E80779


counterclockwise with a coin (or
something similar) to release the lower
edge.
2. Rotate the cover to release the hooks at the
top.
3. Remove the cover.

264
R

Vehicle recovery
Rear lashing points
CAUTIONS
Under no circumstances can the vehicle
be towed with only two wheels on the
ground. It must be towed with all four wheels
on the ground, recovered onto a trailer, or
have a combined wheel lift and dolly
arrangement, to lift it clear of the ground.
When preparing to tow the vehicle on
four wheels, ensure that neutral N is
selected and the parking brake is applied.
The vehicle can be towed for a maximum
distance of only 50 km (30 miles) at a
E80780 maximum speed of 50 km/h (30 mph). If the
Two pairs of lashing points for insertion of stated distance or speed is exceeded,
appropriate hooks are fixed to the underside of transmission damage may occur.
the vehicle. Do not secure lashing hooks to any
Do not be tow the vehicle if the gearbox
other part of the vehicle.
cannot be set in neutral or the rear
electronic differential has failed in the locked
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE position.
Recovery by trailer is the recommended
Your vehicle has permanent four-wheel drive
method. Most vehicle recovery specialists will
and is fitted with a steering lock. The following
load the vehicle onto a trailer, or have a
procedure must be carried out carefully to
combined wheel lift and towing dolly
prevent damage to the vehicle:
arrangement to lift it clear of the ground.
1. Secure the towing attachment from the
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR recovery vehicle to the front towing point.
WHEELS 2. With the parking brake applied, insert the
starter key and turn it to position II.
WARNINGS 3. Apply the foot brake and place the gear
Do not remove the starter key or turn lever into neutral.
the starter switch to position 0 while the
4. Turn the starter switch to position I. Do not
vehicle is moving as this will lock the steering.
turn the starter switch to position O.
Without the engine running, greater
5. The starter switch may be turned to
effort will be required to operate the
position II, to operate the brake lamps and
brake pedal and steering wheel. Longer
direction indicators. Leaving the starter
stopping distances will also be experienced.
switch in position I or II may drain the
vehicle battery.
6. Release the parking brake before towing
the vehicle.

265
L

Vehicle recovery
After towing on four wheels
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the starter switch to position II and
apply the foot brake.
3. Place the auto selector lever in the Park
position.
4. Turn the starter switch to position O.
5. Remove the towing attachment and fit the
cover to the front towing point.

266
R

Vehicle identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Vehicle identification

(VIN)
If you need to communicate with a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, you may be asked
to quote the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).

E82503

The VIN is stamped on a plate which is visible


through the lowest part of the left side of the
windscreen (this should match the VIN
recorded in the Service Portfolio book). VIN
information may also be found in areas such
as: Bonnet locking platform, Suspension tower
and Door shut faces.

267
L

Technical specifications
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Technical specifications

V6 Diesel

Capacity 2 720 cm³


Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Bore 81.0 mm
Stroke 88.0 mm
Number of cylinders 6
Compression ratio 17.3:1

V8 Petrol

Capacity 4 394 cm³


Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Bore 88.0 mm
Stroke 90.3 mm
Number of cylinders 8
Compression ratio 10.5:1
Spark plugs NGK IFR5N10
Spark plug gap Non-adjustable

V6 Petrol

Capacity 4 009 cm³


Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Bore 100.4 mm
Stroke 84.4 mm
Number of cylinders 6
Compression ratio 9.7:1
Spark plugs Motorcraft AGSF 24 PM
Spark plug gap Non-adjustable

268
R

Technical specifications
Weights

Approximate EEC kerb weights (full fuel Metric Imperial


tank)
- Petrol engine vehicles 2 486 - 2 704 kg 5 315 - 5 796 lb
- Diesel engine vehicles 2 494 - 2 718 kg 5,498 - 5 992 lb
Maximum gross vehicle weight 3 180 - 3 230 kg 7 011 - 7 121 lb
Maximum front axle load 1 450 kg 3 197 lb
Maximum rear axle load 1 840 - 1 855 kg 4 056 - 4 090 lb

Note: Axle weights are non-additive. The


individual maximum axle weights and gross
vehicle weight must not be exceeded.

269
L

Technical specifications
Dimensions - Air suspension vehicles

C D H
G E
E81324
A F

Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial


A Overall width 2 191 mm 86.26 in.
Overall width (mirrors folded) 2 009 mm 79.09 in.
B Overall height
- Access height 1 887 mm 72.32 in.
- Standard height 1 837 mm 74.29 in.
- Off-road height 1 942 mm 76.46 in.
C Approach angle (at EEC kerb weight and 37.2°
off-road height)
D Ramp breakover angle (at EEC kerb 124.2°
weight and off-road height)
E Wheelbase 2 885 mm 113.6 in.
F Overall length 4 848 mm 190.9 in.
Overall length (including tow hitch - to 4 913 mm 193.4 in.
centre of tow ball)
G Track:
- Front 1 605 mm 63.2 in.
- Rear 1 612.5 mm 63.5 in.
H Departure angle without tow hitch (at 29.6°
EEC kerb weight and off-road height)
Departure angle with tow hitch (at EEC
kerb weight):
- Standard ride height 15.7°
- Off-road ride height 18.5°

270
R

Technical specifications

Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial


Wading depth
- Standard height 600 mm 24 in.
- Off-road height 700 mm 28 in.
Minimum ground clearance (off-road 240 mm 9.44 in.
height)
Maximum gradient, nose up/down
- Continuous operation 35°
- Drive-through 45°
Turning circle 11.45 metres 37.56 ft
Wheel alignment (total)
- Front -0.16° ± 0.2° -10' ± 12'
- Rear 0.16° ± 0.2° 10' ± 12'
Brake pedal free travel Not adjustable
Clutch pedal free travel Not adjustable

271
L

Technical specifications
Dimensions - Coil spring suspension
vehicles

C D H
G E
E81324
A F

Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial


A Overall width 2 191 mm 86.26 in.
Overall width (mirrors folded) 2 009 mm 79.09 in.
B Overall height 1 887 mm 74.29 in.
C Approach angle (at EEC kerb weight) 32.2°
D Ramp breakover angle (at EEC kerb 157.2°
weight)
E Wheelbase 2 885 mm 113.6 in.
F Overall length 4 848 mm 190.9 in.
Overall length (including tow hitch - to 4 913 mm 193.4 in.
centre of tow ball)
G Track:
- Front 1 605 mm 63.2 in.
- Rear 1 612.5 mm 63.5 in.
H Departure angle without tow hitch (at 24.9°
EEC kerb weight)
Departure angle with tow hitch (at EEC 15.7°
kerb weight)
Wading depth 600 mm 24 in.
Minimum ground clearance (off-road 240 mm 7.3 in.
height)
Maximum gradient, nose up/down
- Continuous operation 35°
- Drive-through 45°

272
R

Technical specifications

Ref. Dimension Metric Imperial


Turning circle 11.45 metres 37.56 ft
Wheel alignment (total)
- Front -0.16° ± 0.2° -10' ± 12'
- Rear 0.16° ± 0.2° 10' ± 12'
Brake pedal free travel Not adjustable
Clutch pedal free travel Not adjustable

273
L

Type approvals
TYPE APPROVALS
Type approvals

The Declarations of Conformity are from


manufacturers of RF (Radio Frequency)
equipment, whose components are used in the
manufacture of your Discovery 3.
These manufacturers state that their
components comply with relevant rules of the
R and TTE (Radio and Telecommunication
Terminal Equipment) directive.
The directive requires the manufacturer of
short range radio devices to self-certify that RF
parts fitted to Land Rover vehicles are fit for
use and that the declarations are supplied with
the vehicle documentation. If at a future date a
technical inspection is required, the
declarations will provide all necessary
information.
Note: The Declarations of Conformity are
published in the native language of the RF
equipment manufacturer, in compliance with
the R and TTE Directive.

274
R

Type approvals

E81268

275
L

Type approvals

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Trade Name: Model No:
Connaught Electronics Ltd. LQN5752
Canadian 2306A-5752
Tested to comply Model 5752 by Connaught Electronics
FCC Standards 15B Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE operation of the device.

This declaration is the responsibility of the manufacturer / authorised representative within the
Community:

Supplier
Connaught Electronics Ltd.
Supplier Address
Dunmore Road,
Tuam
Co. Galway,
Ireland

This certifies that the following designated product


T5 RECEIVER 315MHZ PART NO. 5752
...................................
(Product identification)

complies with the essential protection requirements of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ EC on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to Radio Spectrum Matters, EMC
and Electrical Safety.
This declaration applies to all specimens manufactured in accordance with the technical
documentation described in the annex II. Connaught Electronics Ltd. keep this documentation
at the proposal of the relevant national authorities of any Member State for inspection
purpose.
Assessment of compliance of the product with the requirements relating to the essential
requirements acc. to Article 3 R&TTE was based on Annex IV of the Directive 1999/5/ EC
and the following standards:

Radio Spectrum : ................EN 300 220-1.....................................................................................


(Identification of regulations / standards)

EMC : .................EN 300 683 .............................................................


(Identification of regulations / standards)

Safety : .................EN 60950............................................................................................


(Identification of regulations / standards)

(Place, date) (Signature)

Tuam, Ireland

16/03/2004

E81269

276
R

Type approvals

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

0682
This declaration is the responsibility of the manufacturer / authorised representative within the
Community:

Supplier
Connaught Electronics Ltd.
Supplier Address
Dunmore Road,
Tuam
Co. Galway,
Ireland

This certifies that the following designated product


T5 RECEIVER 433MHZ PART NO. 5751
...................................
(Product identification)

complies with the essential protection requirements of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ EC on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to Radio Spectrum Matters, EMC
and Electrical Safety.
This declaration applies to all specimens manufactured in accordance with the technical
documentation described in the annex II. Connaught Electronics Ltd. keep this documentation
at the proposal of the relevant national authorities of any Member State for inspection
purpose.
Assessment of compliance of the product with the requirements relating to the essential
requirements acc. to Article 3 R&TTE was based on Annex IV of the Directive 1999/5/ EC
and the following standards:

Radio Spectrum : ................EN 300 220-1.....................................................................................


(Identification of regulations / standards)

EMC : .................EN 300 683 .............................................................


(Identification of regulations / standards)

Safety : .................EN 60950............................................................................................


(Identification of regulations / standards)

(Place, date) (Signature)

Tuam, Ireland

16/03/2004

E81270

277
L

Type approvals

E82488

278
R

Type approvals

E82489

279
L

Type approvals

E82490

280
R

Type approvals

E82491

281
L

Type approvals

E82492

282
R

Audio introduction
RADIO RECEPTION
Audio introduction

E81779

Your audio unit receives signals whilst on the FM Signals travel in a straight line, so large
move, and may experience widely differing obstacles, such as tall buildings, can shield the
reception characteristics. Because of this, vehicle from the signal causing distortion or
some interference is to be expected from time loss of reception (known as dead spots).
to time during a journey. Distortion can also occur if FM signals received
FM transmitters can only broadcast over a directly from the transmitter, mix with signals
limited range, and good clear signals will only deflected by obstructions such as mountains,
be received in the immediate area of the hills, and tall buildings. This is known as
transmitter. When travelling, occasionally it multi-path distortion.
may be necessary to re-tune the audio unit to Note: Although distortion, interference and
offset the effects of moving from one lack of signal clarity are sometimes attributed
transmitter area to another. to a fault in the radio, this is rarely the case.
While RDS automatic retuning helps to reduce
the effects of signal changes, some manual
retuning may still be required (especially for
local stations) in areas of weak reception.
The broadcast range for good stereo reception
is within approximately 48 - 64 km (30 - 40
miles) of the transmitter.

283
L

Audio unit overview


AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW
Audio unit overview

Standard audio unit

1 2

18
FM1 14 : 54
17 2 BBC R4
TA PTY NEWS

16
15

14 3

13 4

E81803 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
1. Radio station pre-sets 10. Manual tuning/scan down button
2. Information display screen • Radio station manual rearward search
3. Audio menu button: • Compact disc scan down
• Access 11. Automatic rearward tuning/search button
• Save • Radio station automatic rearward search
• Close • Compact disc rearward search
4. Audio menu button: 12. On/off and volume control
• Back • Press to switch on/off
• Exit • Rotate to change volume
5. Audio menu control 13. Traffic information (TA) or News button
• Rotate to scroll through options • Short press for Traffic announcements
• Press to enable or disable the function • Long press for News announcements
6. Automatic forward tuning/search button 14. Tone and volume settings button
• Radio station automatic forward search • Short press for tone settings menu
• Compact disc forward search • Long press for volume settings menu
7. Manual tuning/scan up button 15. Auxiliary input mode button
• Radio station manual forward search 16. Compact disc player mode button
• Compact disc scan up 17. AM waveband button
8. Compact disc slot 18. FM waveband button
9. Compact disc eject button

284
R

Audio unit overview


Premium audio unit

1 2

19 1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465

18 4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
FM A 14 : 54
17 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ 2 97.9 Radio 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA PTY NEWS
16 0 3

15 4

14 5

E81804 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
1. Input keypad 9. Compact disc slot
• Function (frequency, track number, 10. Compact disc eject button
telephone numbers, text etc.) 11. Manual tuning/scan down button
2. Information display screen • Radio station manual rearward search
3. Telephone mode button • Compact disc scan down
4. Audio menu button: 12. Automatic rearward tuning/search button
• Access • Radio station automatic rearward search
• Save • Compact disc rearward search
• Close 13. On/off and volume control
5. Audio menu button: • Press to switch on/off
• Back • Rotate to change volume
• Exit 14. Traffic information (TA) or News button
6. Audio menu control • Short press for Traffic announcements
• Rotate to scroll through options • Long press for News announcements
• Press to enable or disable the function 15. Tone and volume settings button
7. Automatic forward tuning/search button • Short press for tone settings menu
• Radio station automatic forward search • Long press for volume settings menu
• Compact disc forward search 16. Auxiliary input mode button
8. Manual tuning/scan up button 17. Compact disc player mode button
• Radio station manual forward search 18. AM waveband button
• Compact disc scan up
19. FM waveband button

285
L

Audio unit operation


ON/OFF CONTROL VOLUME CONTROL
Audio unit operation

FM A 14 : 54 Audio Volume
2 97.9 Radio 1 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA PTY NEWS 1 2 3 4 5 6

E81870 E81863

Press the volume control to switch the audio With the engine running, rotate the volume
unit on. Press again to switch off. control to increase or decrease the audio unit
volume. The volume can be set between 0 and
35. The audio unit can be used with the engine
switched off, but the volume available is
restricted.
When the audio unit is turned on, the
previously set volume level will be
implemented, provided that it is suitable for the
prevailing conditions. If the previously set
volume is too quite or too loud, a suitable level
will be implemented automatically.
In addition to setting the volume of the audio,
the volume control is used to adjust the
following features:
• Automatic Volume control (AVC)
• Information volume offset
• Navigation volume offset
• Phone volume
• Voice volume
• Reset volume settings

286
R

Audio unit operation


Automatic Volume control (AVC) Information volume offset

OFF Info Vol Offset


INFO
+6
1 2 3 4 5 6

AVC Level
4
1 2 3 4 5 6

E81865

The information volume offset allows an


E81864 increased volume level to be set for news and
traffic announcements.
The automatic volume control adjusts the
volume level to compensate for the changes in The figure set determines the number of steps
road noise as the vehicle speed increases or above the current volume. For example the
decreases. information volume offset is 6, and the audio
output is 14, the announcement will be made at
Note: The AVC value (0-9) represents the
a volume level of 20.
volume increase, and not the volume level.
To access the information volume offset
If the AVC level is set to zero, there will be no
setting, press the Tone button for
volume increase. An AVC setting of 1 will
approximately five seconds until the AVC Level
increase the volume by a small amount. An
setting is displayed. Repeatedly press the Tone
AVC setting of 9 will increase the volume by a
button to scroll through the menu until Info Vol
large amount.
Offset is displayed.
The AVC setting required will depend upon the
The current information volume offset value
expected speed and the expected road
will be displayed. Rotate the volume control to
conditions.
increase or decrease the value.
To access the AVC Level settings, press the
Note: If an announcement is received during a
Tone button for approximately five seconds
phone call, the phone call will be terminated.
until the current AVC Level setting is displayed.
Rotate the volume control to increase or
decrease the value.

287
L

Audio unit operation


Navigation volume offset To access the phone volume setting, press the
Tone button for approximately five seconds
until the AVC Level setting is displayed.
Nav. Vol Offset Repeatedly press the Tone button to scroll
1 2
+6
3 4 5 6
through the menu until Phone Volume is
displayed.
The current phone volume value will be
displayed. Rotate the volume control to
increase or decrease the value.
Voice volume
E81866

The navigation volume offset allows you to set Voice Volume


an independent level for the volume of 22
1 2 3 4 5 6

Navigation announcements.
To access the navigation volume offset
settings, press the Tone button for
approximately five seconds until the AVC Level
setting is displayed. Repeatedly press the Tone
button to scroll through the menu until Nav Vol
Offset is displayed. E81868

The current navigation volume offset value will The voice volume allows you to set an
be displayed. Rotate the volume control to independent level for the volume of the unit’s
increase or decrease the value. voice output.
Phone volume To access the voice volume settings, press the
Tone button for approximately five seconds
until the AVC Level setting is displayed.
Phone Volume Repeatedly press the Tone button to scroll
8 through the menu until Voice Volume is
1 2 3 4 5 6

displayed.
The current voice volume value will be
displayed. Rotate the volume control to
increase or decrease the value.

E81867

The phone volume allows you to set an


independent level for the volume of the
telephone.

288
R

Audio unit operation


Reset volume settings BASS/TREBLE CONTROL
Bass response adjustment

Reset Vol. Settings


No Bass
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

E81840

Press the Tone button briefly. When the current


Reset Vol. Settings
Yes Bass setting is displayed, rotate the volume
1 2 3 4 5 6
control to increase or decrease the level.
Press the Tone button to confirm the setting.
Treble response adjustment

E81869
Treble
This feature resets all of the volume settings to
the original factory values. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Press the Tone button for approximately five


seconds until the AVC Level setting is
displayed. Repeatedly press the Tone button to
scroll through the menu until Reset Vol
Settings is displayed. Rotate the volume
control to highlight Yes or No as required. E81841
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice
and exit the menu. Press the Tone button repeatedly until the
current Treble setting is displayed. Rotate the
volume control to increase or decrease the
level.
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice.

289
L

Audio unit operation


Subwoofer settings Logic 7 settings

Subwoofer
LOGIC7
1 2 3 4 5 6
No
1 2 3 4 5 6

E81842

Press the Tone button repeatedly until the


current Subwoofer setting is displayed. Rotate
the volume control to increase or decrease the LOGIC7
setting. Yes
1 2 3 4 5 6

Press the Tone button to confirm your choice.

E81843

Press the Tone button repeatedly until the


current LOGIC7 setting is displayed. Rotate the
volume control to highlight Yes or No as
required.
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice.

290
R

Audio unit operation


Source tone memory Resetting tone values

Source Tone Memory Reset Tone Settings


No No
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

Source Tone Memory Reset Tone Settings


Yes Yes
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

E81844 E81845

Press the Tone button repeatedly until the To return the tone settings to the factory
current Source Tone Memory setting is defaults, press the Tone button repeatedly until
displayed. Rotate the volume control to Reset Tone Settings is displayed. Rotate the
highlight Yes or No as required. volume control to highlight Yes or No as
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice. required.
Premium audio: Press the Tone button to
confirm your choice.
Standard audio: Press the MENU/OK button to
confirm your choice.
All settings will be reset to the neutral (central)
value.

291
L

Audio unit operation


BALANCE/FADE CONTROL STATION PRESET BUTTONS
Balance adjustment
FM1 14 : 54
Balance 87. 50

1 2 3 4 5 6

E81838

Press the Tone button repeatedly until the


current Balance setting is displayed. Rotate
the volume control to increase or decrease the
left or right sound level. FM1 14 : 54
2 BBC R4
Fader adjustment

Fader

1 2 3 4 5 6

E81885

To store a station, press either of the search


buttons to scan up or down to the next
available station. Having tuned to the desired
station, press and hold the preset number
under which you would like the station stored.
E81839
Note: For information on radio reception
Press the Tone button repeatedly until the quality. See RADIO RECEPTION (page 283).
current Fader setting is displayed. Rotate the
The audio output will be muted when the
volume control to increase or decrease the
button is pressed. When the audio output can
front or rear sound level.
be heard again, the station has been stored.
To access the stored stations, press the
required preset number briefly.

292
R

Audio unit operation


WAVEBAND BUTTON AUTOSTORE CONTROL

FM1 FM2 FMa


FMa 14 : 54
Autostore

FM1 14 : 54
2 BBC R4
E81884

To autostore FM stations, press and hold the


E81886 FM button. Autostore will be shown in the
information display and the stations will be
To select the FM waveband, press the FM
stored under the preset numbers in the order in
button briefly. Repeated presses will scroll
which they are found.
through FM1, FM2 and FMa. The selections
will be shown in the top left-hand corner of the To access the stored stations, press the
information display. required preset number briefly.

MW1 MWa LW1 LWa

MW1 14 : 54
4 531

E81887

To select the AM waveband (includes MW and


LW), press the AM button briefly. Repeated
presses will scroll through MW1, MWa, LW1
and LWa. The selections will be shown in the
top left-hand corner of the information display.

293
L

Audio unit operation


RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS) ON or OFF will now be displayed. Rotate the
Your audio is equipped withRDS (Radio Data menu control to select one of these and press
System) RDSRDS (Radio Data System), either the menu control or the MENU/OK
which enables the audio unit to receive button to confirm your selection.
additional information with the normal radio The RDS status will be shown briefly on the
signals. information display.
On the FM waveband, RDS enables the audio to
receive traffic and news information
broadcasts. RDS also allows the audio to
automatically re-tune to stations that are linked
to the same network if that network allows this.
Note: Not all FM radio stations broadcast
RDSRDS. If a non-RDSRDS station is selected,
RDS RDS features will not be available.
Selecting RDS

Cancel
PTY Seek
FM Scan
1 2 3 4 5 6

FM Scan
RDS
AF Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6

Cancel
On
Off
1 2 3 4 5 6

E82210

To turn RDS on or off, press the MENU/OK


button to display the menu. Rotate the menu
control until RDS is displayed. Press the
control to accept this setting.

294
R

Audio unit operation


TRAFFIC INFORMATION (TA)
CONTROL FM A 14 : 54
2 97.9 Radio 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA

News ON
TA OFF

TA

FM1 14 : 54 TA 14 : 54
2 BBC R4 95.2 BBC Oxfd
TA
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA

E81879

To switch Traffic information on or off, briefly


press the INFO button
TA If the audio unit is tuned to a weak FM signal (in
remote areas, for example) or a station that
cannot provide traffic information, when the
INFO button is pressed, the display will show
Tr a f f i c 14 : 54 No TA/TP.
BBC R2
TA
If a traffic information station cannot be found,
No Station will be displayed. The audio unit will
return to the previously tuned frequency.
E81878 If the signal from a traffic information station
weakens, the TP indicator in the left-hand side
Press the MENU/OK button to display the of the display will flash. Press either of the
menu. Rotate the menu control to select TA. search controls to search for another station. If
Press the menu control to change the status to the traffic information signal weakens during
ON or OFF. CD play, the audio unit will attempt to re-tune
As soon as a traffic announcement is received, to a traffic information station with a stronger
radio reception or CD play is interrupted and signal.
TRAFFIC appears briefly in the information Note: If a non-traffic information station is
display, followed by the name of the station stored on a preset button, and is selected while
providing the information. traffic information is switched on, the audio
At the end of the traffic announcement, radio or unit will remain on the selected station unless
CD play, will resume. TA is turned off and on again.

295
L

Audio unit operation


Selecting news information Note: Both traffic and news information can be
selected at the same time. However, the audio
unit will always give priority to traffic
Regional ON information.
News OFF
Cancelling an announcement

TA 14 : 54
95.2 BBC Oxfd
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA

FM1 14 : 54
2 BBC R2
NEWS

E81881

To cancel an announcement, briefly press the C


NEWS button.
Note: Cancelling an announcement in this way
will not prevent further announcements when
News 14 : 54 they become available.
BBC R4
NEWS

E81880

Press the MENU/OK button to display the


menu. Rotate the menu control to select
NEWS. Press the MENU/OK button to change
the status to ON or OFF.
Alternatively, press and hold the INFO button to
switch news announcements on or off.
When a news announcement is received,
normal radio reception or CD play is
interrupted and the display flashes NEWS
alternately with the name of the station
providing the news information.
The display will alternatively flash the station
name and NEWS. At the end of each
announcement, radio or CD play will resume.

296
R

Audio unit operation


PTY PROGRAMME TYPES Having entered the PTY menu, use the rotary
The RDS (Radio Data System) allows control to scroll through the programme types
programmes to be categorised by the until your choice is highlighted. Press either
broadcast type (rock music, current affairs, the rotary control or the MENU/OK button to
news etc.). select the programme type and start the
search.
This in turn, allows you to search for a station
by choosing the type of broadcast that you Once a matching station is found, it will
wish to listen to. continue to play. If you wish to continue
searching, press the Search up or Search
PTY search down button within thirty seconds. To continue
To search for a station by programme type, listening to the station, no action is required as
RDS must be set to ON. Press the MENU/OK to it will remain tuned, and can be stored as a
enter the menu. pre-set if required.
To abort a PTY search, press the C button.
PTY programme types
Cancel
PTY Seek
FM Scan NEWS News services
1 2 3 4 5 6

AFFAIRS Current affairs


INFO Information
SPORT Sport
Cancel
News EDUCATE Educational
Affairs
1 2 3 4 5 6 DRAMA Drama
CULTURE Cultural
SCIENCE Scientific
No PTY VARIED Varied programming
POP M Pop music
FM A 14 : 54 ROCK M Rock music
2 94.1 Radio 4 EASY M Easy listening music
1 2 3 4 5 6 PTY LIGHT M Light music
CLASSICS Classical music
OTHER M Other music
PTY WEATHER Weather information
E82211

FINANCE Financial information


Use the rotary control to scroll through the
menu until PTY Seek is highlighted, then press CHILDREN Children’s programming
the rotary control. SOCIAL Religious music
RELIGION Religious talk/music

297
L

Audio unit operation

PHONE IN Phone-in
TRAVEL Travel
LEISURE Leisure
JAZZ Jazz music
COUNTRY Country music
NATION M National music
OLDIES Older music
FOLK M Folk music
DOCUMENT Documentaries

298
R

Compact disc player


LOADING COMPACT DISCS Inserting a single disc - Premium audio
Compact disc player

Inserting a disc - Standard audio CAUTION


Do not force a disc into the slot.
CAUTION
Do not force a disc into the slot.

CD No Discs 14 : 54
FM1 14 : 54 Press 1-6
2 BBC R4

1 2
ABC
3
DEF

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ Please Wait
0
E82442

A compact disc can be loaded during any mode


3
of play.
Ensure that the label side of the disc is facing CD 3 14 : 54
upwards then partially insert the disc; the Insert Disc
player mechanism will draw the disc in 3

automatically.

E81783

Press the CD mode button, then press the


numbered button of the position in which the
compact disc is to be stored. Please Wait will
appear in the information display, followed by
the instruction Insert Disc.
Note: The six circles at the bottom left-hand
side of the information display represent the
six available CD positions. As soon as a CD is
loaded, its number will appear in the circle.

299
L

Compact disc player


Ensure that the label side of the disc is facing Note: If a compact disc fails to be drawn in,
upwards then partially insert the disc; the and the message CD Error is displayed, press
player mechanism will draw the disc in the eject button to clear the error.
automatically. If the error fails to clear, contact your Land
Inserting multiple discs Rover Dealer/Authorised repairer.
This process is repeated until all six compact
disc positions are occupied. If one or more of
the disc positions is already occupied, that
CD 1 14 : 54
Please Wait
position will be skipped in the loading process.
Note: To stop the loading process, either press
and hold the CD mode button or press the C
button.
Note: If there is a problem with a disc that has
CD 1 14 : 54
been loaded (inserted upside down, wrong
Insert Disc
format etc.), Disc Error will appear in the
information display, and the disc in question
will be ejected. If the problem can be corrected
(disc upside down for example), then re-insert
the disc in the correct manner. If the problem
cannot be rectified, do not re-insert the disc.

CD 1 14 : 54
Loading All
1

CD 2 14 : 54
Please Wait
1
E81784

To insert more than one disc, briefly press the


CD mode button. Then press and hold the CD
mode button. The information display will
show Loading All, followed by Please Wait.
When the message Insert Disc is displayed, the
first disc can be inserted. The disc's position
number will be highlighted on the information
display screen both during and after loading.

300
R

Compact disc player


EJECTING COMPACT DISCS EJECTING MULTIPLE COMPACT
DISCS
CAUTION
Do not pull the disc from the player
before it has stopped moving, this will CD 1 14 : 54
damage the player mechanism. Ejecting All
1 2 3 4 5 6

CD 5 14 : 54
Ejecting
1 2 3 4 5 6

CD 1 14 : 54
Remove Disc
2 3 4 5 6

CD 5 14 : 54
Remove Disc
1 2 3 4 6

CD 2 14 : 54
Ejecting All
2 3 4 5 6

CD 6 14 : 54
E81785 Loading
E81786
It is only possible to eject a single disc, if it is
currently selected or playing. All the discs loaded in the player can be ejected
To eject a disc, press the eject button briefly. in sequence. To eject all of the discs, press and
Ejecting will be shown on the information hold the eject button. Ejecting All will be
display and, after a short pause, the disc will be shown on the information display and, after a
presented. When the disc has stopped moving short pause, the first disc will be presented.
Remove Disc is displayed. The disc should When the disc has stopped moving Remove
now be removed. Disc is displayed. The disc should now be
removed.
Note: If the disc is not removed from the slot
within fifteen seconds, it will be drawn back
into the player.

301
L

Compact disc player


The discs will be ejected one at a time with a COMPACT DISC SELECTION
short pause in between each. Following the
removal of the last disc, Loading will be shown
1 2 3
in the information display. ABC DEF

4 5 6
To stop the process, press any number button. GHI JKL MNO
CD 1 14 : 54
7 8 9 Tr 12 2 : 43
Note: If a disc is not removed from the slot PQRS TUV WXYZ

1 2 3 5 6
within fifteen seconds, it will be drawn back 0
into the player.

CD 4 14 : 54
Please Wait
1 2 3 5 6

CD 4 14 : 54
Insert Disc
1 2 3 5 6

CD 4 14 : 54
Tr 01 0 : 01
1 2 3 4 5 6
E81788

To start compact disc playback, briefly press


the disc number required. If the position
selected does not contain a disc, there will be a
pause and the message Insert Disc will appear
on the information display.
Once a disc has been inserted, there will be a
pause whilst the player reads the disc
information. Playback will then begin at the
start of track one.

302
R

Compact disc player


COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK Premium audio
Standard audio

CD 1 14 : 54
CD No Disc Tr 12
1 2 3 4 5 6
3 : 15

CD 14 : 54 1 2 3
Tr 01 0 : 01 ABC DEF

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ Loading
1 2 3 4 5 6
E82443 0

To start compact disc playback, briefly press 6CD-465


the CD mode button.
Note: If no disc is inserted, NO Disc will appear CD 3 14 : 54
in the display . Playback will start as soon as a
dsic is inserted. Tr 01 0 : 01
1 2 3 4 5 6

E81789

To start compact disc playback, briefly press


the CD mode button, followed by the disc
number required. If no disc number is selected,
playback will begin at one of two places.
• If the discs have not been removed since
their last use, playback will begin from the
point at which it was stopped previously.
• If the discs have not been used since they
were inserted, playback will begin at the
start of disc one.

303
L

Compact disc player


TRACK SELECTION FAST FORWARD/REVERSE

CD 4 14 : 54 CD 4 14 : 54
Tr 04 2 : 16 Tr 03 0 : 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

E81790 E81792

To search forwards or backwards through the To return to the start of a track during playback,
current track, briefly press the relevant button. briefly press the button arrowed.

COMPACT DISC PAUSE CD 4 14 : 54


Tr 04 0 : 00
1 2 3 4 5 6

CD 1 14 : 54
Tr 03 2 : 13
1 2 3 4 5 6

E81791

To pause or stop compact disc playback,


briefly press one of the other mode buttons,
E81793
AM or FM for example.
To fast forward to the beginning of the next
track, briefly press the button arrowed.

304
R

Compact disc player


COMPACT DISC FUNCTION MENU SHUFFLE/RANDOM

CD 2 14 : 54 Cancel
Tr 06 1 : 27 Random
1 2 3 4 5 6
CD Scan

6CD-465

E81794
CD 3 14 : 54
The following additional functions are available :
Tr 17 0 00 Random
using the compact disc function menu:
1 2 3 4 5 6
• Random.
• CD scan. E81795

• Repeat.
Shuffle/random alters the playback sequence
Select compact disc mode, then briefly press for the current disc. The tracks are selected
the MENU/OK button. Rotate the menu control randomly by the player.
to select the required function. Press the
control to enable or disable the function. Rotate the menu control to select Random and
press the control to enable the function.
To disable the function, rotate the menu control
to select Random and press the control.
Pressing the C button will also disable the
function.

305
L

Compact disc player


REPEAT COMPACT DISC TRACKS COMPACT DISC TRACK SCANNING

CD Scan Random
Repeat CD Scan
Load All Repeat

6CD-465 6CD-465

CD 1 14 : 54 CD 1 Scan 14 : 54
Tr 06 :
0 27 Repeat Tr 01 0 : 08
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

E81796 E81797

Repeat allows the current track to play Compact disc track scan allows you to sample
repeatedly until it is stopped/ cancelled. the music on a compact disc. This feature plays
Rotate the menu control to select Repeat and the first ten seconds of each track in numerical
press the control to enable the function. order. Play will then begin at the start of track
one.
To disable the function, rotate the menu control
to select Repeat and press the control. Rotate the menu control to select CD scan and
press the control to enable the function.
Pressing the C button, or the skip forward/next
track or return to start/previous buttons, will To disable the function, rotate the menu control
also disable the function. to select CD scan and press the control.
Pressing the C button, or the skip forward/next
track or return to start/previous buttons, will
also disable the function.

306
R

Compact disc player


MP3 FILE PLAYBACK To ensure that the best sound quality is
achieved the instructions/information provided
6CD-465 with the recording software should be read
carefully and adhered to.
CD 3 Data 14 : 54
Tr 01 1 : 37
Fd 03 16 Tr 01 14
1 2 3 4 5 6

E81798

When a data disc (containing MP3 encrypted


music data) is inserted into the compact disc
slot, the information display will show
additional folder and track information.
The first line of the information display shows
that a data disc is inserted. The second line
shows which track is being played and the play
time of that track.
The third line shows which folder out of the
total number of folders (03/16) and which track
out of the total number of tracks available
(01/14) is currently playing
A short press on the # or * keys selects the next
or previous folder respectively. The number of
that folder will change accordingly
When a new folder is selected, play will
commence at the first track in that folder.
Within the current folder, track selection can be
changed by use of the return to start/previous
and skip forward/next track buttons. Track
number in the display will change accordingly.
Note: Blank or empty folders may be listed on
screen, but they will be skipped when moving
through the available folders.
If an MP3 recording is made with a
compression rate lower than 128k some Digital
Signal Processing (DSP) functionality may be
lost.

307
L

Rear passenger controls


REAR SEAT CONTROLS 5. Search up
Rear passenger controls

• During radio play, press to search up the


2 5 7 frequency band for the next station with
a good signal strength.
• During CD play, a short press will start
the next track.
• During CD play, a long press will search
forward through the track being played,
1 3 4 6 until the button is released.
6. Volume decrease
• Press to decrease headphone volume
7. Volume increase
E81893
• Press to increase headphone volume
With the starter switch in position I or II, the
1. 3.5 mm headphone jack rear seat controls can operate, regardless of
2. Preset/CD select whether the audio system is switched on or
• During radio play, a short press will not. However, the output can only be heard
select the next preset radio station. through the headphones.
• During CD play, a short press will select If rear seat passengers are listening to the
the next CD. same source as the front seat passengers, only
3. Mode control the volume can be adjusted via the rear seat
controls.
• A long press will select AUX.
For example, if a music CD is playing on the
• With AUX selected, press to return to the
audio unit, rear seat passengers can listen to
previous mode.
that music and adjust the volume to suit their
• When rear seat entertainment is requirement. No other functions will be
selected, all adjustments are made available.
through the remote control.
If however, the audio unit is switched to
4. Search down another source, all CD related rear seat
• During radio play, press to search down controls become operable. If the audio source
the frequency band for the next station is subsequently switched back to CD, the rear
with a good signal strength. seat controls will again be limited to volume
• During CD play, a short press will start control only.
the current track again. A second press The same logic applies to radio functions.
will start the previous track.
Adjustments can be made to other functions of
• During CD play, a long press will search the audio system.
back through the track being played,
until the button is released.

308
R

Rear passenger controls


For example, if a music CD is selected on the
audio unit, radio can be selected and controlled
using the rear seat controls. All radio related
rear seat controls become operable.

HEADPHONES
The maximum volume available to this type of
headphones is limited to the volume set at the
rear seat controls.
Note: Only headphones compatible with a 3.5
mm jack plug socket can be used. To obtain
optimum sound quality, use headphones with
an impedance of 32 ohms.
Note: When the headphones are not
connected, the rear seat controls remain
operational. It is still possible to select CD,
whilst the radio is playing on the audio unit. CD
play will remain operational until the mode
control is pressed again.
Note: The mode in use when the starter key is
removed will resume if the starter switch is
turned on again (position I or II) within two
minutes. If the starter switch is turned off for
longer than two minutes AUX mode will be
selected when the starter switch is next turned
on. For example, a CD is playing when the key
is removed, play will recommence when the
starter switch is next turned to position I, or the
engine is started, whether the headphones are
in use or not.
Note: Adjusting the volume on the audio unit,
does not alter the headphone volume. The
volume of each controller can be adjusted
independently.

309
L

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket


AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX IN) SOCKET
Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket

WARNINGS
Ensure that any auxiliary devices are
stored securely whilst the vehicle is in
motion. Any loose objects can present a
serious hazard during sudden manoeuvres,
emergency braking, or an accident.
Do not place any item connected to the
auxiliary input socket, or the auxiliary
power socket, on the vehicle’s seats, carpets,
or other upholstery. The heat generated by
these devices may cause damage to the
upholstery, or in extreme cases, a vehicle fire.
Do not leave any auxiliary input devices
connected whilst the vehicle is left
unattended. There is a risk of heat damage or
fire, in addition to the risk of theft. E80550

CAUTION AUX (Auxiliary Input) mode allows additional


equipment to be connected to the vehicle's
Read the manufacturer's instructions for
audio system. Items such as a personal stereo,
any device before it is connected to the
MP3 player, hand-held navigation unit etc. can
vehicle's audio system. Ensure that the device
be plugged in to the vehicle's audio system.
is suitable, and comply with any instructions
regarding connection and operation. Failure to The auxiliary connector is situated at the rear of
do so may result in damage to the vehicle's the centre console. To gain access, lift the
audio system or the auxiliary device. lower edge of the cover.
Auxiliary audio devices are connected via the
3.5 mm stereo jack plug marked AUX.
The auxiliary power socket, situated next to the
auxiliary input connector, can be used to power
or charge any suitable device.
Note: On vehicles fitted with rear seat
entertainment, additional Audio Visual sockets
(AV1 and AV2) are provided. This allows
auxiliary equipment (such as a video games
console) to be linked up to the rear DVD
screens. For information on the installation of
such equipment, please refer to the installation
guide supplied with the auxiliary equipment.

310
R

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket


Auxiliary mode

AUX

AUX 14 : 54

1 2 3 4 5 6

E80551

To listen to an auxiliary input source, connect


the device and briefly press the AUX button.
The unit will playback audio via the 3.5 mm
stereo jack plug.
Alternatively, press and hold the MODE button
on the steering wheel or the rear audio
controls.
Volume is controlled using the left rotary
control. Tone and balance can also be adjusted.
Note: The volume levels and sound quality
available from devices connected to the
auxiliary inputs may vary widely.

311
L

Voice recognition
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • Avoid causing background noise in the
Voice recognition

Voice recognition enables operation of the vehicle while you are speaking, and ask
audio system without the need to divert your your passengers not to talk while you are
attention from the road ahead in order to issuing voice commands.
change settings, or receive feedback from the • The hands-free microphone is positioned
system. to pick up the driver’s voice. Commands
made by other occupants may be picked
Whenever you issue one of the defined
up, but clarity and accuracy will be
commands with the system active, the voice
reduced.
recognition system converts your command
into a control signal for the audio system. Your Activating the system
inputs take the form of dialogues or
commands. You are guided through these
dialogues by announcements or questions.
Please familiarise yourself with the functions of
the audio system before using voice
recognition.

USING THE SYSTEM


The voice recognition system includes a
hands-free microphone mounted in the roof of
your vehicle. There are a few points to observe
to ensure that the system understands your
commands:
• Speak continuously and at normal volume,
avoiding unnatural emphasis and pauses
between words.
• Do not speak while the voice recognition
system is giving an output. The voice
system displays LISTENING on the
message centre, and gives a beep when it
is waiting for a voice command.
• It is possible that noise from outside the
E82207

vehicle could affect commands. Keep the To activate voice control:


doors, windows, and sunroof closed.
• Briefly pull the control (the audio will
• If a command is not heard, or is mute). A tone will be heard, and
misunderstood, the voice system LISTENING will be displayed on the main
responds with message centre to indicate that the system
>Sorry, Command not recognised< or is waiting for a voice command.
>No speech detected<. Note: It is only necessary to operate the
If this happens, repeat the command. control at the beginning of each voice session.

312
R

Voice recognition
Defined voice commands Interrupting voice control
The voice control system understands A command can be interrupted by saying the
predefined commands which need to be word Cancel or by pressing the control until the
quoted word for word. system responds by saying >Command
An audio feedback of voice commands is cancelled<.
available. To activate the feedback, pull the If you receive a telephone call (or Navigation
control briefly and give one of the following route guidance instruction/TA announcement)
commands: while conducting a dialogue, the dialogue is
• Voice help - to list all commands. interrupted.
• Radio help - to list Radio commands. Command not recognised
• CD help - to list CD commands. If a command is not recognised, the system
• Navigation help - to list Navigation responds with:
commands. >Sorry. Please say your command again<.
Please refer to the Navigation Handbook
for operating instructions.
• Notepad Help - to list Notepad commands.
Please refer to the Owner’s Handbook for
operating instructions.

313
L

Voice recognition
AUDIO SYSTEM COMMANDS • Radio Tune eighty seven point nine FM
or Radio Tune eighty seven point nine
Starting a dialogue (87.9)
Hold the control until the tone is heard. Any • Radio Tune ninety point zero or Radio
audio sources in the vehicle are muted. Tune ninety (90.0).
Radio stations • Radio Tune ninety point one (90.1).
Frequencies are said as in the following • Radio Tune one hundred point five
examples: (100.5).
• Radio Tune five thirty one AM, or Radio • Radio Tune one oh one point one FM
Tune five thirty one (531). (101.1).
• Radio Tune nine hundred (900). • Radio Tune one oh eight point oh, Radio
Tune one oh eight point zero, or Radio
• Radio Tune fourteen forty (1440).
Tune one oh eight (108.0).
• Radio Tune fifteen oh three AM (1503).
• Radio Tune one oh seven point nine
• Radio Tune fifteen ten AM (1510). (107.9).
• Radio Tune ten eighty (1080).
Note: The word Select can be used in place of
• Radio Tune eighty nine point nine FM or the word Tune if preferred.
Radio Tune eighty nine point nine (89.9).

Command System response Message centre display


“Radio play” >Radio play< RADIO PLAY
“Radio tune ninety six point nine >Radio tune 96.9 FM (or AM 96.9 FM
(96.9) FM” (or AM or Medium or Medium Wave)
Wave)
“Radio tune” <nametag> >Radio tune <nametag>< Station frequency

Nametags Radio tune <nametag> is used to select a


Nametags are a unique name or phrase of your station that has been previously stored.
choice which can be used to recall a radio
station. The nametags used can be the station
name, or a completely separate name of your
choosing.
The names are stored in a directory by using
the Radio store name command. The system
responds with >Name please<. You say the
name that you have chosen (e.g. Radio 1).
The system will read out a list of current
nametags when given the command Radio
directory.

314
R

Voice recognition
Storing radio stations via voice The command
command Radio store preset <say number (1-9)>
Once you have tuned to a radio station, it is calls up the dialogue for storing a pre-set
possible to store that station for future use as a station.
pre-set. The following commands apply to the The command
currently tuned station. Radio autostore
enters the autostore function for the selected
frequency band (e.g. FM).

Command System response Message centre display


“Radio store preset” <preset >Radio store preset RADIO STORE PRESET (1-9).
number (1-9)> <preset number (1-9)>
1. “Radio store” name 2. >Radio store name, RADIO STORE NAME, NAME
name please< PLEASE
3. “Name” >Name<
STORED
“Radio autostore” >Radio autostore< RADIO AUTOSTORE
“Radio tune” <name> >Radio tune <name>< RADIO TUNE

315
L

Voice recognition
Tune/Delete from the radio directory Tune
The commands Radio play directory or Radio After a nametag has been read out by the
directory prompt the system to read aloud the system, give the command Tune and the radio
entire list of nametag entries in the radio tunes to the station saved under that nametag.
directory.
Delete
The nametag list is read out in stored order,
After a nametag has been read out by the
and commands can be entered during the
system, give the command Delete and the
system response.
nametag will be removed from the directory.
Replay After a nametag has been read out by the
After a nametag has been read out by the system, give the command Cancel and the
system, give the command Replay and the current Voice session will end.
nametag will be repeated.

Command System response Message centre display


Radio play directory >Radio play directory< RADIO DIRECTORY
You can say “Replay”, Reads out directory. Station frequency
“Tune”, “Delete” or “Cancel”
after each name.

316
R

Voice recognition
Deleting the directory
The command Radio delete directory deletes
all entries in the radio directory.

Command System response Message centre display


1. “Radio delete directory” 1. >Radio delete 1. DELETE DIRECTORY SAY YES OR
directory, confirm yes NO
or no
2. “Yes” 1. >Are you sure that 2. SAY YES OR NO
you want to delete the
whole directory?<
3. “Yes” 1. >Directory deleted< 3. DIRECTORY DELETED

317
L

Voice recognition
Selecting disc and track numbers • CD play disc six track ten.
For CD player commands, say disc and track • CD play track twenty five.
numbers as in the following examples: • CD play track forty seven.
• CD play disc one.

Command System response Message centre display


“CD help” >List of CD commands< CD HELP
“CD play >CD play< CD PLAY
“CD play disc” <say number >CD play disc <say number DISC <disc number (1-6)>
(1-6)> (1-6)><
“CD play next disc” >CD play next disc< NEXT DISC
“CD play previous disc” >CD play previous disc< PREVIOUS DISC
“CD play track” <say number >CD play track <say number TRACK <track number
(1-99)> (1-99)>< (1-99)>
“CD play disc” <say number >CD play disc <say number DISC <disc number (1-6)>
(1-6)> track <say number (1-6) track <say number TRACK <track number
(1-99)> (1-99)>< (1-99)>

318
R

Voice recognition
Rear seat entertainment operation
When rear seat entertainment is fitted, it can be
controlled by the following voice commands.

Command System response Message centre display


“Radio auxiliary on” or “Radio Selects auxiliary input to allow AUXILIARY PLAY
auxilliary play” an external device, such as a
portable CD/MD player plugged
into the Aux socket, to be
played through the cabin
speakers
“Headphones on” or Switches on both headphone HEADPHONES PLAY
“Headphones play” outputs
“Headphones off” Switches off both headphone HEADPHONES OFF
outputs
“Rear entertainment on” or Switches on rear seat RSE PLAY
“Rear entertainment play” entertainment system
“Rear entertainment off’” Switches off rear seat RSE OFF
entertainment system

319
L

Voice recognition
Using Notepad Briefly pull the voice control (the audio will
Notepad allows you to record short messages mute). A tone will be heard, and LISTENING
as memory aids or reminders. will be displayed on the main message centre.
A notepad command can now be given.
You can record a maximum of 10 notes, each
with a maximum duration of 30 seconds.

Command System response Action


“Record note” or “Notepad Notepad gives a beep to You may start your
record” indicate the start of recording. recording after the beep. To
stop recording, hold the
voice recognition control.
“Play notepad” or “Rear Notepad will recite each note in Saying Replay will replay the
notepad” turn. You can say Replay, previous message.
Delete or Cancel after each Saying Delete will delete the
beep or remain silent to hear previous message.
the next note. Saying Cancel will cancel the
previous message.
“Clear notepad” or “Notepad Do you want to clear the Say Yes to delete all stored
delete” notepad? notes. Say No to cancel the
command
“Notepad help” The system will recite notepad
information and all the
commonly used commands

320
R

Index
A Alarm
A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Anti-theft alarm indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Arming the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
ABS driving hints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Interior space protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Partial arming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adjusting the windscreen washer jets Perimetric alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Switching off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Air suspension Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . 154
Access height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Driving hints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Crawl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Anti-theft alarm indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Door open override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Extended mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Audio unit overview
Height change warnings . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Premium audio unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Height indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Standard audio unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
High speed height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Automatic climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Off-road height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Operation of controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
On-road height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 CommandShift™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Kick-down in automatic mode . . . . . . . 144
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
System freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Warning indicators and messages . . . . 146
Intake air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Autostore stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
User adjustable vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Auxiliary heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Airbags Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket . . . . . . . . 310
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Auxiliary mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 B
Disabling the passenger airbag . . . . . . . 73 Balance/fade control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Obstructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Bass/treble control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Battery care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Service information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Battery warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Bonnet lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Status indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Booster cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Brake fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Topping up the fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

321
L

Index
Brakes Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . 154 Bulb specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . 155 Courtesy lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Foot brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Front direction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . 98
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Front fog lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Front side lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
C Halogen bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Halogen headlamps - high or low beam . 96
Catalytic converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Headlamp unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
CD Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Disc selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Number plate lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Ejecting compact discs . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Rear direction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . 94
Ejecting multiple compact discs . . . . . 301 Rear fog lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fast forward/reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Reversing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Function menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Side repeater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Inserting a single disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Static bending lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Inserting multiple discs. . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Stepwell lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Loading compact discs . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Stop/tail lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
MP3 file playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Tail lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Tailgate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Repeat track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Xenon headlamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Shuffle/random . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Xenon lamp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Track scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Changing a fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Track selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Changing a road wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Centre console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Raising the vehicle (Air suspension) . . 235
CD storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Raising the vehicle (Coil suspension). . 237
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Stowing the changed wheel . . . . . . . . . 241
Tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Using wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Wheel changing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Changing the vehicle battery. . . . . . . . . . . 229
Battery disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Charging the vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Battery warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Disconnecting the battery. . . . . . . . . . . 228
Effects of battery disconnection . . . . . . 228
Reconnecting the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Checking the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

322
R

Index
Child seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 E
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ISOFIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Electric exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Folding the mirror body . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Recommended restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Mirror glass adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Seat belt automatic locking mechanism 77 Reverse mirror dipping . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Cigar lighter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cleaning the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Applying the electric parking brake . . . 155
Cleaning after off-road driving . . . . . . 207 Dynamic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Glass and mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Polishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Releasing the electric parking brake. . . 156
Removing tar spots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Electric sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Underbody maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Anti-trap mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Electric windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Airbag module covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Anti-trap mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Carpet and fabrics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 One touch operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Instrument pack, clock and radio . . . . 209 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Rear window isolation switch. . . . . . . . 111
Plastic and cloth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Rear window operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . 213
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Engine coolant check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Premium audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . 220
Standard audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Topping up the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Coded keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Engine immobiliser
Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Coded keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Coolant check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Engine oil check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Increasing the cruising speed . . . . . . . 165 Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Engine oil specification. . . . . . . . . . 39, 220
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Topping up the oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Reducing the cruising speed. . . . . . . . 165 Essential towing checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Event data recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
D F
Data recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Filling station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Fog lamps
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Detachable tow ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fitting the tow ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Removing the tow ball . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Dimensions
Air suspension vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Coil spring suspension vehicles . . . . . 272
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

323
L

Index
Fuel Headlamps
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) . . . 89
Cut-off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Automatic control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Cornering lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Running dry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Specification - diesel engines . . . . . . . 188 High beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Specification - petrol engines . . . . . . . 186 Levelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fuel burning heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fuse box locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Engine compartment fuse box . . . . . . 254 washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Passenger compartment fuse box. . . . 255 Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Tow hitch fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fuse specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Heated windows and mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 126
Engine compartment fuse box . . . . . . 257 Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Passenger compartment fuse box. . . . 259 Heated rear screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Tow hitch fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Heated windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
G Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Gear changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Hill Descent Control (HDC)
Gear selector display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Fade out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
General driving points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Breakdown safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Servicing requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 System fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Vehicle stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Warning indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 170
Wading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Hints on driving with ABS
Cornering Brake Control (CBC). . . . . . . 154
H
Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Hazard warning flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 I
Rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Headlamp Information labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Bi-Xenon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Critical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Gear selector display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Instrument lighting dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . 129

324
R

Index
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Lamps
Fuel gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) . . . 89
Selected gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Adjusting the headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Automatic control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Bi-Xenon headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Total distance (odometer). . . . . . . . . . . 23 Cornering lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Daytime running lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Trip recorder reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Front fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Halogen headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Glovebox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Hazard warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Low-level illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Headlamp levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 High beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Vanity mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Interior mirror Low beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Automatic dimming mirror . . . . . . . . . 114 Rear fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Manual mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Reversing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Interior space protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Side lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ISOFIX anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Stop lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
J Lighting
Jacking point locations General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Master switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Coil suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Load carrying
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
K
Automatic re-lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Automatic unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Emergency locking and unlocking. . . . . 45
Interior door handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Keys and remote controls
Locking with the remote control. . . . . . . 47
Information on radio frequencies . . . . . 44
Master lock and unlock switches . . . . . . 48
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Remote control battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Partial locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
L Speed-related locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Superlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Luggage anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Luggage covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
5-seat vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7-seat vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Operating the luggage cover . . . . . . . . 194
M
Maintenance
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

325
L

Index
Manual climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Programming the remote control . . . . . . . . 45
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Air suspension control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Operation of controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Memory function Single-point entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Recalling a stored seat position . . . . . 138 Proximity mirror (Japan only). . . . . . . . . . 111
Setting a memory pre-set . . . . . . . . . . 138 Q
Message centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Quick start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
R
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Radio controls
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Premium audio unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Brake fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Standard audio unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Radio Data System (RDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . 158
Radio reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Radio startion
Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . 171
Waveband button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Radio station
Stability control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Autostore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Terrain Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Transfer gearbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Rear lamps
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . 252
Bulb replacment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
MP3 file playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Rear loadspace hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
O Rear passenger climate controls. . . . . . . . 126
Oil check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Rear seat audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Opening and closing the bonnet . . . . . . . 212 Rear seat entertainment commands . . . . . 319
Closing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Opening the bonnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Second row seats - 7-seat vehicle . . . . . 60
P Second-row seats - 5-seat vehicle . . . . . 59
Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Third-row seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Parking aid Rear window wiper and washers . . . . . . . 107
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Tailgate open disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
System fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Wiper - intermittent operation . . . . . . . 107
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Recommended towing weights. . . . . . . . . 200
Parts and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Reduced engine performance . . . . . . . . . . 163
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Remote control battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Power steering fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Remote control programming . . . . . . . . . . 45
Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Repairing minor paint damage . . . . . . . . . 209
Topping up the fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Programme Type (PTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 S
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

326
R

Index
Seat adjustment Starting a diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Backrest adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 57 After starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Folding armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Cold climates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Forward/backward adjustment . . . . 55, 57 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Height adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57 Warming-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Lazy entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Starting a petrol engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Lumbar support adjustment . . . . . . . . . 56 After starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Seat belt reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Cold climates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Seat belts Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Automatic locking mechanism . . . . . . . 77 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Caring for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Warming-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
During pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Steering wheel
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Height adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Pre-tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Cruise control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Voice control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Seats Sun blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Electric adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Manual adustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Superlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Seat memory facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 T
Sitting in the correct position . . . . . . . . 54 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Service data recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 272
Service interval indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 V6 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 V6 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Sound settings V8 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Bass response adjustment . . . . . . . . . 289 Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Terrain Response
Logic 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Driver override options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Resetting tone values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Source tone memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Treble response adjustment . . . . . . . . 289 Special programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Wading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Stability Control Tilt sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Tone settings
Stability control Bass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Resetting tone values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Source tone memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Using stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Tow ball stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

327
L

Index
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Tyre glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fixed - tow ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Terms used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Multi-height drop plate - tow bar . . . . 205 Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . 248
Nose weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Points to remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Trailer socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Warning indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Towing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Front towing point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 TPM system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Rear towing point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 U
Towing the vehicle on four wheels . . . . . 265 Under bonnet covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Towing weights - Australia only . . . . . . . 198 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Traction control Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Using booster cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Traffic information (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Boosting from another vehicle . . . . . . . 226
Traffic information (TA) control Boosting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Selecting news information. . . . . . . . . 296 Using cruise control
Transfer gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 To operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
HIGH range (Hi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Using snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
LOW range (Lo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Using terrain response
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Rock Crawl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Range changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
V
Range changing on the move . . . . . . . 149
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . 267
Stationary range changing . . . . . . . . . 149
Vehicle recovery
Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Lashing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Warning indicators and messages . . . 150
Vehicle security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Transporting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Vehicle weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Ventilation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Personalised settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Type approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
VIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Tyre care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Voice recognition
Age degradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Activating the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Checking tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Audio system commands. . . . . . . . . . . 314
Directional tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
CD commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Flat spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Defined commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
High performance wheel and tyre
important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Making yourself understood. . . . . . . . . 312
Pressure compensation for ambient
Notepad facility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
temperature changes . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Punctured tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Replacement tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

328
R

Index
Volume control Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Audio unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Rear screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Automatic Volume control (AVC) . . . . 287 Windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Information volume offset. . . . . . . . . . 287 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Navigation volume offset . . . . . . . . . . 288 Weights
Phone volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Axle loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Reset volume settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Gross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Voice volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
W Wheels and tyres
Wading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Warning indicators Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) . . 89 Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Jet adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . 154 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Intermittent variable delay . . . . . . . . . . 105
Brake fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Single wipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Check engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Speed dependent intermittent mode . . 106
Direction indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Speed dependent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Door open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Wiper blade replacement
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) . . . . . 166 Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Electric Parking Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . 157 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Engine Management System (EMS) . . 163
Front fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Glow plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Headlamp high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . 169, 170
Low coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Low gear range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Low oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Overspeed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Rear fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Side lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Traction control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Transmission temperature . . . . . . . . . 146
Tyre Pressure Monitoring system . . . . 249
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Washer fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

329
Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Published: 11-May-2011
General Information - About This Manual
Description and Operation

Introduction

This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of technicians worldwide. The objective
is to use common formats and include similar content in each manual.

This manual provides general descriptions for accomplishing diagnosis and testing, service and repair work with
tested and effective techniques. Following them will help to ensure reliability.

Important Safet Instructions

Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor
vehicles as well as the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.

Anyone who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that personal safety or vehicle
integrity is not compromised by the choice of method, tools or components.

Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual

WARNING: Warnings are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in personal
injury.

C AUTION: C autions are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in damage to the
vehicle or equipment being used.

NOTE: Notes are used to provide additional essential information required to carry out a complete and satisfactory
repair.

Generic warnings or cautions are in their relevant description and operation procedure within section 100-00. If the
generic warnings or cautions are required for a procedure, there will be a referral to the appropriate description and
operation procedure.

If a warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is placed at the beginning of the specific step.

Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Removal and Installation Procedures

NOTE: TAS style procedures can be identified by steps that have no accompanying step text and the magenta color
of the electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips.

A TAS removal and installation procedure uses a sequence of color illustrations to indicate the order to be followed
when removing/disassembling or installing/assembling a component.

Many of the TAS procedures will have the installation information within the removal steps. These procedures will
have the following note at the beginning of the procedure:

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

Items such as O-ring seals, gaskets, seals, self-locking nuts and bolts are to be discarded and new components
installed unless otherwise stated within the procedure. C oated nuts or bolts are to be reused, unless damaged or
otherwise stated within the procedure.

Specification procedures will contain all technical data that are not part of a repair procedure.

TAS Graphics

C olors used in the graphic are as follows:

Blue - Indicates the target item, item to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled


Green and Brown - Indicates a secondary item that needs to be detached, removed/installed or
disassembled/assembled prior to the target item
Magenta - Indicates electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips
Pale Blue - is for the special tool(s) and general equipment.

There may be multiple steps assigned to one illustration.

Numbered pointers are used to indicate the number of electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps
or clips.

1/7
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY
I ( ).

TAS S

S .T
.

P .

H S
.

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 2/7
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Warning s mbols are used to indicate potential risks resulting from a certain component or area.

Instruction s mbols are used to appl sealer, lubricant, weight, tape or cleaning detergent to a component.

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 3/7
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Location s mbols are used to show the location of a component or s stem within the vehicle.

Gearshift lever or selector lever position s mbols are used to show which gearshift lever or selector lever position is
to be set.

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 4/7
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Pointer s mbols are used to draw the attention to components and give special instructions such as a required
sequence or number of components. The number of components is reflected b the value inside the lut arrow. A
sequence number is located inside the circle. Numbers inside circles are also used to allocate special information such
as tightening torques or chemicals to a particular component.

Movement arrows are used to show three dimensional or rotational movements. These movements can include
specific values inside the s mbol if required.

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 5/7
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Standard tool s mbols recommend the use of certain standard tools. These tools can include dimension values if
required.

The following graphic illustrates a set of s mbols that are used to provide detailed information on where to appl a
material.

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 6/7
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Mea e e b ide de ai ed i f ai he e ca a ecific ea e e . The e b


ca i c de ecific a e if e i ed.

S ecia T a dT e Fig e( )

S ecia i be h i h he be i he i a i . The ecia be ( ), ge e a e i e ,


a e ia ( ) a d e fig e( ) ed f he ced e e i be h i he e c .

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 7/7
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Published: 11 May 2011

How to use This Manual

This manual covers all aspects necessary in order to service the vehicle effectively.

The manual is structured into five main sections, General Information, C hassis, Powertrain, Electrical and Body and
Paint with each section dealing with a specific part of a vehicle system.

Each of the five main sections contain sub-sections dealing with items which form a part of that specific system.

Pages at the start of the manual list all sections available. Each section has a contents list detailing, where applicable,
Specifications, Description and Operation, Diagnosis and Testing, General Procedures and Repair Procedures.

Where components need to be removed or disassembled in sequence, each operation in the sequence will be
identified numerically and also graphically in an accompanying illustration.

• NOTE: Dimensions quoted are to design engineering specifications with service limits quoted, where applicable.

Workshop Manual Organi ation

The five main sections, together with the areas which they cover are given below:

Section 1 - General Information.


Section 2 - C hassis.
Section 3 - Powertrain.
Section 4 - Electrical.
Section 5 - Body and Paint.

Sub-section numbers appear after the initial section number, for example, Section 412-03 covers air conditioning,
which is part of the electrical section.

In the number given above, the first digit of the number '4' indicates the section i.e. Electrical.

The second and third digits '12' of the number indicate the vehicle system i.e. Air Conditioning.

The last two digits of the number '03' indicate the part of the system covered by the sub-section i.e. Air
Conditioning Compressor.

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 1/1
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Published: 11-Ma -2011


General Information - Important Safet Instructions
Description and Operation

Safet Notice

Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor
vehicles, as well as the safet of the person doing the work. This manual provides general directions for
accomplishing service and repair work with tested effective techniques. Following them will help assure reliabilit .

There are numerous variations in procedures, techniques, tools, and parts for servicing vehicles, as well as in the skill
of the person doing the work. This manual cannot possibl anticipate all such variations and provide advice or
cautions as to each. Accordingl , an one who departs from the instructions provided in the manual must first
establish that neither personal safet or vehicle integrit is compromised from choices of methods, tools or parts.

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 1/1
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Published: 11-Ma -2011


General Information - General Service Information
Description and Operation

Introduction

This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of Land Rover technicians worldwide and
to assist them in the efficient repair and maintenance of Land Rover vehicles.

This manual provides descriptions and methods for accomplishing adjustment, service and repair work using tested
and effective procedures. Following these procedures will help ensure product reliabilit .

Special Tools

The Special Tool(s) Table provided at the beginning of each procedure lists the special tool(s) required to carr out
repair operations within that specific procedure. Wherever possible, illustrations are provided which will assist
technicians in identif ing the special tool(s) required and also showing such tool(s) in use.

Special tools ma be obtained from the manufacturer, SPX Tools, the addresses of their branches will be found in the
Special Tools Glossar contained within this Section.

Important Safet Instructions

Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe and reliable operation of all
motor vehicles as well as ensuring the personal safet of the individual carr ing out the work.

This manual cannot possibl anticipate all such variations and provide advice or cautions as to each. An person who
departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that the compromise neither their personal
safet nor the vehicle integrit b their choice of methods, tools or parts.

Individuals who undertake their own repairs should have some skill or training and limit repairs to components which
could not affect the safet of the vehicle or its passengers. An repairs required to safet critical items such as
steering, brakes, suspension or supplemental restraint s stem should be carried out b a Land Rover Dealer. Repairs
to such items should NEVER be attempted b untrained individuals.

Warnings, Cautions and Notes which appear in this manual

As ou read through this manual, ou will come across Warnings, C autions and Notes. A Warning, C aution or Note is
placed at the beginning of a series of steps. If the warning, caution or note onl applies to one step, it is placed at the
beginning of the specific step after the step number.

Warnings, Cautions and Notes have the following meanings:

Warning: Procedures which must be followed to avoid the possibilit of personal injur .

Caution: C alls attention to procedures which must be followed to avoid damage to components.

Note: Gives helpful information.

References

References to the Left Hand (LH) or Right Hand (RH) side given in this manual are made when viewing the vehicle or
unit from the rear.

Fault Diagnostic Equipment

The vehicle is equipped with a number of electronic control s stems to provide optimum performance of the vehicle's
s stems.

Diagnostic Equipment (T4) is available and must be used where specified. The use of this equipment will assist with
the fault diagnostic abilities of the Dealer workshop. In particular, the equipment can be used to interrogate the
electronic s stems for diagnosis of faults which ma become evident during the life of the vehicle.

This manual is produced as a reference source to supplement T4.

Features of the equipment include:

a. Full upgradeable support for the technician

b. Structured diagnostics to accommodate all skill levels

c. Direct print-out of screen information and test results

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 1/2
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Testing the ehicle

Operations covered in this manual do not include reference to testing the vehicle after repair. It is essential that work
is inspected and tested after completion and if necessary, a road test of the vehicle is carried out, particularly where
safety related items are concerned.

Repairs and Replacement Parts

Land Rover parts are manufactured to the same exacting standards as the original factory fitted components. For this
reason, it is essential that only genuine Land Rover parts are used during maintenance or repair.

Attention is particularly drawn to the following points concerning repairs and the fitting of replacement parts and
accessories.

Safety features and corrosion prevention treatments embodied in the vehicle may be impaired if other than Land
Rover recommended parts are fitted. In certain territories, legislation prohibits the fitting of parts not to
manufacturer's specification. Torque wrench setting figures, where given, must be adhered to and locking devices,
where specified must be used. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be replaced.

Owners purchasing accessories whilst travelling abroad must ensure that the accessory and its fitted location on the
vehicle conform to legal requirements.

The terms of the vehicle warranty may be invalidated by the fitting of parts other than those recommended by Land
Rover.

NOTE: The fitting of non-approved Land Rover parts and accessories or the carrying out of non-approved alterations
or conversions may be dangerous. Any of the foregoing could affect the safety of the vehicle and occupants; also, the
terms and conditions of the vehicle warranty may also be invalidated .

All Land Rover recommended parts have the full backing of the vehicle warranty.

Land Rover Dealers are obliged to supply only Land Rover recommended parts.

Specifications

Land Rover are constantly seeking to improve the specification, design and production of their vehicles and
alterations take place accordingly. Whilst every effort is made to ensure the accuracy of this Manual, it should not be
regarded as an infallible guide to current specifications of any particular vehicle.

This Manual does not constitute an offer for sale of any particular vehicle. Land Rover dealers are not agents of Land
Rover and have no authority to bind the manufacturer by any expressed or implied undertaking or representation.

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 2/2
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY

Published: 11-May-2011
General Information - Standard Workshop Practices
Description and Operation

Vehicle in Workshop

When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:

Where practicable, the parking brake is applied and the wheels are securely chocked to prevent the vehicle
moving forwards or backwards.
Whenever possible, the ignition key is removed before any work is carried out on the vehicle.
If the engine is to be run, there is adequate ventilation, or an extraction hose is used to remove exhaust
fumes.
There is adequate room to raise the vehicle and remove the wheels, if necessary.
Fender covers are always installed if any work is to be carried out in the engine compartment.
Where practicable, the battery is disconnected if working on the engine, underneath the vehicle, or if the
vehicle is raised.

Caution: Prior to disconnecting the batter , refer to the Electrical Section of this manual - Batter
disconnection/connection and the following paragraphs.For additional information, refer to:
Specifications (414-00 Battery and C harging System - General Information, Specifications).

C AUTION: When electric arc welding on a vehicle, always disconnect the generator wiring to prevent the
possibility of a surge of current causing damage to the internal components of the generator.

If using welding equipment on the vehicle, a suitable fire extinguisher is readily available.

Batter - General

WARNING: It is essential that a period of 2 minutes elapses after the batter is disconnected before
an work is undertaken on an part of the SRS s stem.

C AUTION: A discharged battery condition may have been caused by an electrical short circuit. If this condition
exists there will be an apparently live circuit on the vehicle even when all normal circuits are switched off. This can
cause arcing when the jumper cables are connected.

Caution: Prior to carr ing out an procedures which involve disconnecting/ or connecting the
batter , refer to the Electrical Section of this manual - Batter disconnection/connection.For
additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and C harging System - General Information,
Specifications).

Jump Starting a Vehicle

C AUTIONS:

While it is not recommended that a vehicle is jump started, it is recognized that this may occasionally be the
only practical way to mobilize a vehicle. Reference should be made to the following and also to the Electrical Section
of this manual - Jump Starting.

It is advisable not to use starter/charger sets for jump starting but if this is unavoidable, make sure that the
sets are not used in the 'START' mode.

Always make sure that the jumper cables are adequate for the task.
Always make sure that the slave battery is of the same voltage (12 volts) as the vehicle battery. The batteries
must be connected in parallel.
Make sure that the battery terminals of both batteries are fully tightened.
Where another vehicle is used to jump start a disabled vehicle, make sure that the two vehicles are not
touching.
It is advisable that the engine of the donor vehicle is switched off during jump starting; take care to make sure
that the battery of the donor vehicle does not also become discharged.
Always make sure that switchable electric circuits are OFF before connecting jump cables. This reduces the risk
of arcing occurring when the final connection is made.

Following jump starting of a disabled vehicle, the discharged battery must be checked for serviceability and recharged
as soon as possible to avoid permanent damage.

Do not rely on the generator to restore a discharged battery. For a generator to recharge a battery, it would take in
topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 1/21
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY
.

T ( <16 ) .M
.

C AUTION: B .

To ing he Vehicle

WARNING: W , J ,L T S
M .

W II (
). O , , .F
.I ,
, .

Gene al in alla ion In c ion

Componen emo al

W , .

B .
F , , .
S .
I , ;
.
C , .

Di a embling

O , , ,
.A
.

B , , , .

WARNING: S .

U ,
.
W .
S .K
.
T ,
.

Cleaning componen

A .
NEVER ( ) ( ). A
.

A '
.S H S P
.

Gene al in pec ion of componen

A .

A .
W ,
. . , , , (DTI).
A .
R / .
A
.

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 2/21
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY
Bearing journal clearances should be checked where necessary using Plastigage.
Gaskets, seals and O-ring seals are to be re-used unless damaged.

Joints and Joint Faces

All gaskets should be installed dry unless stated otherwise. Always apply the specified lubricant to O-rings and install
O-rings using the fingers only.

Use gasket removal spray and/or plastic scrapers to remove traces of old gasket.

C AUTION: DO NOT use metal scrapers or emery cloth as these may damage the sealing surfaces.

Many joints use sealants instead of gaskets as the sealing medium. Where this is the case, the sealant together with
its part number will be found listed in the relevant repair operation and also in the sealants table.

C AUTION: Always remove all traces of the old sealant prior to reassembly. Use plastic scrapers, specified
solvents where available or dry, lint free cloth. DO NOT use metal scrapers or emery cloth as these may damage the
sealing surfaces. Make sure that sealing surfaces are free from oil or grease as sealants will not adhere properly to
contaminated surfaces.

Do not allow sealant to enter tapped holes or oilways.

Locking Devices

Always replace locking devices with one of the same design and of the correct size.

Tab washers

Always release locking tabs before loosening fixings, do not re-use tab washers.

Locknuts

Always use a backing spanner when loosening and tightening locknuts, brake and fuel pipe unions.

Roll pins

Always install new roll pins of the correct size.

Circlips

Always install new circlips ensuring that they are of the correct size for the groove.

Woodruff ke s

Woodruff keys may be re-used provided there is no indication of wear or distortion.

Remove any burrs from edges of keyways using a fine file.

Split pins

Never attempt to straighten and re-use a split pin, always make sure that replacement pins are of the correct size for
the hole in which they are to be installed.

Screw Threads

Damaged nuts, bolts and screws must always be discarded. Attempting to recut or repair damaged threads
with a tap or die impairs the strength and fit of the threads and is not recommended.

NOTE: During certain repair operations, it may be necessary to remove traces of thread locking agents using a tap.
Where this is necessary, the instruction to do so will appear in the relevant operation and it is essential that a tap of
the correct size and thread is used.

Some bolts are coated with a thread locking agent and unless stated otherwise, they must not be re-used. New
bolts having the same part number as the original must always be installed. When nuts or bolts are to be
discarded, the repair operation and relevant torque chart will include an instruction to that effect. Do not use
proprietary thread locking agents as they may not meet the specification required. See also Encapsulated
('Patched') Bolts and Screws.
Always make sure that replacement nuts and bolts are at least equal in strength to those that they are
replacing. C astellated nuts must not be loosened to accept a split pin except in recommended cases when this
forms part of an adjustment.
Do not allow oil or grease to enter blind holes, the hydraulic action resulting from tightening the bolt or stud

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 3/21
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY
can split the housing and also give a false torque reading.
Always tighten a nut, bolt or screw to the specified torque figure, damaged or corroded threads can give a
false torque reading.
Nut and bolt loosening and tightening sequences, where given, must ALWAYS be followed. Distortion of
components or faulty sealing of joints will result if the sequences are not followed. Where an instruction is
given to tighten in stages, these stages must be adhered to; do not attempt to combine stages particularly
where certain stages involve tightening by degrees.
To check or re-tighten a fixing to a specified torque, first loosen a quarter of a turn, then retighten to the
specified torque figure.
Unless instructed otherwise, do not lubricate bolt or nut threads prior to installing.

Where it is stated that bolts and screws may be re-used, the following procedures must be carried out:

C heck that threads are undamaged.


Remove all traces of locking agent from the threads.

C AUTION: DO NOT use a wire brush; take care that threads are not damaged.

Make sure that threads are clean and free from oil or grease.
Apply the specified locking agent to the bolt threads.

Bolt and Nut Identification

An ISO metric bolt or screw made of steel and larger than 6 mm in diameter can be identified by either of the
symbols ISO M or M embossed or indented on top of the bolt head.

In addition to marks identifying the manufacturer, the top of the bolt head is also marked with symbols indicating the
strength grade e.g. 8.8, 10.9, 12.9, 14.9. Alternatively, some bolts and screws have the M and strength grade symbol
stamped on the flats of the hexagon.

Encapsulated ('Patched') bolts and scre s

Encapsulated ('patched') bolts and screws have a thread locking agent applied to the threads during manufacture.
Most thread locking agents are colored, the band of color extending for 360 around the thread. Some locking agents
however, are neutral in color and may not be so easily identified apart from a slightly darker area of thread where
the locking agent has been applied. The locking agent is released and activated by the tightening process and is then
chemically cured to provide the locking action.
topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupId=276&id=123 4/21
15.12.2011 TOPIx - WSM-4479 - Workshop Manual - Discovery 3 (L319) 2005-2009MY
Self-locking bolts and scre s

Unless stated in a specific repair procedure, self-locking bolts and screws i.e. nylon patched or trilobular thread can
be re-used provided that resistance is felt when the locking portion enters the female thread.

Nylon patched bolts and screws have a locking agent either applied to, or inserted in the threaded portion. They are
identified by the presence of a colored section of thread extending approximately 180 around the thread or by a
colored plug inserted into the bolt.

Trilobular bolts have a special thread form which creates a slight interference with the thread of the hole or nut into
which it is screwed.

C AUTION: Do Not re-use self-locking fasteners in critical locations e.g. drive plates/flywheel or engine bearings.
Do not install non self-locking fasteners where a self-locking fastener is specified.

Trilobular bolts should not be used as a substitute for patched bolts.

Nut identification

A nut with an ISO metric thread is marked on one face or one of the hexagonal flats with the strength grade symbol
8, 12, 14. Some nuts with the strength grade 4, 5 or 6 are also marked and some have the metric symbol M on the
hexagonal flat opposite the strength grade marking.

A clock face system is sometimes used as an alternative method of indicating the strength grade. The external
chamfers or a face of the nut is marked in a position relative to the appropriate hour mark on a clock face to indicate
the strength grade.

A dot is used to locate the 12 o'clock position and a dash to indicate the strength grade. If the grade is above 12, two
dots identify the 12 o'clock position.

When tightening a slotted or castellated nut, never loosen it to insert a split pin except where specified as part of an
adjustment procedure. If difficulty is experienced in correctly positioning the slot, alternative washers or nuts should
be selected.

Where a nut is tightened to adjust or maintain bearing pre-load, the tightening procedure must be adhered to.

Self-locking nuts

topix.landrover.jlrext.com/topix/content/document/view?groupI